a handbook to modern greek - archive
TRANSCRIPT
A HANDBOOK
TO
MODERN GREEK
EDGAR VINCENTOOXDSTBEAIi OTTAEDS
AND
T. G. DICKSON07 ATHSN8
SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED
MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED
ST. MARTIN'S STREET, LONDON1919
,;
'''*
) PA
018282 i(]icj
MACMILLAN AND CO., LimitedLONDON • BOMBAY • CALCUTTA
MELBOURNE
THE MACMILLAN COMPANYNEW YORK • BOSTON • CHICAGOATLANTA • SAN FRANCISCO
THE MACMILLAN CO OF CANADA, Ltd.
TORONTO
COPYRIGHT
First Edition {Fcap. Bvo), printed 1879
Second {Crown 8vo) 1881, Reprinted 1887, 1893, 1904, 1910, 1919
PEEFACE.
This book has been written, not to prove a theory, but to
supply the want of a practical work on Modern Greek.
In its present condition, Modern Greek is of the greatest
interest to the classical student and the philologist, but
hitherto it has (in England at least) been strangely neg-
lected. By many it is believed that a corrupt patois of
Turkish and Italian is now spoken in Greece; and few,
even among professed scholars, are aware how small the
difference is between the Greek of the New Testament and
the Greek of a contemporary Athenian newspaper. The
changes in the language during the last 1800 years are
certainly less important than those which took place in
England between the times of Chaucer and of Shakespeare.
To a traveller in the Levant, a knowledge of Modern
Greek is of the greatest advantage, as it enables him to
dispense with the services of an interpreter. Throughout
the East the principal merchants are Greeks, and in Pera,
the principal quarter of Constantinople where Europeans
reside, Modern Greek is as useful as Turkish.
Another circumstance which renders the language inter-
esting is that every year it is becoming more pure and
classical : Turkish and Italian words are eliminated ; old
grammatical forms, which have been lost for centuries,
iv Preface.
are again brought into common use ; while vulgarisms
and foreign constructions are discarded.
This change is not confined, as might be supposed, to
the literary classes. Education is widely diffused in Greece,
and the grammar which is taught in the National Primary
Schools {drjiioTiKa axoikua) differs but little from the " Parry "
which is taught at Eton, while the young Greek is too
proud of his knowledge to use any but the most classical
phraseology he is acquainted with.
The following are the special features of this work :
—
The Exercises are composed of sentences constantly used
in ordinary conversation.
The English and Greek of the Exercises are given side
by side for the convenience of those who wish to gain a
rapid conversational knowledge.
In the Dialogues (Part II) an endeavour has been made
to give reliable information about Greece and the Greeks,
in addition to teaching the requisite phrases. The subjects
mentioned include travelling in the interior, its probable
expense, Greek customs, the pay of dragomen and inter-
preters, the best way of visiting the antiquities, a Greek
lesson, etc.
Some letters have been added to serve as models, com-
prising invitations, applications to have letters forwarded,
orders for rooms, a form of enquiry of the Minister of the
Interior respecting brigands, etc. •
Part III contains examples of the Greek of successive
periods from B.C. 850-A. D. 1821. Passages have been
taken from
Preface.
. B.C.
vi Preface.
In a work of this kind, it is impossible to avoid some
inaccuracies and imperfections; in view of future editions
the authors will therefore be most grateful for any hints
or suggestions, which may help to render the book more
useful or more complete.
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
A MOST valuable addition has been made to this edition
in the form of an Appendix by Professor B.. C. Jebb, of
Glasgow, on 'The Relation of Modem to Classical Greek,
especially in regard to Syntax,'
In the University of Glasgow the study of Modem Greek
has now for some years been connected with that of the
ancient language. With a view to illustrating the relations
between tliem, a portion of Xenophon's Anabasis has been
published ^ with a Modern Greek version facing the classical
text ; and the elements of Modem Greek form a regular
subject of instruction. For more advanced students, special
lectures on Modern Greek are given every winter, and at the
close of the course an examination is held in Modem Greek
grammar, translation at sight, and composition. The results
have been most satisfactory in stimulating the interest of
classical students, and in laying the foundation of a practical
acquaintance with a language so widely spoken in Southern
Europe and in many of our large towns.
The authors are indebted to Dr. J. J. Hornby, Head-
master of Eton College, Mr. C. D. Cobham, Commissioner
^ Maclehose, Glasgow.
List of Authorities. vii
of Larnaca, Professor Constantinides, Professor Daniel
Sanders of Alt. Strelitz, who has translated the work
into German, and to many others for encouragement and
valuable suggestions.
The Eev. J. P. Mahaffy has very kindly revised the
proof-sheets of our text.
April, 1881.
LIST OF AUTHORITIES.
The Modern Greek Language, in its relation to Ancient
Greek, by E. M. Geldart, B.A. (Clarendon Press, Oxford,
1870.)
Grammaire Abr^g^e du Grec Actuel, par A. R. Rangab^.
Practical and Easy Method of learning the Modern Greek
Language, by Dr. Ang. Vlachos.
An Elementary Greek Grammar, by Edward St. John
Parry, M.A.
TpafifiariKfj Trjs EWrjviKris T^axrcrrjs, (itto T. Ttwadiov.
TpafifiariKT] tj]s Neas ''EXKr}viK.rjs VKaxrarjs, xnro T. VfpaKrj.
Horse Hellenicse, by John Stuart Blackie, F.R.S.E., etc., etc.
Grammatik der Griechischen Vulgarsprache, by Professor
Mullach.
Modern Greek Grammar, by T. Sopliocles.
History of the Greek Language, by D. Mavrophredes.
(Smyrna, 1871.)
Romaic Greek, by Professor Clyde.
The Pronunciation of the Greek Language, by Constantinus
Oekonomos, (St, Petersburg, 1829.)
Compendium der Vergleichenden Grammatik, by Professor
Schleicher.
Introduction to Greek and Latin Etymology, by John
Peile, M.A.
INTRODUCTORY.
It has always appeared to me a great mistake, and one of
which our British Hellenists have good reason to be ashamed,
that Greek in this country is always talked about as if it
were a dead language, and Modern Greek, if mentioned at
all, thrown aside as a ^>a<ow, an acquaintance with which
would rather hinder than advance the student in his mastery
of the great classical tongue. This notion is both philo-
logically false and practically pernicious. Modern Greek is
not a patois, a mongrel, a hybrid, or degraded dialect in any
legitimate sense of the word : it is the same language in
which St. Paul delivered his discourse to the Athenians from
the hill of Mars in the first century, with only such slight
variations as the course of time naturally brings with it in
the case of all spoken languages which have enjoyed an
imbroken continuity of cultivated usage. No doubt there
do exist in Greece, and always have existed, certain local
perversions of the cultivated speech, which may in a loose
sense be called patois ; just as we have a peculiar local type
of English in Dorsetshire, another in Lancashire, and that
on whichi the genius of Bums has impressed a classical type,
Introductory. J. S, Blackie. ix
commonly called Scotch. This may be called a patois, in the
same sense that the Greek of Pindar might be so called, or
the Italian of Milan or Venice, not otherwise. But upon this
low stratum of purely popular Greek, we have the Greek of
the pulpit, the Greek of the newspapers, and the Greek of
a living literature increasing every day in variety and in
significance. To call this a patois is to shew an ignorance
either of the facts, or of the use of language altogether
inexcusable ; and to throw such a phase of the Greek speech
as is now written and spoken in Greece by all educated
men, altogether out of view in the study of that famous
tongue, can proceed only from a certain limitation of range
and narrowness of sympathy, sometimes observed in per-
sons whose curious familiarity with dead books renders
them averse from the society of living men. The more
natural, obvious, and healthy view of the matter is this,
that a language which has come down to us in an uninter-
rupted stream of vitality, from the time of Homer to the
present hour—nearly 3000 years—and is still spoken ex-
tensively not only in Greece proper, but in various parts of
the Mediterranean, by confessedly the most acute, the best
educated, and the most progressive people in those parts,
has a legitimate claim to be treated and studied as a living
language, and not to be stretched out, as dead bodies are
on an anatomical table, for the purposes of the grammatical
X Introductory. J. S. Blackie.
dissector. Such a method of studying Greek would not only
be a clear gain to the scholar by placing under his eye the
whole process of growth exhibited in the history of the lan-
guage, otherwise artificially curtailed by an arbitrary limit
called the classical period : but it would bring the student
of the Christian scriptures directly into the current from
which the writers of the sacred volume, and the fathers of
the Church drew their peculiar phraseology : for that Modern
Greek is in some of its main features identical with apostolic
and ecclesiastical Greek, is a proposition from which no accu-
rate scholar will allow himself to dissent. But further : to
practical men—as Englishmen and Scotsmen are fond by way
of eminence of being esteemed—it must be a consideration
of the greatest weight that all spoken languages are learned,
by hearing and speaking, in a much shorter space of time
than dead languages by the usual scholastic method : German,
for instance, which to Englishmen is a somewhat difficult
language, is for every practical purpose of understanding
and being understood, acquired perfectly by a young per-
son of ordinary talent, conversing daily with native Ger-
mans in six months or less ; and there is no reason in
the nature of things why Greek should not be acquired the
same way; and even without going to Greece, there are
well-educated Greeks in London, Liverpool, and not a few
other places, from whom Greek could be learned as a living
Introductory. J. S. Blackie. xi
language, with as much facility, and with as much effect as
German, Italian, or French. Nor is there the slightest
danger that the practical hold thus got of the language of
Homer and Plato and St. Paul, as a living organ of expres-
sion, will act as a hindrance to the scientific study of the
language : on the contrary, the familiarity with the language,
which spoken use most readily and most abundantly gives,
!will present more ample and more various materials on
which the generalizing faculty of the philosophical gram-
marian may operate. The present little hook is conceived
upon a plan which I have always recommended as the
only natural and rational plan, not less in the acquisition of
dead languages properly so called than in the more obvious
sphere of spoken tongues. The principle of this plan is
that the ear and the tongue should be exercised largely
from the beginning, and not merely the memory and the
understanding. This implies that no rules should be
learned which are not immediately put in practice, and
that it is wiser to educe the rule from familiar materials
than to inculcate the rule and leave the materials to be
painfully searched for as an after business. Of the prac-
tical utility of such a little book in the present state of
easy and frequent intercourse between people and people
there can be no doubt; and it gives me pleasure to think
that the authors of a volume supplying such an obvious
xii Introductory. J. S. Blackie.
desideratum in our elementary Greek discipline should
have considered my name worthy of being associated with
theirs in a work of such manifest utility. Possibly I may
yet live to see the time when not only young men in the
public service of the country frequenting various parts of
the Mediterranean will, as a matter of course, speak Greek
as readily as French, but when even the professional in-
culcators of scholastic Greek in our great schools and
universities will relax somewhat of the rigidity of their
method, and institute practical exercises in colloquial
Greek, as a most beneficial adjunct to the severity of
their strictly philological drill.^
JOHN" STUART BLACKIE.
College, Edinburgh,
September, 25, 1879.
* As these prefatory remarks are necessarily short, I have to refer
those who may wish to see the proof of my views in detail to the three
papers on the subject of Modern Greek, Greek Accent, and Romaic
Literature in my Horae Mellenicue, London, Macmillan and Co., 1874.
CONTENTS.
Grammar
PART I.PAOB... I
PART 11.
Dialogues •••3Letters
PART III.
[Passages from Ancient Greek Authors, with translations in
I Modern Greek
174
187
PART IV.
Selections from Contemporary Greek Writers . . • .223
PART V.
Vocabulary •• ••57The Written Character . . . • - • • -280
APPENDIX.
The Relation of Modem to Classical Greek, especially in regard to
Syntax, by Prof. R. 0. Jebb 285
PART I.
Introductory.SECT. PAGE1. The Alphabet ........ i
2. Pronunciation of the Vowels 2
3. Pronunciation of the Diphthongs 3
4. Pronunciation of the Consonants ...... 3
5. Observations on Pronunciation of Modern Greek ... 5
6. Accentuation ......... 6
7. The Acute Accent 6
8. The Grave Accent .79. The Circumflex Accent . , 7
10. Special Rules for Accentuation ...... 8
11. Words without an Accent . 8
12. Enclitics , . . . 9
13. Breathings 10
14. Stops II
15. The Article il
Substantives.
16. Remarks on Declension of Nouns 12
1 7. Classification of Substantives 12
18. First Declension 13
19. Remarks on First Declension 16
20. Second Declension . . . . .*
. . .1821. Diminutives in -lov 19
22. Contracted Nouns of Second Declension . . . .2023. Third Declension 23
24. Uncontracted Nouns of Third Declension . . . -2325. Remarks on Uncontracted Nouns 26
26. Third Declension. Contracted '• 27
27. Third Declension. Irregular 31
18. Third Declension. Remarks on Contracted Nouns . . 32
29. Supplementary Declension 32
30. Terminations instead of Prepositions 33
31. Patronymics 34
Contents of Part I. XV
Adjectives and Numerals.
-T.
XVI Contents of Part I,
SECT. PAGE67. Observations on the Tenses. The Aorist . . . .7968. „ „ The Future . . . .8269. „ „ The Perfect and Pluperfect , 83
70. „ „ The Conditional . . . 8471. Contracted Verbs 87
72. T»/x(ia; 88
73. KaXio) . . . .9174. Neuter Verba 55
75. Verbs in -/« 9576. Impersonal Verbs y6
77. Irregiilar ,. .98
Prepositions.
78. Prepositions. Classification of
79. Prepositions governing Genitive
80. „ „ Dative
81. „ „ Accusative
82. „ „ Gen. and Ace.
83. „ „ Gen. Dat. and Ace.
84. Bemarks on Prepositions . . .
107
108
109
nono112
113
85.
86.
90.
Adverbs.
Adverbs . . . . . . . . . .116
„ of Time . .117
„ of Place 118
Miscellaneous Adverbs 118
Conjunctions. . . . . , . . . .119Interjections. .«. ..•..120
Syntax.
91. Peculiarities of Modern Greek Syntax 120
92. Observations on the Article . . . . . , .121
93. „ ,. Cases 121
94. „ „ Adjective 122
95. „ „ Numerals 123
96. „ „ Pronouns , . . . . .12397. „ „ Verb 124
98. Prosody , , , , .129
MODERN GREEK.
§ 1. The Gkeek Alphabet.
The Greek Alphabet is composed of 24 letters, of which 7
axe vowels and 17 consonants.
Character.
2 Modern Greek.
Besides these letters there originally existed the following,
viz. :
—
(i) f, Van, or as it is called from its shape, Dighamma.
(2) ^, ? , Koppa. Latin Q. Used as symbol for 90.
(3) ~^> Sampi, used as symbol for 900.
(4) r', Stigma, originally a form of Vau: in MSS.=(rr,
Symbol for 6.
§ 2. Vowels.
Letter. Name. Pronunciation.
a alpha a, in father ; i] rpdntCa, the table : to arixS-
ttXoiov, the steamer.
* epsilon e, in let, met ; tneira, afterwards ; firpene,
ought, Imperfect of npfntt.
T) eta 6, in the ; 6 KadT]yTiTfjs, the professor.
« eota same as eta, e in the; f] Kpta-is, the crisis,
judgment ; mva, I drink.
omicron o, in not^; v ^0^0, glory; to owXoi', the gun.
V epsilon e in the ; vyf/r]\6s, high,
o) omegha o in hope ^ ; Ka\cos, well.
§ 3. Diphthongs.
01 e, in met ; 7rfnai8fVfifvos, educated ; 6 nais, the boy.
av af, but before /3, 7, 8, C, \ m> "> P and all vowels, soft,
like V ; avBetrriKos, authentic ; fj avyfj, the dawn.
« 6, in the ; t6 el8os, the kind.
(V ef, but subject to the same exceptions as av ; fvxd-
puTTos, pleasant ; evyevrjs, polite, noble.
tp> ef, but subject to the same exceptions, as av ; rjv^rjcra,
I increased ; v^pa, 2 Aor., I found.
«>. e, in the ; avoiya, I open ; koivos, common.
ov 00, in too ; olros, this ; aiSds, nobody.
VI e, in the ; 6 vlos, the son.
* Very little difference is made in rapid conversation between omicron
and omegha.
Consonants. 3
Remarks.
1. When the latter of two vowels composing a diphthong
i? surmounted by a Diairesis (") the two vowels composing it
pronounced separately, xavfievf, poor fellow ; t6 KaiKt, the
f:.i'[ae.
2. The vowels rj, t, v, and the diphthongs ti, oi, vi, have all
the same sound in Modern Greek, that of e, in me or the.
^. In Diphthongs both accent and breathing stand, over
second vowel, except when the first vowel is in large
character.
Letter. Name.
3 veta
y ghamma
d dhelta
C zeta
6 theta
K kappa
X lamvdha
/I me
^ xe
§ 4. Consonants.
Pronunciation.
T ; 6 ^los, life ; dva^aivco, I ascend.
a sound between g and h; t6 yd\a, milk.
Before e, rj, t, v, it has a sound like y in
yes, or the German j in jeder, (yt'yaj,
giant, is pronounced, yeghas) : y-y and yx
like ng nasal, 6 ayyeXo?, the angel,
soft voiced th, as in the, then ; Bida, I give
;
TO SevBpov, the tree,
z, in zebra ; fj^Tco, may he live, hurrah,
breathed th, as in thin and death ; r] Secopia,
the theory,
k; before e, t, v, ij, it has a somewhat softer
sound ; koXos, good ; fj icaKia, wickedness.
1 ; 6 Xetuj/, the lion ; fj av\fj, the court,
m ; TO fifT(cnou, the forehead : for fin see
under double consonants,
n ; 6 vaos, the temple ; k(v6s, empty : for vt
see under double consonants.
X ; 6 ^fvos, the stranger ; to ^evoSoxt'iov, the
hotel.
B 2
4 Modern Greek.
Letter. Name. Pronunciation.
1" pc p ; npcTrei, must ; after /n, as b ; 6 tfXiropos, the
merchant, pronounced emboros.
P rho r, aspirate; ^ piCa, the root ; piuTco, I throw.
a- seghma hard hissing s ; o-woto's, correct : before ^, y,
5, fi, as soft s ; t6 acrp.a, the song.
T taf t ; ToVf, then ; but preceded by v, it is pro-
nounced as d ; (^povTiba, care, pronounced
frondetha.
<^ fe f ; TO 0cof, the light.
X he the most difficult letter : in the middle of
a word like ch in loch, or German doch.
But X is pronounced with the vowel
which follows, and not like ch in German,
with the vowel which precedes. Ex.
the Greeks say €-x«, the Germans fx-w.
At the beginning of a word like the Flo-
rentine c, but soft, as ch in ich, before
h'H)'") o x°P°^y the dance; 17 ;(«<bi/, the snow.
^ pse ps ; TO yj/cofii, the bread ; )} o\}ris, the appearance.
Division of the Consonants.
Smooth. Middle. Aspirate.
r with p sound tt /3 (^
Mutest „ k „ K y Xt „ T 8 6,
Semi- Vowels.
1
A fi V p a:
Aspirated Consonants.
6 <j> Xare considered as the aspirated forms of t, tt, k ; when on<
of the latter is followed by an aspirated vowel it takes it
aspirated form. In the vernacular when two smooth con
sonants meet in the same word, the former is aspirated.
Pronunciation. 5
Double Consonants.
^ kse, is composed of k, or y, or x> and o",
C zeta, „ o- and 8.
^ pse, „ i3, or tt, or ^, and a.
The following combinations of consonants are used, in
words of foreign origin, to represent the sound of letters
which the Greek Alphabet does not contain.
uTT stands for the sound b ; as, 6 /i7rdp/x7raj=barbas, the
uncle ; 6 Mnaipcov, Byron ; o Mnoraapris, Botzaris.
vT represents d; as, to j'Ttj3dw=deevanee, the divan.
§ 5. Pbonunciation.
In addition to the above rules for the pronunciation of
each letter, the following hints may be found useful.
1. The closest attention must be given to the accentuation,
is the syllable on which the accent falls is pronounced with
1 stress, and is further prolonged to the exclusion of any
lifference, in duration, between long and short vowels. For
xample, avdpanos is pronounced dvOpioTros, the first syllable
jeing emphasized and prolonged, while the a> (oraegha) is
pronounced short, like o (omicron).
2. In many words of two or three syllables, the accented
yllable alone is pronounced distinctly. The Greeks clip
iheir words at the beginning as well as at the end (see note
DU p. 122).
3. The rough breathing is written but never pronounced.
A.11 initial vowels and diphthongs are pronounced with a
smooth breathing.
4. Particular attention must be paid to the y (ghamma)
ind to the x (he), which is an entirely diflferent sound from
t (kappa).
6 Modern Greek.
5. When two vowels are linked together by 'Synize-
sis,' they are pronounced as one syllable. Ex. to. x«/>Tia, the
papers.
§ 6. Accentuation.
1. The following rules on Accentuation are such as apply
to all classes of words. To add all the special rules affecting
each particular class (substantives, pronouns, verbs, &c.)
before the words themselves are known, would only cause
confusion; they will be given with the words which they
afiect.
2. The accentuation in Modern Greek is the same as in
Ancient.
3. The accent can never be thrown further back than the
antepenultimate.
4. There are three kinds of accent :
—
(a) Acute ('), o^da, as in ennopos, merchant; iroklrrjs, citizen;
KpiTTis, judge ; which can be placed on any of the last three
syllables,
(6) Grave ('), /Sapela, as in fiadrjTrjs, pupil; which can only
be placed on^he last syllable,
(c) Circumflex ("), irfpiaircofievT}, as in TifxS), I honour;
(Tufia, body ; which can be placed on the last syllable or the
penultimate,
5. No difference is made in pronunciation between the
Acute, the Grave, and the Circumflex.
§ 7. The Acute Accent,
I. The Acute Accent can be placed on the last syllable,
the word is then called oxytone ; on the penultimate, the
word is then called paroxytone; on the antepenultimate,
the word is then called proparoxjiione.
The Circumflex Accent. 7
2. Uncompounded words not oxytone or circumflex, with
the last syllable long, are accented on the penult ; as, ttoXiVj;?
like English conceited.
3. Uncompounded words not oxytone or circumflex, having
tlie last syllable short, are accented on the antepenult ; as,
.'yyfXof, like English dgony.
4. When the last syllable is long and the accent falls on
the penult, it must be acute.
5. The accent can only be on the antepenult when the last
syllable is short ; as, af6pa>Tioi : in the genitive (dvdpdoTTov) the
last syllable is long, and the accent is brought forward to the
penult^. At the end of a word the diphthongs ot, ai, are
considered short, except in adverbs '.
6. Words only take an acute accent on the final syllable,
when they are followed by a stop or an enclitic; tiV, who,
interrogative, forms an exception to this rule, and takes an
acute accent, whether in the middle of a sentence or not.
7. When an oxytone word occurs in the middle of a
sentence, the acute accent is changed into a grave : as, 7 TfXerf]
^PX^arev, the service has begun, but ^pxi-<Tev 17 rtXtrrj. Note
the difference of accent on TtXfTt] in the two sentences.
8. It is conjectured that the Greeks formerly raised their
voices at the end of a clause with completed sense.
§ 8. The Geave Accent.
I. The grave accent can only stand on the last syllable.
For rules respecting use of the grave accent see § 7. 7.
§ 9. The Circumflex Accent.
I. The circumflex accent can be placed on the last syl-
I lable, or, if the last is short, on the penult : in the former
* This may not be a scientific analysis of the proceiiB, but it is the
I clearest way of stating the result.
* There is no Optative.
H Modern Greek.
oase the word is called periepomen, in the latter properi-
spomen.
2. ro fx^\ov, the apple, becomes in the genitive rov htjXov;
the accent being changed from circumflex to acute, because
the last syllable is long.
3. It can never be placed on a short vowel.
4. If, when the penult is long by nature and the last
syllable short, the accent falls on the former, it must be
circumflex ; as, ro crafia.
§ 10. Special Bules for AccENTtTATiON.
The following rules, most of which are taken from Parry,
may assist the student in determining the position of the
accent :
—
{a) Oxytones are
Verbal substantives in n% ixos, rfip, rpis, rpos ; as, aeiafws.
Substantives in fig; as, (iacnXds, lirirds.
Uncompounded Adjectives in t6s, ikos, /xo'j, p6s, ^s, is; as,
pt}ToptK6s, (f)o^ep6s, tipevrjg, fjdus.
(b) Paroxytones are
Substantives in la ; as, 86Kip.aa-ia.
Diminutives (of three syllables) in lop, and in iotkos, /Xoir,
vXoyJ
as, veavioKos, iraiblov.
Adverbs in dw?, Ua, brjv, as, avr'iKa, (TvXkri^brjv, TroXXd/cts.
§ 11. "Words without an Accent.
All words are accented except the following, ten in
number.
The article 6, ^, ol, al, the.
The prepositions tU, in or into ; cV, in ; tK, out of.
The conjunctions d, if; wr, how, that.
The negative ov.
Enclitics.
§ 12. Enclitics.
T. Enclitics are words which throw their accent back on
to the preceding word.
2. The principal are /lov, /toi, /nf, /lar, o-ov, croi, o-e, orSr, mv,
rwy, Ti'y, Ttvor, rives, itoTi,
3. At the beginning of a sentence, they keep their accent,
4. "When the preceding word is accented on the last syl-
able, the accent of the enclitic is absorbed.
ffore )LQv. Never in my life.
6 (coXof /iov iraTTjp. My good father.
5. When the preceding word is paroxytone, a dissyllable
nclitic keeps its accent, while the accent of a monosyllable
£ absorbed.
at npa^ds aov. Your actions.
irpd^eis Tivfs. Some actions.
6. "When the preceding word is proparoxytone or pro-
lerispcmen, the accent of the enclitic is thrown on to the
ast syllable of the preceding word, and becomes acute. Ex.
TO [iddqixd fiov. My lesson.
TO (r!i>ixa fiov. My body.
7. If several enclitics follow one another, each throws its
iccent back on to the preceding one. Ex.
80s fioi TO. Give it me.
This at least is the rule in writing. In conversation a
jlreek would say 86s fioi to.
The following words are given as an exercise to be read
iloud. The greatest care must be taken to accentuate the
proper syllable. The student will be able to form some
lo Modern Greek.
idea how different the intonation of Modem Greek is from
that of Ancient Greek, as taught in England.
Aiytffdor, 'AXe^avbpos, 'Avriyovrf, 'Aaia, *A;(tXXevr.—Botwr/a,
Bopeas.—FajSpiJ^X, Tepfiavia.—AanoKKrjs, ArjfioKpiroi, Aioy/i/?;?.
—
Elpr]vr],''EixTrov<ra,'EiTi8avpos.—ZaKvvdos.—'MpaKKiji, 'Ux^ (Echo),
'H(rlo8os.—Qeava, Q(p.iaTOK\fjs, QeoKpiros, Qtjatvs, Qpaa-v^ovXogi
QovuvbiSrii.—'ladpos, 'laoKpaTrjs, ^lavia.— Kakvyj/^o), Kf(paWT]viM
K;;0Kr<rdf, KiKfpayf (Cicero), KXfOTrarpa, K6piv6os, Kptova-a, Kv^(i
(Cybele).
—
AaoKocov, Af(ovi5at, AovKiavosy Avcrlnaxos.—MaiapSpa
MijSeia (Medea), M»jSia (Media).
—
^awiKaa, ^Tjptvs, NiKoS^juos,-
'OSvcraevs, '0\vp.TTia, "OXvp.nos, 'Op<pfis.—n.fKon6vvi](ros, UoXvKpt
TT]s.— Po86ni].—2dkap,is, SffxeXt], 2,ina>vidi)Sf SwKpaTjjr.
—
Teiptaia
TtjtioXe(oj», TuSeus.
—
'YaKivdos.
§ 13. Bbeathings.
1. There are two breathings,
(a) the rough breathing or aspirate (') Baatuu
(6) the smooth breathing (') -^ikr).
2. Every vowel and diphthong at the beginning of a word
is written with a rough or smooth breathing.
3. In Modern Greek the rough breathing does not affect
the pronunciation^ of the word on which it is placed, al-
though when preceded by the prepositions dno, ini, vn6, Kara,
fifTa, etc., the final vowel being dropped, it changes the final
mute into the corresponding aspirate. (For examples see
par. 6.)
4. V (epsilon) and p (rho), at the beginning of a word, are
always written with the rough breathing. "When two ps
come together in one word, the former is written with
a smooth, the latter with a rough breathing.
^ Cf. Peile, p. 425.—
' Different as was the origin of h in the two lan-
guages (Greek and Latin), it is quite certain that the letter was rapidly
vanishing in each of them, at the classical period of their literature, or
even earlier.'
Declension of Nouns- It
5. p (rho) is the only consonant which is written with a
breathing.
EoTA Subscript.
The Eota Subscript is not pronounced. It indicates that
the vowel, under which it is placed, was formerly followed by
an eota.
The most ordinary cases in which it is written are the 2nd
and 3rd pers. sing, of the subjunctive {ya Xvi^s, va Xvj]), and the
dative singular of substantives and adjectives.
§ 14. Stops.
1. A full stop, TfXft'a (TTiyiif) (.), has the same force as in
English.
2. The ava Tf\(la ov fifar) anyfir] (') takes the place of our
colon and semi-colon.
3. The comma (wroo-rty^^) and note of exclamation (fVt-
^(our]fjLnTiKni>) are the same as in English.
4. A semi-colon (;) has the force of our point of inter-
rogation (JpUTtjfiaTlKOv).
§ 15. Thk Aeticle.
The definite article (r6 opiarriKov updpov), 6, fj, t6, the, is
declined as follows ;
—
12 Modern Greek.
There is no indefinite article {aopiarov apdpov) : its place is
Bometinies sui)plied by els, p.ia, eu, one, or tlie indefinite pronoun,
Ttf, ri. For example : a man, ds (or euas) wdpoiTtos or iivSpoy
TTOS TIS,
§ 16. Remaeks on the Declension of Nouns.
1. There are two numbers, the Singular and the PluralU
The Dual is no longer used.
2. The Dative is only used in writing. In conversation i
is generally replaced by the preposition us, with the Accusa
tive. Ex.
Adj TO fls rov Ki'piov, and not ra Kvpta.
3. The Genitive Plural of all Nouns ends in mv.
4. In Neuter Nouns, the Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative are the same, in each number. Ex.
Sing., Nom. Voc. Ace. $v\ov. Plural, Nom. Voc. Ace. ^v\a.
5. The lower classes drop v (Ne) at the end of a word
For example, they say, dia to 6(6, for God's sake, instead o;
5ia rov 6f6v : fls nj bv(TTv\ia, in misfortune, for etc T71
bv(rrv)(iav.
§ 17. SUBSTANTIVES.
I. Substantives {ovopLara oixriacniKa) can be classed in thre<
declensions^, viz., two parisyllabic, which do not increase
the genitive, and one imparisyllabic, which does.
The First Declension comprises Masculines in -as, -rjs.
Feminines in -a, -»;,
The Second „ „ Masc. and Fem. in -os, -ovs,
Neuter in -ov, -ow, -i{ov).
The Third „ „ All substantives which in.
crease in the Genitive.
' This claasificatioQ is adopted by the Greeks.
First Declension. ' 13
2. There is a supplementary Declension, used only in the
^;Mlken language, which is not included iu the above classifi-
cation.
3. There are three Genders: Masculine (dpafw/coV), Femi-
nine {6r\KvK6v), and Neuter (ov8tTfpov).
4. Masculine are the names for men who follow certain
professions or trades (o raixlas, the cashier, 6 paTTTTjs, the
tailor), all months, and, with a few exceptions, mountains
and rivers; substantives in eu?, av and first declensions in
ai, T]S,
5. Feminines are the names for women who follow certain
occupations (17 pdirrpia, the seamstress), all arts, handicrafts,
and sciences, the names of towns, trees, islands, and coun-
tries ; terminations in la and first declension in a, rj.
6. Neuter are the letters of the alpliabet, most diminutives,
and verbal substantives ; the second declension in ov and the
tliird declension in fj.a, i, v.
The above enumeration makes no pretence to be complete.
It could not be rendered so without very considerable en-
largement, which would only confuse the student.
§ 18. FiEST Declension.
The First Declension contains
Masculine nouns in os and rjs.
Feminine nouns in a and t].
I. 'O Taplat, the cashier.
Plural.
H Modern Greek.
Like ranias are
6 vfavias, the youDg man. 6 Aco;(Xtaf, the snail.
Some proper names in -as make the Genitive in -a instead
of -ov, as: 6 'hvaviui, 6 Qoifias, 6 Aovkos, k.t.X. (see 6.)
2. 'O iToKiTrjs, the citizen.
Singular. Plural.
Nom. 6 TTokiTTji
Gen. ToC TToXtVou (vernacu-
lar TToXtTIj)
Dat. TW TToKlTrj
Ace. TOI/ TToXlTTjV
VOC. O) TToXlTa
Like TToXiV;;? are
6 vovTj/s, the sailor.
6 TToiTjTTjs, the poet.
ot TToXtrai (vern. iroXtVatf)
rcoi' TToXtrwi*
Tois TToXiruif
rot's TToXiVar (vern. 77oXiTatr)
w rroXtrnt (vern. n-oXiVatiV
6 (caTTvoTTwXjjy, the tobacconii
6 vondpxrjs, the prefect.
3. 'H yXcoacra, the tongue or language.
Plural.Singular.
Nom. fj yXaxraa
Gen. TTJi yXoxrcn;? (yXfocro-ay)
Dat. rfj y\6)(T(TTj
Ace. Tiji/ y\u>(T<rav
VoC. (b yXwtro-a
Like yXwcrcra are
fj SaXacrtrn, the sea.
f) pi^a, the root.
at y\S)(r(rai. (yXcio-ffatj)
Tmj> •yXoxTO'wj'
TaT? yXaxTirais
ras y\a)(Tcras (rals yXaxraaisS
2i yXaxraat (yXoxrcratf),
fl TpdneCa, the table, the ban]
f] povaa, the Muse.
First Declension. 15
4. 'H Sipa, the hour,
Singular.
Noin. r} copa
Gen.
i6 Modern Greek,
Like 'Ejra/uftfwvSa? are
6 ECv^a-ydpay, Pythagoras. 6 'Arav/as, Ananias.
6 A<a)V(Saf, Leonidas.
§ 19. Kemarks on the First Declensiok.
1. Masculine nouns in T?;r, ttt;?, apxr]f, fierpris, 7ra>\r]t, a>VT]tf\
rpi^tjs, "karprjs, and the names of nationalities as Uiparii form
the vocative in a short.
Ex. Uepa-rjs, the Persian, Voc. Uepaa
vofjuip)^r]if the prefect, „ vop-ap^a
^i^\umd>XT}s, the bookseller, „ i3t/3X»o7rcoXa.
2. In the vernacular all Feminine Substantives of this
declension, in a, form the Genitive in ay. In writing, this
is only done when the final a of the nominative is preceded
by p or a vowel.
3. The Genitive Plural of words of the first declensio^
has a Circumflex Accent on the last syllable. Ex.
Kairvo7ra>\S>v, of the tobacconists. The only exceptions ar
feminine adjectives, of which the masculine ends in or, ar
is paroxytone, proparoxytone, or properispomenon. Ex.
ayios, fj <5yia, Gen. Plur. rav dyia>v.
4. All parisyllabic oxytones take a circumflex in thj
Genitive and Dative.
5. In words like S>pa, j3t^Xio;ra)X»jf, 'Errafieivwvbas, althoug|
the last syllable but one is a long o, it can only take an acut
accent, not a circumflex, because the last syllable is long. Ti\
those cases however where the final syllable is short, it takes
a circumflex : e. g. Nom. Plur. ai apai, ol ^i^XionSAai. Simi-
larly 6 iro\iTT}s, the citizen, has in Nom. Plur. ol TroXlrai.
6. The Dative Plural originally ended in -aia-i in the first
declension and -oia-i in the second. These forms are found in
poetry, and in Ionic prose.
First Declension. 17
7. The vulgar form of the Accusative Plural
—
rats fid^at?
'or TOff bo^as—is Aeolic and an acknowledged archaism. It
vas originally racr bo^avs. The old v has been dropped, and
he vowel consequently modified.
Vocabulary.
le cheated, rjnaTri<Tf (arraTw).
vas, T)To (fifmi).
le accused, tKaTrjyopr^ae (Karrf-
yopaj).
hey do, Kafivow ((cd/iyw), TVfpi-
iroiovv (irfpiTToiS)).
e, she, it is; they are, tlvoL
they asked, fC^rrjcrav {Cv^a>).
between us, ptTa^v pas.
it has been dissolved (broken),
he became, tyeivt (yipofmi),
he has not spoken, bev a>pi-
. XjjcTf (6pi\S>).
for the last hour, irpo pias apas.
Exercise ^
FiEST Declension. iipqth KA1212.
^he cashier has cheated the *0 raplas fjira-njcre t6v TvoKirqv,
citizen,
'he language of Ananias was 'H yKCxrcra rov 'Avavia tjto
false. "^(vbrfs.
ilence more often arises H a-uonf} Trpoepxerai avxporepa
from stupidity than from « ttjs fiXoKtias ^ eK ttjs <to-
wisdom. (}>ics.
'he prefect accused the book- 'o vopdpxrjt fKaTtjyoprjae rov 0t-
seller. ^\iorna\r]v.
irtues do honour to a man. At aptTai irtpinoiovv Tipfjv ds
Tov avOpoiirov.
J\\&i is the price of that Hoia ttvai f) npf] rov ^i^Xioi,
book 1 rovTov
;
he country is very barren. 'H x'^P'^ eivai ttoXv Syovos,
^ After once reading through the exercise, the student should cover
e Greek, while he translates the English, and vice versd.
Modem Greek.
How loud the voice of Epa*
minondas is
!
The sailors asked the way to
the tobacconist's.
The bank is closed on fete
days.
The sea is a good subject for
a poet.
The agreement between us
was broken.
The memory of that boy is
wonderful.
The hair of Pythagoras turned
white.
Tioaov bwarrj tivai f} (fiavfi rov
'Enafitiva>t'8a !
01 vavrai t^rjTrjaau tov Spofiov
npos TOV Kairyonmkov,
'H rpdne^a fivai KXtiarf] rat
iopras,
'H 6a\a(T(ra (luai KoXof ai^t-
KflfltVOV bia TOV TTOITITTIV.
H fifra^v pas avfjKfxovia tit-
Xvdrj.
*H pvrpiT) avrov tov iTai8iov
fivai BavpafTia.
'H Kopri TOV Uv&ayopa tytivf
§ 20. Second Declension.
The Second Declension contains
Masculine and Feminine Nouns in or. ovt.
Neuter Nouns in ov, ow, and t{ov).
I. 'o avdpamos, the man.
Singular.
Nom. o avdpamos
Gen. TOV avQpaynov
Dat. TW avdpa>ir<f
Acc. TOV avBpatitov
Voc. S avQpamt
Plural.
Like avdpanos are
6 vnrovpyos, the minister,
6 d8t\(f>6s, the brother.
6 irokepoi, the war.
6 avtpos, the wind.
6 ai8i]pos, the iron.
0(
Second Declension. 19
2. 'H 6io9, the road.
Singular.
20 Modern Greek.
3. These words have no diminutive force in ordinary use*.
4. When two syllables are bound together by the syni-
zesis, as in x"P'^i2. the first is pronounced very short, the
second with raised tone and a strong accent.
4. To x^pi"'? the paper.
Singular.
Second Declension. ai
3? Modern Greek.
Exercise.
Second Declension.
He is a man esteemed by the
people.
That man has a clever (wide-
awake) face.
He died of disease of the heart.
Put the roses in the glass.
They often go out shooting
(or hunting).
Iron and lead are the only
metals found in the coun-
try.
Give me some peaches and a
fig.
New year's gifts are generally
useless.
The ship is small;you will
not enjoy the passage.
Go up that street.
You must go straight up the
hill.
Bring me the keys.
Are there any birds about
here %
The current of the stream is
very strong.
The departure of the boat
was delayed.
He has a superior mind.
The crafty man met with his
match.
AEYTEPA KAI2I2.
£(t"7( avdpconos Tifxtafifvos vno
Tov \aov,
O avSpcoTTos ovros ej^fi f^vnvov
TrpocrioiTOP,
Anedavfv dno KnpSiaKfjv vocrov,
BaXf TO. pooa els to norrjpiov.
llrjyaivovv av\va fls ro Kvvrjyiov.
O (rLhrjpos KCLi 6 fiokv^Sos tivat ra
fiova p.fTaWa, ra onoia (irov)
ivpi(TK0VTai (Is rov ronov,
Aos poi (^fiov, fif) oXiya po8aKiva
Koi (V crvKov.
Ta 8S)pa TOV veov erovs (u>ai eV
ytVft (i)^pT](rTa.
To Tr\olov etvai fiiKpnv' Set/ 6a
fv\api(TTT]drjTf fls TO Ta^ei^iov,
Ava^rJTe ttjv obbv Tavrrjv (rov
8p6fJLOV TOXJTOv).
TLpinft va apa^rJTt kot rvOfla
TOP \Q<pov (pa TTOTt lata (r-dvi
fls TO ^ovvof.
*<pe ftoi (/[lou, fit) ra ickfiBid.
'Ynapxavcri TTTrjva e8S> jrtpi^;
O povg TOV jrora/toC tlvai jroX
opprjTtKos.
O aTTonXovs tov jrXot'ou efipddw
{^pyr]<re).
'Exd eKTOKTOP VOVP.
'O Kpvy\ripovs (navovpyos) evpt to
op,oi6p TOV (to Vaipi Tov\
Simple Nouns. as
§ 23. Third Declension-.
The Third Declension contains all nouns which increase
the number of their syllables in the genitive.
Terminations a, t, v, w, ^, p,' o-, v, ^.
Nouns of this declension can be divided into two large
classes, Simple and Contracted.
§ 24. Simple or Uncontbacted Nouns,
I. 'o ayitv, the contest.
Singular.
24 Modern Greek.
3. '0 piJTWp,
Simple
26 Modern Greek.
6 kXjjtt/p,
i] v6$,
6 rpiTTovs,
6 ^pcos,
f) 'EXXar,
6 Xifirjv,
6 yiyas,
fi XalXa^,
the policeman,
the night,
the tripod,
the hero,
Greece,
Salamis,
the harbour,
the giant,
the tempest,
the grace (favour).
Gen. Tov kXtjttjpos.
„ Trjs VVKTOi,
,, Tov Tp'mobos,
„ TOV ffpaos.
„ Tr)s 'EXXdSov.
„ Trfs "SfoKapivos.
,, TOV XlfXtVOS.
,, TOV yvyavTQs,
,, Tr]S XaiXaTToy,
„ T?is X^P'^'^os,
ACC. TTjV X'V*"'
§ 25. Remarks on Uncontracted Nouns of the
Third Declension.
1. The common language changes the termination of the
Nominative in this Declension. Thus, with Masculine words
the Accusative Plural form is used for the Nominative Singu-
lar, and the Singular declined after the modern Supplementary
Declension. The Plural is regular. "With Feminine words
the Accusative Singular form is used for the Nominative. The
other cases are regular. Ex. 6 aytbvas, 6 alavas, 6 Saifioms,
6 yfiTovas, f) eiKova, 6 apxovras, fj (ToKmyya, t} eXniSa, fj narpiSa,
1} EXXaSa, t] f/3So/xa5a, f] i>pai6Tr)Ta, etc.
2. The Stem of Substantives of the Third Declension ma;
generally be found by cutting off the termination -os froi
the Genitive. Ex. Xtav, a lion; Gen. Xt'ow-os, Stem, Xtovi
yiyas, a giant ; Gen. ylyavr-os, Stem, yiyavr}
3. The accent remains on the same syllable in all cases,
the quantity of the last syllable allows it. In the Genitiv<
* (Ovos a nation, gen. iQvtos. Stem idve. If the stem ends witl
a consonant, the word is uucoutrsKted ; if it ends with a vowel, it ugenerally contracted.
Contracted Nouns of the Third Declension. 27
Plural the final syllable is long, so that the accent cannot be
iirtlier back than the penult. Ex. npayiia, Gen. Trpdy/xarof,
jlen. Plur. npayfiaTuv.
4. Monosyllables are accented on the last syllable, with a
ii cumflex if it is long, and with an acute if it is short.
5. The S, T, and v sounds are discarded before <ti, in the
Dative Plural.
Ex. Dat. Sing, \afind8i, Dat. Plur. Xafxnaa-i.
„ Xififpi „ Xi/x/<rt.
6. V (Ne) is added to the Dative Plural for euphony when-
ever the following word begins with a vowels
7. The Accusative Singular of all Masculine and Feminine
N^ouns originally ended in -v. This was pronounced after
Consonant Stems by inserting a ; as, 'Xeovr-a-p. In the Plural
;his termination was -vs ; as, Xtovr-a-vs,
§ 26. CONTEACTED NoUNS Or THE ThIBD
Declension.
Several nouns of the third declension are called contracted
because in one or more cases the final vowel of the root and
the vowel of the termination are contracted into one syllable.
They may be divided into three classes.
First Class.
llasc. in »7ff ) --
_ . f bren. ovs,rem. in <u, a>s J
Neut. in 09, ts Gen. ovs.
' Cf. Quintilian, xii. lo. 31, 'Grseci n literam jucundam et in fine
pnecipue quasi tinnientem ponunt.*
28 Modern Greek.
I. 'O ilXij^ijr, the true man.
Singular.
Nom. 6 a\r]6r)s
Gren. Tov (a\r]deos) aXrjSovs
Dat. TW (a\r)6u) aXrjdfl
AcC. TOV (^dXTjOfo) aXtjdi]
Voc. S) d\r]dis
Plural.
ol (a\r]6((s) aXrjdds -,
Tuv (a\T]6€a)v\ aXrjdiov 11
Tois akr]6i(Ti
rovi (aXrjdfai) aXrjdtls
Like dikrjOrjt are declined all proper names ending in (l>dvr)s,
yfvrjs, KpaTTjs, firjbrjs, TTT]6r]s, aOfvrjs, (cXtj;?, and all adjectlves which
form the masculine and feminine in jjs, as
6 'Apt(rTo(})avr]s, Aristophanes.
6 Aioyivrfs, Diogenes.
6 'iTrrroKpdTTjs, Hippocrates.
6 'Apxiiirjbi]s, Archimedes.
6 ATipotrdfyTfe, Demosthenes
6 fVTvxhs, the happy man.
6 ^(vStjs, the false man.
6 fyKpar^s, the temperate man.
Attention should be given to the accentuation of the voca-
tive of these proper names
—
2> Aioyeva, 2>'Apxip.rj8fs, etc.
'O 'UpaKkTjg {-kX(t]s) is declined somewhat differently : Gen.
TOW 'HpoKkfovs, Dat. T^ 'HpoKkf'i, Acc. TOV 'H/jokX^, Voc. S> 'Hpd'
KXetf.
Like 6 'HpoKk^s are declined 6 HfpiicKrjs, AapioKK^s, etc.
2. *H f]x^, the echo.
Singular.
Contracted Nouns of the Third Declenstott. 29
3. To iOvosy the nation.
30 Modern Greek,
Like nokii are
{] npa^is, the act or practice.
^ nioTis, the faith.
17 v/Sptf, the insult.
i) Kiptja-ts, the movement.
3. tA aoTv, the city.
Singular.
Nom. TO aarv
Gen. Tov aartos
Dat. Tw atrTet
ACC. TO aiTTV
Voc. « ao-7-w
ra
tQ>v
TOIS
Ta
Plural.
(na-Tfo.) aarr}
aarfotv
aOTfat
[aorta) aarrf
(aoTca^ atrrq.
Third Class.
Masc. in tvs, vs. Fem. in vt,
I. 'O Uptvs, the priest.
Singular.
Nom. 6
Gen. TOV
Dat. rw
Ace. TOV
Voc. i
lepevs
ieptms
Upfl
lepta
ifpev
0(
Teov
To'is
TOVS
fw
Plural.
{itptes) itpus
Upeav
Itpfvai
(Ifpeas) Itpfls
(tf/)«r) iepds.
Like Itpevs are
6 tjnrfvr, the horseman.
6 /Sao-iXewy, the king.
•6 yovevs, the parent.
6 Kovpds, the harber.
6 Trpaptvs, the pilot.
2. 'o t'x^vj, the fish.
Singular.
Nom. 6
Gen. TOV
Dat. r^
Ace. TOV
Voc. a
Ix^vs
Ix^vos
IxSvl
IxBvv
ixOv
0(
TtOV
To'lS
TOVS
Plural.
(IxQvfs) IxGvs
Ixdvuv
txdlKTl
(Ix^vas) Ix&vs
(Ix^vts) Ix^vs.
Contracted Nouns of the Third Declensiott. 31
Like IxBvs (vern. ro •<f«x/>t) are
6 /ivs ( f>o jtovTiKoi), the mouse.
17 o(^pvr ( „ TO </)pvSt), the eye-brow.
^ 8/jvs ( I, "7 /SaXowSta), the oak.
§ 27. There are several irregular
The following are the principal :
—
Nom.
nouns in common use.
Gen.
6 avr]p,
32 Modern Greek.
the syllable after the stem if it is short ; a circumflex if long.
The other cases are accented regularly.
§ 28. Remarks on Contracted Nouns of the
Thied Declension. IFirst Class. Feminines form the plural like the Second
Declension. Ex. at r]^o\..
All words of this Class have a circumflex on the last syllable
in the Genitive Plural. Ex. rav fjxav.
Words of the Second Class form an exception to the general
rules on accents. Those which are not accented on the last
syllable in the Nominative are accented on the antepenulti-
mate in the Genitive, although the ultimate is long. Ex. rod
Third Class. Substantives in evs form the Accusative it
ta, and are oxytone in the Nominative. Ex. 6 ^aaiXfvs, ra
/Sao'tXeo.
§ 29. Supplementary Declension.
This Declension is only used in the spoken language : it if
composed of nouns which increase in the Plural but not il
the oblique cases of the Singular.
I. 'O nanas, the priest.
Singular.
Contracted Nouns of the Third Declension. 33
2. 'O Ka(/)ef, the coffee.
Singular.
34 Modern Greek.
§ 31. Patronymics.
Patronymics are formed by adding -ahrjs or -tSijs to tl
stem : as, *I&)uw»;f, John ; 'iwawi'Sijf, John's son.
They are also formed by adding the termination ttoCXo
(anc. TT&iXos) : as, KoKoytpos, a monk (of the Greek Church)]
KakoyeponovKoi, son of a monk.
The prefix natra before a name indicates that the person
descended from a iranca, or priest ; as, o Kvpios UairabTjfiTjTpaKd
TTovXos, Mr. P., the son of little DemStrS, the son of the monl
Before the Revolution surnames were seldom used by tl
Greeks. If it was necessary to distinguish between tw|
persons of the same Christian name, it was done by addii
the name of their father or of their native town. Ex. 6 'ladw
6 *AXxt/3*dSou, for 6 vlos toO 'AXxtjStdSov, John the son
Alcibiades.
The surname of a man is used in apposition to his title]
as, 6 Kvpios Uap8a\6s, Mr. Pardalus ; but the surname of
married woman is put in the Genitive ; as, ij Kvpla IlapSaXo^
Mrs. Pardalus (lit. the lady of Pardalus).
Vocabulary.
the last century, ^ TrapeKdovaa
fKaTovTamjpis (o TrapeXOav
alatpj.
did you see ? ttStrt ; (^X«V»).
you forgot to order, fKrja-no-
vr)<T(s (XtjaiJiovai) va rrapay-
yfiKjjs (napayytXKa))
.
he announced, dvrjyyfiXf (dvay-
yeXXo)).
he agreed, crvv^vtaev (^a-waivSt).
he was caught, <Tvvfkri<p6ri {avK-
Xa/ijSdco)).
in the act, iv r^ irpd^ei, orL.
avro(f)a>p(o. 11
escaped, bi.e(pvye (8ia(f)tvya)).
that I may put, va Btra {6fTco,
mod. form of ridrjfu).
she gave, edcoKfv (8iSq>, mod.
form of Si'Sw/xi).
did he complain? Traperroveiro
(jrapanovoifiai^;
he felt pain, inovti, rjo-Odvero
TTOvov (novS), aladdvofuti).
Patronymics. zs
Exercise.
Third and Supplementary
Declensions.
The policeman was the hero
of the contest.
The beauty of night in Greece
is remarkable.
A Greek has always hope for
his country.
l]iirke was an orator of the
last century.
The act was honourable and
brave.
Did you see the fine oak on
the mountain ?
\\)u forgot to order the
coal.
Tlie herald announced their
approach to the guard.
The wall (of the city) is not
well built.
He was caught in the act.
^Xot a word escaped his lips.
\ They have great faith in that
( remedy.
i The master has asked for two
cups of coffee.
KXtVctr.
'O kKtjttjp ^to 6 rjpcts Tov dy«-
*H apaioTTji TTJs vvktos eV 'EXXdSt
(ivai d^ioaTjfxdaiTos.
'O "EWrjv TrdvTOTf €^(i eXmSa
8id Trjv narpiba tov,
'O Bovp/ce rjTO pr]T<op T^? TrapeX-
6oi<Tr]s (KarovrafTrjpidos.
'H TTpd^is ^To epTiftos Koi yfv-
vala.
EiSfreT^v (opalav opvv{jr)v tvpiop-
cf)T}v ^aXaviSiav) fTrlrov opousj
'E\r]<TiJ.6vi](T(s vaTTapayyeiKrjs tovs
avdpaKas (ra Kap^ovva^.
'O KTJpv^ dvfjyyeiXe ttjv npoaiy-
yitriv TCiv eir tov (f)vXaKa,
To Telx°^ ^ ^^^ ^^"^'^ 'fa^« i^^i-
(Tfiivov.
^vvekri<p6r) iv Trj npa^fi (Jn ai-
TO(}>d)pa).
OvSfpia Xe^is 8ie(pxry(v eK rav
X(I-X.(U>V TOV.
E\ovp TroXkrjv TTfnoidrjaiv tls
TTju dtpaiTdav TuvTrfv.
'O otKoSfcTTTOTTyr (6 «'<^cWijr) €^17-
njo-c bvo Ka(j>€8fs.
* The wall of a city is to tuxos, 3rd decl. : the wall of a house 6' roixoi, 2nd decl.
P 3
36 Modern Greek.
The shoemaker wastes his 'O vnobrjiJiaTOTroibs (iranovra-rji)
time in reading country p^avft t6v Koipdv tov dvayiva.
newspapers. aKav ras iirapxuiKas tcjirjiK-
piSas.
He complained of a pain in Uapfnovelro on to ydi/u tov
his knee. iirovei.
§ 32. ADJECTIVES.
^'EiridtTa,
1. Adjectives may be divided into three classes
:
(a) of three terminations {jptKaTaKriKTa), one for Mascu-
line, one for Feminine, one for Neuter.
(6) of two terminations {biKaraKr]KTa), one for Masculine
and Feminine, another for Neuter.
(c) of one termination (jiovoKaraKr^Kra), for all genders.
2. The Adjective agrees with its Substantive in NumberGender, and Case.
3. Adjectives are declined according to one of the fore^l
going Declensions.
A.
Adjectives with three terminations are declined after the
subjoined types.
Nom. Gen.
KoKos, -fi, -6v, -ov, -ijs, -ov, good.
BiKaios, -a, -ov, -ov, -ay, -ov, just.
Xpva-ovs, -fj, -ovv, -ov, -rjs, -ov, golden.
dpyvpovs, -a, -ovv, -ov, -as, -ov, silvery.
o^vs, -f'la, -V, -f'os, -das, -€os, sharp.
XapUis, -eaa-a, -tv, -evros, -fora-rjs, -tvros, charming or graceful.
Tras, naaa, nav, navros, ndcrrjs, navros, all.
liiXas, -aiva, -av, -avos, -aivrjs, -avos, black.
Adjectives. 2t1
The full declension of xaXo's-, -^j, -oy, and o^ur, -(In, -i5, is as
follows :
—
Singular.
38 Modern Greek.
B.
§ 33. Adjectives with Two Terminations.
To this class belong nearly all Adjectives compounded of
two words, such as f^aiperos {f$ -atpw), excellent, Fem. e^ai-
peros, Neut. (^aiperov ; fmpovos, fnifiovos, eTTtfxovov (eVi -fitvod),
persevering; all adjectives in ijs (for declension see § 26, i),
as akrjOrjs, a\r]6T]s, aiXr^Ofs, true ; and a few in os, as ^dp^apos,
^ap^apos, ^ap^apov, barbarous ; rja-vxos, rjavxos, rjavxov, quiet
;
»ci'/3SrjXoj, Ki^brjKos, Kij38T)\ov, false, sham ; wcfieXipos, a)0eXt/xoy,
bXpfXifxov, usefulJ
UKoXovdos, aKoXovdos, dicoXovdov, following.
I. 'E^aiperos, excellent.
Masculine and Feminine.
Singular.
M. F.
Nom. e^aipfTOS
Gen. i^aiptrov
Dat. i^aiptra
Acc. f^aiptTov
Voc. i^aipfTf
N.
f^alpfTov
e^aiperov
i^aiptTot
e^aiperov
i^aipiTov
Plural.
M. P.
f^ulpfTOl
f^aiptTUV
f^atptTois
f^atpfTovs
t^aipeTOi
N.
i^aipera
e^aiptTcov
f^aiptTOis
f^aipera
i^aiptTa,
c.
§ 34. Adjectives with one termination for the Masculine
and Feminine without a Neuter are few in number. Theyare declined after the Third Declension.
6 Kai t] aptra^, usurper ; Gen. tov kcli Tr^s apirayos.
6 Koi f] /3Xa^, stupid
;
Gen. tov km riJ! /3Aa*cof.
6 Koi f} (f)vyds, fugitive ; Gen. tov koI t^s (pvyddos.
Adjectives. 39
§ 35. Ireegulab Adjectives.
The three following Adjectives are irregular :
—
I. Meyar, great.
Singular.
M.
40 Modern Greek.
Coinpartson of AdjcctiveS' 41
Iceding syllable is short; and the Superlative by changing
ithe terminations to maroi, orarr], orarov, if the preceding
syllable is long ; or araros, (OTaTrj, ararov, if the preceding
syllable is short : Ex. bUaios, just, SiKaiortpos, diKaioTaros;
C0(f)6s, wise, <TO(j)WTfpOS, (TO(f>a>TaTOS.
2. Adjectives in vs form the Comparative and Super-
lative in vTtpos and vtgtos : Ex. BadvSf deep, fiadCrfpos,
1 3. Those in >;? and <*s form the Comparative and Superla-
i tive in toTtpos and fararos : Ex. ciXo/Sijr, devout, eiXa^eartpos,
I
«wAa/3t(rraTos ; xapieis, graceful, xa/'»«<'"'"«por> x^P**''''"'"'****
4. Those in av form the Comparative and Superlative
in ovfOTtpos and ovfararos '. Ex. aa(f)pu>Pf prudent, aaxppov
€(TT(pos, aaxppovforaTos.
I
§ 38. The Comparative is also formed by adding 7rX/oi»
Ior paKXov (more), before the Positive : Ex. anpot, dishonour-
I able, comp. 7rX/oi» anpot, more dishonourable ; tlxapicrroi,
pleasant, comp. TrX/oj/ (vxapta-ros, more pleasant ; and the
Superlative by placing the definite article before the Com-
parative, as raxvs, swift, COmp. TaxOrtpos, SUperl. 6 raxireposy
the swiftest ; anpos, dishonourable, comp. jrXe'oi; anpos, superl.
6 n\tov aripos, the most dishonourable.
Remark.—This form of the Superlative, viz. the Compara-
tive with the definite article, is the one usually employed in
the vernacular.
f 39. The following Adjectives form the Comparative or
Superlative irregularly. Examples :
—
POS.
XfttTTOS.
42 Modern Greek.
POS. COMP. SUPEIOi.
/if'yar, large, fieydXtirfpos, /i/yioroj.
noXvs, much, < ^^'oTtpos,
1
^^^I [TrepKraorepos), J
(f)tXos, dear, ^ikrepos, ^tXraro?.
oXt'yof, little, oXtytoTfpor, oXtytoroj and iXdxiOTos.
(TTfvos, narrow, arevorepos, orei/orarof.
The Comparative and Superlative are followed by the
Genitive : Ex. 6 ao(})6s eivai 6 tibaifiovfarepoi, or -raros oKwv
rav dvOpoynmv, the Wise man is the happiest of mankind;but napd, or dno with the Accusative, is more generally used
in conversation : Ex. eivai nXiov evxdpia-Tov «V ras ^ABTjvas mipa
els TOP Unpaid, it is more pleasant at Athens than at the
Piraeus ; flade l^rlKoTfpos dno rbv Btiov (ras, you are taller than
your uncle.
§ 40. Adverbs formed from Adjectives'.
Some Adverbs of Manner and of Kind are formed by add-
ing -as to the stem of the Adjective. Ex.
Stem. Adverb.
&n\ovs, simple, djrX- ait\a>i,
a-axppcov, prudent, aa^pov- <Ta>(j)p6vas.
The Comparative of this class of Adverbs is the same as
the Neuter Singular of the Comparative Adjective ; and the
Superlative as the Neuter Plural of the Superlative.
In the spoken language the Neuter Plural is also used for
the Positive and for the Comparative Adverb. Ex.
fie^aims, or ^t^aui, certainly. Comp. ^e^aiorepov or /Se-
fiaioTtpa. Superl. ^t^aioTara,
* For other Adverbs, see § 85.
Adjectives. 43
indisposed, aSta^fro?.
disposed, Siartdfi^tvos (6ta
OfTCo).
the Piraeus, 6 Ilfipateiis.
witty, (v(}>VT]s, TTViVfiaTadrji.
customary, <jvvi]6rjs.
cross, dvfxwfiivos.
Vocabulary.
blue, Kvavovs (fJLa^Ci).
the railway, 6 cnbTipoBpojios.
the company, fj iraipia.
per cent., rdls (Karov.
yearly, per annum, kut eror.
was published, (drjixoaieCdr]
Exercise.
Adjectives.
What a big ship that is ! Ti (xeytiko {noaov f^eya) n\oiov
aval I
The fruit is small this year ; Ai dnapat (ra onapiKo) dvitt
last year it was larger.
A short time ago.
What bad weather we are
having.
It is simpler so.
He was very ill.
She was indisposed.
I am not disposed to do it.
Time is the best counsellor.
Most of them came late.
/xiKpai f<peTOs (to eros to{/to)*
irtpvaiv tjaav fxtyaXfiTfpai.
Upo oXiyov Kaipov.
Ti aaxjipov Kaipov e^ojxev.
Etfot dnXovoTfpov ovras (tTcri).
'Hto TToXii dadevTji.
Hto dbiddfTOS.
Afv tiftai diaTfdeifiivos va to
KUflU}.
'O ;(pofos flvai 6 KaXXtTcpos
<Tvp^ov\os.
Ot TTfpKTaoTfpoi q\9ov dpyd.
Athens has 70,000 inhabit- Ai 'ABrjvai txow cjSSo/x^wa x'
ants. XtdSa? KaTo'.KCiiv.
The Piraeus has 24,000 in- 'O Uetpaifvs fx^i fUoai Ttaaa-
habitants. pas x»X«a8as KaTo'iKwv.
II was bought for three francs. 'Hyopaa^jj Sta rpla cf)pdyKa.
44 Modern Greek.
What a thin skin this orange
has.
That young man is stupid.
He is rather witty than
wise.
It is not usual for her to be
so cross.
They are worthy people, but
very simple.
Tlie railway company from
Athens to the Piraeus pays
1 2 per cent, per annum.
The monthly balance-sheet
was published yesterday.
Tt \tTTTov (})\oiov Iri •^ikr]{v\
<}>\ov8a{v) ) e}((i TO Tropro-
KaWiov TovTO,
'O veos ovTos (ivai fuop6s OXd|),
£(cat fiaXkov fv(j}v^s ^ <T0<f}6s.
Afv (Tvv€i6i((i va Tjvai t6(to»
dvft,a)fJL€VT].
Eivai d^iOTiixoi ai>6pa>noi dXXd
TToXii dTrXot.
'H fTaip'ia Tov an 'A6rjva)V (is
Uftpma (Tibrjpodpopov TiKrjpovti
bcabtKa Tols (KUTov Kar' trot
(to €TOi),
'O fiTjvtalos icroXoyioytos c'd^/io*
The Numerals^ 45
§ 41. The Numerals.
Of the Cardinal Numbers i, 3, 4 and from 200 upwards
are declined. The rest are indeclinable.
All the Ordinal Numbers are declined like Adjectives.
I a
2)3'
3 7
48'
6r'
7r8,,'
9^10 C
11 (a
12 ti3'
13 '7
14.8'
15 le'
16 tr
17 'f18 t.;'
19 i&
20 k'
21 KO.
30 X'
40 /i'
50 v
60 f
{i
Cardinal.
«*? {tvai), fiia, )
(«"«) 3
SvoorSu6)(8i;«) tworpds, rpia three
five
six
seven
eight
nine
ten
eleven
twelve
1 trapa
tTrrd
oKra>
eVrca (eVvfo)
S(Ka
SuSeKa
SeAcarpelj {rpiaj thirteen
btKariacrapfs, -a fourteen
SfKanfiTf fifteen
8(Ka(^ sixteen
dtKafirrd seventeen
8(KaoKra> eighteen
hfKaevvia nineteen
( tiKoarifvas, -fiia
( -fv(a), kt\.
(rptaKovra or
fTpiavra
{rfacrapaKovra
1 or crapdvTa
^TTfVTTJICOVTa or
{(^rjKovra or
7 f^fjvra
sixth
seventh
Ordinal.
npaTos, -T], -ov first
dfvTepos, -a, -ov second
rpiTos, -rj, -ov third
TfTapros, -17, -ov fourth
TTffiTrrof, ktX, fifth
(KTOS
f^SoflOS
gySoo. (6yb6r,) l-.^^oyooov \ °
ej'(j')aroff ninth
StKUTos tenth
(vbfKaros eleventh
8o>8(KaTos twelfth
btKUTos rp'iTos thirteenth
dfKaros TfTapTos fourteenth
biKoros nffiTTTos fifteenth
beKUTOi (KTOS sixteenth
bfKaTos f^8ufios seventeenth
bfKaros oySoos eighteenth
SfAcarof ^^^(j/^aToJnineteenth
uKOdTos twentieth
(iKoarbs TTparos twenty-first
TpiaKOOTOS thirtieth
T€<T(rapaK0(TT6s fortieth
TrevTTjKocTTot fiftieth
i^rjKoaTos sixtieth
4^ Modern Greek.
70 o
80 tt'
90 y
100 p'
200 0-'
300 T
400 V
500 ^'
600 x'
800 w'
900 ~^
1,000 a
2,000 ;3
10,000 ,1
50,000 ,x
100,000 p
000,000
000,000
Ieighty
Cardinal.
G'^So^^^ovra or? ^^^^
ioydorjKovra or
\ ivvfvfiKOVTa OT ) . ,
< . - > ninety( fvvfvrjvra
^*'
encardi/
-at(aty), -a
TptaKotrtoi,
ai{ais), -a
I-at(ats), -a
\ -ai(ats), -a
\ -at(aij), -a
€7rra)co(rto»,
ai(«ts), -a
o»cra»cocrtot,
ai(aty), -a
\ fvveaKocrioi,
^ -ai(nts), -a
XtXiot,ot(a(s), -aone thousand8i;o xtXtaSes two thousand
one hundred
two hundred
"three hundred
[four hundred
>five hundred
>six hundred
> seven hundred
eight hundred
nine hundred
8fKa x«XtaSef ten thousand <
[fifty thousand -1
{rrfVTrjKovra
8(s
a hundredthousand
8vo tKarofifiipia two millions <
Ordinal.
f^bonrjKooTos seventieth
oyborjKooTos eightieth
fwevr]KO(TTOs
fKarooTos
SiaKoaiocTTos
ninetieth
one hundre
two hundre
TpiaKoaioaTos three hundi
TtrpaKocTioaTos four hundr(
nevTuKoaioaTos five hundrt
i^aKocnnoTos six hundred
iTTTaKocnoTTos seven hi
oKTaKoaLotTTos eight hi
ivvfaKocrioaTos nine hundrt
tidred
i
thousai
XtXtooTtJff one thousan
8io-x«Xtoo-7of two thousajs
SfKawcTYtXtocr- ) . .
,
^J- ten thousan
TOS
ntvrrjKOVTaKicr-
XlXtOOTOf
eKaTovTUKis x*- a hundred t
XiocTTos sandth
eKaTopfivptO'
(TTOS
^"^""""'^'^^^'Uwomilliont0(TTOS
)
jfifty
a millionth
In Greek the letters of the alphabet are used as figures.
The letters a-0 stand for the units, 1-9.
„ «-ir „ tens, 10-90.
V, p-w „ hundreds, 100-900.
I
Numeral Adverbs. 47
cif, Tpetf, recro-npef, one, three, four, are declined as follows :
Nom. cts (evas) /xt'a (/ita) Iv (fJ'a) T-pety, rpi'a reaaapfs, reaa-apa
(jren. evoff /^tas tVor rpiav rtcrcrapiav
Dat. evi /ita iv\ rpia\ retrcrapai
A.CC. eva fiiav ev («»'«). rpctr, rptia. Tftrcrapas, riatrapa.
SiaKoa-ioi, -ai, -a] x''^'°'> "'"i ""^j ^^^v are declined like the
lural of an adjective of three terminations ; at KfcpoKai
bioKoa-iav dvdpwirav amKonr^crav, the heads of two hundred men
were cut off; 7rapjjyyftX« Tpta^i^t'O- dvTLTVTra tov /3i)3Xiou, he
ordered three thousand copies of the book.
^^tXta; and (KUTopLfivpiov are substantives and are followed
in the written language by the Grenitive : Ex. TreWf x'^'«S*^f
TTparicoTav f]Xfia\(OTia-dt]a-av, five thousand soldiers were taken
prisouers ; iv fKarofifivpiov <f>pdyKo>v, a million francs. But in
conversation they are used as adjectives : rpels x'^'oSfs uv-
9pa)7rot, 3000 men.
The numbers tls, ev, «!, eVrd, tKarov, take the rough breath-
ing. Cp. Latin, sex, septem, centum, simplus. All others
commencing with a vowel take the smooth.
§ 42. NUMEBAL AdVEEBS.
Numeral adverbs are generally formed by changing the
:crmination of the Cardinal into qkis, but the first four num-
jcrs form an exception to this rule.
iirra^, Once.
Siy, twice.
rpis, three times.
rerpaKis, four times.
TTfinaKis, five times.
flKoa-QKis, twenty times.
fKaTovTiiKis, a hundred times.
XiXiaKis, a thousand times,
[But in each of these batclies there are nine figures and only eight letters,' ;hree letters which were originally in the alphabet but have fallen intoiisuse, are therefore made use of to supply the deficiency, viz.,
r', Stigma or Vau= 6 ; {', Koppa= 90 ; ~^', Sampi = 900.
( When used to represent the figures from 1-900 these letters take an' i,cute accent : to represent thousands they t^e a dash on the left side
i below the line. -.
48 Modern Greek.
Numeral adverbs are also expressed with the word 4>op
(vulgar ^oka, cf. Ital, volta), Ace. (^topav, Plur. ^opia, <popo
Ex. fiiav or fuai^v) (})opc'.{v), once ; 8v6 tpopas {(f)opali) twice
;
fha £Karo(i') (^lopais, I said it a hundred times.
§ 43. Pkoportional Numbers.
Proportional Numbers are formed from the Cardinal Nunbers by changing the termination into an\ovs, anXaaioi, bi
the first four numbers are formed from the Numeral Adverb
etKoo-oTrXour, flKoaranXacrtos,anXovs, single.
binXoxJs, 8in\d(j-ioi, double.
rpinXoiii, TpiirXda-ioi, triple.
TfTpanXovs, rerpanXaaios, quad-
ruple.
nfVTaivXovs, nfVTanXatTios, five
fold.
twenty fold.
fKarovranXovs, fKarovraTrXatrioi
a hundred fold.
thousand fold.
§ 44. Abstract Numbers.
Abstract Numbers are formed by changing the terminatic
of the Ordinal Number to as or a8a : as,
^ fiovas {fiovdba), the unit, is formed from /xowy, alon<
eingle.
ai ixovabes, the units.
f] 8vas or 8vd8a, the couple.
ai SfKaSes, the tens.
at fKarovrdSts, the hundreds.
17 8<o8eKds, ^ vToviiva, the dozen, and 1} dKoaas, or (iKocrapi
the score.
§ 45. Fractional Numbers.
'WfiKTVS, fiplaeia, rjpiav (vulgar fxicr-os, -fi, -6v), half. Ex. ij/iito
(jua-os) xpoyos, a half-year ; fipiafia {fjucrrj), &pa, half an hourj
Dates. 49
th fjfiKTv {fxta-6) fvi)s xpovov, ^las <opav, the half of a year, of an
hour. Mia &pa Ka\ fxia-f), an hour and a' half; evafitavs xpopoj,
a year and a half, yuaiuav &pa, an hour and a half.
The other Fractional Numbers are expressed by the defi-
nite Article and the neuter of the Ordinal Number, as,
T} bfKarr], the tithe.
8vo Tpira, two thirds.
Tpla TfTapTa, three fourths.
TO Tp'nov, the third.
ri rirapTov, the fourth.
TO btKOTov, the tenth.
H av^TjTrjaii Sit]pkf(Te 8vo wpas Koi fifiiaetaVf
The debate lasted two hours and a half.
iva 8vo or 8vo-8vo, two by two
or by twos.
dva T((T(rap(s, by fourS,
dva ftp, one by one.
Eemarks.—Per Cent, is expressed by the Dative ; as Five
per cent, per annum, mpTt roh eKarov kot ero? {to eros). Theailway pays 8 per cent., 6 aiBrjpoSpofios nXtjpovu okto) vols
Korov,
§ 46. Dates.
To express a date the cardinal numbers are used, those
hat are declinable being put in the neuter, as—In 1879,[is TO x«^«a OKTOKoaia f^8op.TjK0VTa ivvea. A longer form is also
raployed as— Kara to xiKioo-tov oKTOKoauxTTov f^SofiqKoarov (vva-
OV €TOS,
In speaking of the time, the substantives «pa, hour, and(Trr6v, minute, are generally left out. Ex. :
—
[VTiat o'clock is it ?
it is one, — two, — three
o'clock,
t is half-past five.
t is a quarter-past seven.
t is five minutes to ten.
-t five o'clock,
^efore noon.
i.fter noon.
Tt &pa fipai;
Eivat /it'a, 8uo, Tpetp, ac.t.X.
Eii/at nevre Koi paai].
Eivm cnra Koi Tfraprov.
Eivai 8(Ka napa irivTt (XiirraS.
Etf Tas trevre.
Upo fiearipi^piae,
Mera fitoTjfi^plav,
50 Modern Greek.
Seasons.
The four seasons of the year, ax rea-a-apts S>pai tov frnvv.
Spring, f] avoi^is, TO tap.
Summer, to. KoKoKoipi, to 6epos.
The
January, ^lavovapio^.
February, ^e^povapios.
March, MapTLos.
April, 'ATTpikios.
May, Maios.
June, 'lovvios.
On the fifteenth of July,
nepinriv 'lovXt'ov.
Autumn, to (l)6iv6napop.
Winter, 6 x"M''"'« •
Months.
July, 'loiiXtof.
August, Avyovaros.
September, ^fiTTfp3pios.
October, 'OKrci/Spioj.
November, Noep^pios.
December, /\fic4p^pios.
Eli Tus bfKaufvTi or ets r»ji/ SejtaTijv
The Days of the "Week.
Sunday, KvpiaKri.
Monday, Aeurepa.
Tuesday, TpiVr;.
Wednesday, TerdpTT).
Thursday, UfpnTrj.
Friday, Ilapaa-Kevr].
Saturday, So/S/SaTov.
Holidays.
Christmas, to. Xpia-Tovyewa.
New Year's Day, fj npoiTt] tov
fTOVi, TO VeOV (TOS.
Carnival, at dnoKpft^.
Lent, ij (jfa)<rapaKO(TT^.
Good Friday, f) Mfyakr] Ilap
(TKfVr].
Easter, t6 Ilacrxa, v Aapnpd.
The Holy Trinity, f] ayla Tpias.
St. George's Day, {f] fipipa)
TOV ayiov T((Opyiov,
Vocabulary.
the full moon, f/ 7rava-{\r]vos.
in full leaf, ivTf\a>s fjvdiapeva,
on the thirteenth, ttjv deKdrrjv
Tpirrjv.
the bathing, to \ovea6ai.
of the Protestants, tu>v Ata-
papTvpop,fvcov,
I
Dates. 51
Exercise.
• Tuesday is a day which the
Greeks regard as unlucky.
Last Wednesday we went to
Aegina.
Next Saturday there will be
a full-moon.
At Athens all the Sundays of
the Carnival are lively if
the day is fine.
iln Greece January is generally
bright and fine.
The trees are in full leaf by
the middle of March.
rhe Greek Easter is April
I -13 this year.
iJverybody in Athens spends
May-day in the country.
H TpiTTj (ivai fj^fpa, rfjv onoiap
01 EWrjvfs Oiapoiicnv us dno-
<f)pd8a.
Tr)v TtapikBovaav TtrdpTi]!) vtttj-
yaptv (la rfjv Aiyivav.
To epj^optvov 2o'/3/3aTOi' 6a ^vai
iravaeXrjvos.
Els Tas 'ABrjvas oXai at KvpiaKoi
T&v airSKpeco (ivai ^urjpai, iav
fj ^fitpa ^vai wpala,
O lavovapios iv 'EXXdSt fti'ai
crvvTjOais Xapnpos Kal apdlos.
Ta dfvdpa €ivai eWeXw? T]v6i,(Tptva
Kara to peaa rov MapTiov,
To 'EWijvikou UncTxn (Aa/i.7rpa)
TO fTos rovro flvat ttju I— 1
3
^AnpiKiov.
ndvTfS fv 'ABfjvais hUpxovrai
{hidyovcTi) TTjv irpwTTjv Muiov
(Is T^V f$0)(TIV.
rune, July, and August are 'O 'lovvios, 6 'lovXtoy rat 6 Av-
intensely hot. yovaTos flvai acf)68pa Gtpfxol,
)ctober and November are 'o '0/cT&)/3ptoy Ka\ 6 Koep^pios
very pleasant,
.^he Protestant Church at-
tracts many spectators at
Christmas and Easter.
t is not customary to con-
f sider Wednesday as a half-
holiday.
[e was born on July 11,
fivat TToXxi (I'xdpiaToi.
H (KKKrfaia rSiv Aiafiaprvpo-
pevcov irpoaeXKVd noWovs
Gfaras to. XpiaTOvyevva /cat
TO Udax^a,
Aev aval avvrjdna va Btatpaxn to
uTToytvpa T^t TfrdpTTjs cos
axoXdaipov.
'EyevvfjdTj Ttjv ivbeKaTrfv 'lovviov
£ 2
52 Modern Greek.
1852, and died on April
21, 1874.
I shall go down by the half-
past two train. It is only-
ten minutes to Phalerum
by rail, so that we can
come back to Athens by
the four o'clock train.
«if TO xiKux oKTaKoaia nt
TTjKovra 8vo (flio'v^) koi dm/Si'oxre TTju (iKO(TTi)v jrpwri]
'AnpiXiov (Is TO \i\ia okto
Koaia ejSSo/ijjKoira reaaapt
)(fias Tcov 8vo Koi fjjXKrda
fi. fi. Mfxpi- ^aXrjpov 8ia to
aiSTjpoSpofiov (ipai fi6vop S/d
XeTrrd, SxTTf Swapeda va fire
veXdupev els 'Adquas 8ia ri
&pLa^o(iTOi\elas toiv Tfcrardpa
II. fM.
§47. PRONOUNS.
The Pronouns may be divided into Substantive Pronouni
and Adjective Pronouns.
Substantive pronouns are: i. Personal, 2. Eeflexive, 3. R«
ciprocal.
Adjective Pronouns are : 4. Possessive, 5. Interrogativ(
6. Demonstrative, 7. Relative, 8. Indefinite. •
Substantive Pbonouns.
§ 48. I. Personal Pronouns.
First Person—^*Eyta, I.
Singular.
Nom. cyw
Gen. ffxov—pov
Dat. €p.oi—poi
Ace. fp-i—iii or ffxfva
Plural.
fjpiv \ pas.
fjpds]
Pronouns* hi
Nom.
54 Modern Greek.
Adjective Peonouns.
§ 51. 4. Possessive Pronouns.
The Possessive Pronouns are formed by the Genitiv
(abbreviated form) of the Personal Pronouns, placed after th
noun, and, if emphasis is to be expressed, by the addition
IbiKos, I81KT], IbiKov, which answers to the English ' own.'
Ex. My horse, to nKoyou ftov.
Whose horse did you ride 1 rlvos aXoyov InnexxraTe;
My own, to 18ik6v fiov.
How did you pay for it ? ITwr enXr^paxraTf Si' avro;
I paid for it with my own money, fnXrjpaaa /ixe to. Ibn
(xov ;(p)7/iara.
My garden, 6 ktjttos fiov, or, 6 18ik6s fiov kjjttos.
Our house, fj oiKia fias, or, f] ISikt] fias otKia.
Thy book, t6 ^i^Xiov a-ov, or, to 18ik6v <tov ^i^\iov.
Your hat, 6 jrtXds o-ay, or, 6 IhiKos acts mXos.
His letter, to ypdnfia Tov, or, to 18ik6v tov ypdfifjia.
Their ideas, at tSeat tiov, or, at IdiKai Tcov tSeai.
In writing, the Ancient Greek forms, tfios, <t6s, fjniTtp
vperepos are sometimes used.
Remark.—The article is used with Demonstrative an|
Possessive Pronouns, as—This good young man, airos 6 KoKi
vioi. Their possessions, to. KTrniara twv.
§ 52. 5. Interrogative Pronouns.
Two Interrogative Pronouns are used in Modern Greek,
(a) TiV, Ti, who, what (lit.).
(6) TToIoff, 770(a, ITo'lQV, who, wliat.
5^ Modern Greek,
I. QvTOi is declined as follows :
—
Singular.
Nom, ovToy, avTT], rovTO
Gen, TOVTOV, Tavrrjs, tovtov
Dat. rovT(o, Tairr), Tovrto
AcC. ToxiTov, ravrqv, tovto
Plural.
ovrot, avrai, ravra
TOVTdV
TovTois, ravrais, roirrots
TovTovs, ravTas, Taira,
2. ^Ekuvos is declined regularly.
§ 54. 7. Relative Pronouns.
There are two Relative, just as there are two Interroga-
tive Pronouns, one used in literary style, the other in common
language :
—
(a) o(ms, fJTis, o, ti, who, which (lit.).
(6) onolos, oTToia, onoiov, who, which (common).
Nom.
Singular.
0(TTIS, ^TIS, 0,TI
Gen. ovTivos, ^arivos, ovtivos
Dat. OJTtl't, JJTIVI, (drtCt
Ace. ovTiva^ {jvTiva^ o,Ti
Plural.
oiTivfs, alrivfs, ariva
olarTKTi, aloTKTi, oiaruri
ovarivaSf darivas, driva.
Nom,
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Plural.
6noioi, ondlaif ottoui
onoiois, onolais, oiroiois
OTTOIOVS, OTToiaS, OTTOia,
Singular.
OTTotoy, onoia, onoiov
OTToiov, OTToiay, onoiov
onoLO), onola, onoia
ono'iov, onoiav, onoiov
The Ancient Relative, or, rj, 5, is used rarely even
writing.
The people use 6nov and noi for all cases of the Relative
Pronoun.
Ex. The child that cries, t6 naiBl noD Kkaiti. I receive(
the book you sent me, tXafia t6 ^ilUXiov nov ix fcrrfikft.
Pronouns. $7
(TTis, TfTit, o,
^^
I
g^^^^^I
^jjosoever, whatsoever,'Orroiof, onoia, onoiov
| J
are declined regularly as above.
Ex. Whoever does it will be punished, oariabfjTroTt or onoiocr-
8t]iroT€ TO KdfjLvti 6a Tinapqdrj. Come at whatever hour you
like, (\6f (*^") *** onoiavSrjTTOTe &pav d(\(ts,
3. Tocror, 17, ov, as much.
'Oaos, t), ov, as.
Ex. I bring you as much money as you gave me, (ras ^«p(a
ToVa xpfjjjiaTa oaa (lov fdwaare.
§ 55. 8. Indefinite Pronouns.
I. Ttf, Interrogative, is accented with an acute and is
paroxytone in the two-syllable cases throughout. Tu, In-
definite, is accented on the last syllable and is enclitic It
is declined as follows :
—
Singular.
Nom. t\s Ti
Gen. Tivhs
Dat. Tiv\
Ace. Tiva tI
Plural.
Tives Tiva
TivS>v
Tivas TWO,
Strengthened by the addition of kSv •
Kciv Tis, someone, anyone.
KoTi, something.
Bos ixoi {fiov) KOTi Ti va (j)dy(o, give me something to eat.
2. "AXXor, aXXt], aXXo, the other or next ; frtpus, irepa, hfpov,
the other of two, are declined regularly.
Ex. The other party, t6 a\\o Koppa,
Next month, tov SKKov prjva.
The one—the other, 6 els—6 trfpos.
3. "OXos, 17, ov, all or every, is declined regularly.
Ex. All agreed, oXot orvv((pciiVT}<Tav.
Plural.
Toinvroi, ToiavTM, Toiavra
TOIOVTOJV
ToiovTois, Toiavrais, toiovtois
ToiovTovs, Toiavras, Toiavra.
58 Modern Greek.
4. MfpjKot', at, a, some, a few.
Ex. Some went away and some stayed, fiepiKoi ei^uyov koI
fitpiKoi fjifivav,
5. Kdnoios, a, ov, some one.
Ex. Some one told it me, Kairoios not to ffTTf.
6. Ka/iTTotrof, r], ov, a good number, a good deal.
Ex. There were a good many people at the concert, ^ro
KdfiTTOO'os Koafios fls Ti)v (TVvavXiav.
'J.ToiovTos, Toiavrr}, toiovtov, such a one, IS declined as
follows :
—
Singular.
N. roiovTOs, ToiavTT], roiovrofv^
G. roiovrov, ToiauTTjs, roiovrov
D. Toiovrco, ToiavTi], ToiovTa
A. TOIOVTOP, TOiaVTtjV, TOlOVTo(v)
The common form is rtToios, rtToia, Thoiov, declined regu
larly.
Ex. It is impossible to work with such tools, tlvai dSCvau
va epyaaOfi ris /ue Toiavra or Teroia ipyaKila,
8. 'O cStos, o, ov, \ ,, ^ ^„^„, , , / , (
the same.o avTos, 7], o, )
Ex. He died the same day, dneffave TfjV IBiav or rfiv airi
Tjpepav. Come at the same hour to-morrow, A^e ttjv Idiav
T^v avTr}v Sipav avpiov. I went myself, virrfya 6 iStoy.
9. TtVoTf, anything or nothing.
Ex. Have you bought anything] 'Hyo'pacray nVoTf or koti nNothing, TOTOTf.
10. Kamf, Kaupia, Kavev, nobody, supplies the place of ov8fu
ov8(pla, ouS«V, in the common language. It is declined as fol
lows :—Singular.
Nom. Kuveis, Kapfiia, KavfV
Gen. Kav€v6s, Koppids, Kavtvos
Acc. KavfVQf Kapplav, Kavev.
Pronouns. r>9
Ex. Is any one there? tival ns t'/cel; There is nobody,
^€V fivai Kavfis.
II. Kadds, Kadffita, Ka6ev, each, every, is the common form
of (Kaa-Tos, t), ov. It is declined like Kaveis.
Ex. Every one did as he wished, 6 Kadeis (eKaaros) (Koftev
Ct7u:s r^Bekf, He told it to each one, t6 flirev els top Kadiva,
12. 'O btlva, n duva, to bflva, ) ,,-/,., ,. > suchO TaO€, T] Taof, TO Taoe, )
'O Tabe and o helva are not declined.
Ex. Give it to Mr. (name forgotten), Ao's to (U tov Kvpiov
Vocabulary.
pleased (fern.), TfvxapiaTtjfifvr]
((vxapio'Tovfiai^.
lend (Imp.), Sdveia-ov (JbavtlCeo).
they belong, dv^Kova-t (av^Ktei).
I leave, d(^iVo).
they are wrong, fxpvanv a8iKov.
Exercise.
Do not give me all the flowers
;
give me a few only and give
the rest to my sister.
Give me that book.
"Which one shall I give you 1
Xot this one, the other.
I have a horse of my own.
It is my turn to play.
Lend me this.
A friend of mine gave it me.
Speak to her about it.
This pencil is mine.
Did anybody see you 1
M17 ftov Sa)077? oXa (navTa^ ra
\ov\ov8ui, 86s fJLOV fiOVOV fl€-
piKo. (fvia),, 86s ra . aXXa els
TTjv dSeX^ijj' pov.
Aoy pov €Kfivo TO ^(.^Xiov,
UOIOV Va (TOt 8oi(T(0f
0;^t TovrOf to oXXo.
E)(co oKoyov IbiKov pov.
Eij/at fj treipd pov va nai^u),
Aaveicrov poi tovto.
Mot to eboxfv eis Tci)v <f)iXa>v pov,
'Opi\T](T€ TT]S (tT)v) JTfpt aVTOV.
To po\v^8ok6v8v\ov tovto tivai
ibiKov pov.
2as fi8f icdvfis (jis)J
5o Modern Greek.
Nobody saw me, and I saw
nobody.
Are these your gloves %
Yes, they belong to me.
I leave something for you.
Put each book in its place.
It is yours.
Who called me 1
Whose hat is this %
What kind of man is he ?
What weather is it %
Anybody can do it.
Someone passed here a mi-
nute ago.
I should prefersomething else.
Kawts hkv fif (i8e, Koi ryw Sei;
€i8ov Kavtva,
Avra (ivai. to ydvTid (^xtipoKua)
eras',
MaXtora, fioi dvfjKovtri,
Ac^iVo) Ti 8i iifias,
BdXf tKacTTov ^i^Xiou ds r,
Seaiv rot).
Eivai ISiKov crag.
Uaiios /*' f(f)a>va^t;
Twos fivai TO KantWov (6 ttiXoi
TOVTOJ
UoLOveiSovs SvOpatiroseivai oUtos
Tt Kaipos fivaiJ
naff rtff BvvuTai va to KapT},
Kanoios inepatrfv an e8S> np
eWff XfTTTOV.
Qa eV/)ort/i«j'(7rpo€T«|i(Bj/)aXXo ri
Vocabiilary.
the mediation, ^ praoXd^rjaK.
shall you go ; 6a xmdyryrf
;
(xnrdym, present in use, ni)-
yalv(o).
for your sake, irpbs x^P*" <'''?•
every day, Kaff fKaiTTTjv (Jiptpav
say it, (Inf TO,
Exercise.
The neutral powers offered
their mediation.
She went there herself.
I saw them fall.
It was he who did it.
At olSeTepai Svvdpeis iTpo(Tf(}>tpoi
TTjV pf(ro\d^r](Tiv T<tiv.
'YjTTJytv tKtl Tj Idla.
Toi/s ei8ov va jrccr«<r».
AvTos (ivai ooTis TO fKape,
Pronouns. 6i
There were a great many
ladies at the ball.
. I saw the man who heat the
horse so cruelly.
Which way shall you go 1
Some one has left his coat.
I will do it for your sake.
1 1 would not have done it for
anybody else.
I want both.
I go there every day.
Give me as much as you
can.
He has as many as you.
There are a good many chil-
dren.
What is the matter with you 1
Nothing, thanks.
I never saw such a man.
Ho-aK TrXetorat KVpiai tls t6v
)(op6v,
Eidof rbv avdpanou oortr iicnma
TO akoyov Toaov (rK\T}pa>s
ydnapdpwTTas).
Anb TToiov bpopov 6a vnar/riTe;
KaTTOios a(pi]iTf TO (fjopepd tov.
Qa TO Kapa TTpos X'^P"' O'T*'
Aej; 6a to enpaTTov di aWov
Tivd,
Xptid^opai KOI Ta dvo (^dp(f)6Tepa\
Ilrjyaiva fKfi Kaff (KdaTTjv,
Aos poi oaov Bvvaaai irtpurao-
Tfpov.
E^fi Toaa oaa vpets.
'YTrdpxov<Ti KapiToaa naiSia.
Ti tx^Te ;('Atto Ti ndaxfTe ;)
TiVore, fiixapioTa.
OvdeiroTt ctdoi/roiovrov dv6pwTrov
62 Modern Greek.
VERBS.
Pjj/xaTa.
§ 56. The Verb.
r. The Modern Greek Verb has two Voices {biadio-ds to
p^naros), the Active {(i^epyrjTiKov) and the Passive (nadrjTiKou).
There is no Middle Voice ; its place is supplied by th
Passive, which is used with a Middle Sense. The only reli
of the Middle is the Aor. Imp. Pass., Xixrov for XvOrjTi (se(
under Aorist).
2. The Verb Finite has four Moods {iyKXta-ns) ; the Indica
tive [opiariKrj), the Subjunctive {xmoTaKTiKr)), the Conditiona
{inroBfTiKrj), the Imperative (Tvpoa-ranTiKrj).
3. The Verb Infinite comprises the Infinitive {anapffi^aToi
and the Participles [peroxdi).
4. There are seven Tenses (xpovoi) : the Present {ivftrrus
Imperfect {naparaTiKos), First Future, Second Future (peXXav
Aorist (aopia-Tos) (ist or 2nd), Perfect {napuKfifievos or avfTfXi
Kos), and Pluperfect {inrepa-vvTeXiKos).
§ 57. There are two principal conjugations of the Gree'
Verb (i) in tu, where a connecting vowel joins the tense ster
to the personal suffix {Xv-u for Xv-o-pi), and (2) in pi, wher
no such vowel is used.
Verbs in <o can be further subdivided into two classes
:
(a) TJncontracted or Paroxytone Verbs.
(6) Contracted or Circumflex Verbs.
(a) TJncontracted or Paroxytone Verbs take the accent 01
the penult in the first person Singular Present Indicati\
Active (Xap^dva, fvpLaKca), and throw the accent back as fa^as the quantity of the last syllable will allow, througliout
I
Verbs. 6^
the Conjugation (\an^dpov(Ti, eAo'^iSafoi/). There are five
exceptions to this rule, viz. : the Subjunctive, Infinitive, and
Participle of the Aorist Passive, and the Perfect Participle
Passive, and the oblique cases of the 2nd Aorist Part.
:
Ex. va \vdS), XvO^vat or \v6fj, \v6(is, XfXu/xe'j/os, tvxovtos.
(h) In the Present, Contracted Verbs take the accent on the
'contracted syllable, except the second Singular Imperative.
I It is circumflex, if in the uncontracted form the accent was
on the first of the contracted vowels, if not, it is acute.
Ex. <pi\ffTff <f>iX(lT€ y <pi.\e€Ta>, ^iXeiVcDJ cf)iX(€, 0iXei.
In the uncontracted tenses the accentuation follows the
same rules as in the uncontracted or paroxytone verbs.
§ 58. The Augment.
1. In the Indicative Mood there is a prefix to the Im-
perfect and Aorist. This prefix is called the Augment \
2. There are two kinds of Augment
:
(tt) The Syllabic, which prefixes <- to verbs beginning
with a consonant, as
—
Present. Imperfect. Aorist.
ypd<l)a>, I write, (ypa(j)ov typa^a.
Xw<a, I loose, fkvovy eXvaa.
Note. ^<Xo) takes ^ instead of e.
' If the stem begins with p it is doubled after the f, for
example
—
plnra, I throw, tppiiTTov, tppi^a.
(6) The Temporal (so called because it increases the
length of the first syllable, but does not, like the Syllabic,
^ The Augment was originally a word consisting of the letter o-.
It is surmised that it was an Instrument il case of a DemonstrativePronoun and meant 'there.' At first a separate word, it by degrees
coale<*ced with the Verb.
64 Modern Greek.
increase the number of syllables) is employed with words
commencing with a vowel or diphthong, as
Present. Imperfect. Aorist.
apx'Cw, I begin, W'f""* 7PX*<^«-
3. The rules respecting the change of vowel or diphthong
are as follows
:
Present. Imperfect,
a changes to 1;, aXXdcro-o), I change, ^Kkavauv,
*»» »?> ^PX°H^h I come, VRX^H-l^'
e sometimes to «, ?x^> I have, fl\ov.
at. changes to ?/, aladdvofjiai, I feel, jjaSavofirjv.
av „ Tjv, av^dva, I increase, i]v^avov.
fv „ r]v, fvKaipo), I have time, rjvKaipovv.
„ o, ofiiXo), I speak, afiiXow.
01 „ w, oiKretpo), I pity, aKveipov.
t, V, become t, v. This has no effect on the modern pr(
nunciation.
ou, f«, and the long vowels do not change.
4. Verbs compounded of Nouns take the Augment at tl
beginning ; as, otKoSo/zaj, I build a house, aKobopow.
5. Verbs compounded with Prepositions take the Augmei
between the Preposition and the Verb ; as, irepipeva, I awai
TTfpiffifvoyJ but in the vernacular the Augment is often plac
before the Preposition ; as, (nfpiptvov.
6. Verbs of more than two syllables, or beginning with
vowel, do not in the vernacular take an Augment.
§ 59. Reduplication.
1. In Modem Greek the Reduplication is only found 1
the Perfect Participle Passive. (See § 69.)
2. Reduplication is used in Verbs beginning with a single
Verbs. 6^
consonant, or with a mute followed by a liquid; as, Xu«,
XcXv/icvor ; ypd<l>(o, yfypafifjifvos.
3. Verbs beginning with a double consonant, a vowel, or p,
take the Augment instead of the Reduplication.
4. Verbs beginning with an aspirated consonant take the
corresponding hard consonant in the Reduplication.
5. Verbs compounded with Prepositions take the Redupli-
cation after the Preposition : in the spoken language these
Verbs do not take a Reduplication.
§ 60. Auxiliary Verbs.
1. There are three Auxiliaiy Verbs in Modern Greek, viz.,
j«;(a), I have ; ufiai, I am ; 6iXa, I wish or will.
2. All the tenses are given below, but the Present and
Imperfect only are used in the Conjugation of other Verbs.
3. "ExcD is used in the Perfect and Pluperfect ; eiixai in the
Perfect Passive ; 6f\co in the Second Forms of the First and
Second Futures.
They are conjugated as follows :
—
66
VerbS' 67
Sing. fx«
listxil
Imperative Mood.
Present.
I Plur. (xfTt
Infinitive Mood.
(Xft^, usually written txtu
Participle Present.
Singular.
H.
Nom. ex<t>p {fxovTas)
u.-
Nom. Xa^av
P.
(Xov(Ta
(See Xva.)
68 Modern Greek.
Imperfect.
Sing.
Sing.
^/ijji/ (jjixovv)
VerbS' 6q
Sing.
&s ^vai
Imperative Mood.
Present.
IPlur. tare
as ^vai.
Infinitive Mood.
fla6ai or (ivai.
Particijyh
]\Iasc.
Nom. cov (ovras)
Modern Greek.
Sing. 6a GiKr^trw
6a 6fKri(Tri
Second Future.
Plur. 6a 6f\f](T(oiitp
6a 6fkr]<TT)T(
6a 6(\ri<Ta(n.
Subjunctive Mood.
Fresent.
Sing, va dfXco Plur. va 6(Xa>fxfv
vd 6i\rjs va 6(kr}T(
va diKji va BiKaari, (la ^/Xovi),
Aorist.
Sing, va 6f\T](Ta> Plur. va 6f\fia-a)fi(v
vd 6i\rj(TT]s vd df\r](rr}T€
yd 6iKr^(Trj vd deXfjaaai (fo df^ffaov
Conditional Mood.
Present and Imperfect.
Sing. 6d rj6t\ov
6d fj6(\ts
ed i}6i\i
Plur. 6d r]6f\ofitw
6d r]6(ktTt
6^ iiOfkov,
Sing. 6(\*
as 6(Xp
Imperative Mood.
Present.
Plur. 6€\fTt
&s 6(\(o(ri (&i BtKovp)
Verbs, 71
Infinitive Mood.
Prtsent.
72 Modern Greek.
Veris. 73
§/<Ol
b '^
74 Modern Greek.
7<5 Modern Greek.
Verbs. 77
78 Modern Greek.
§ 65. Obsekvations on the Tenses, and on thk
Formation of the Stem. The Peesent.
The Tenses of Verbs are formed from the Root or the
Present Stem.
The Present Stem is itself formed from the Root by
—
1. Lengthening the Vowel or -changing it into a Diph-
thong ; as.
Root. Present Stem,
rpay rpwy^, I eat.
<pvy <j>evy-u>, I flee.
2. By strengthening the characteristic letter j as,
rvn TUTTT-o), I strike.
3. By inserting a syllable between the Root and the ter-
mination ; and at the same time in many cases strengthening
the Root; as,
(vp tvp-i<TK-a, I find.
Xaj3 Xafi^-dp-m, I receive.
4. By prefixing a Reduplication to the Root ; as,
Of Tl-drj-fu (Mod. 6(Tw), 1 place.
5. The Present Stem is sometimes the same as the Root,
as m Xv-«, Xry-».
6. The peculiar forms of the vernacular in the Present
are
—
\iovfif{v) for Xvopfv, \iovv(f) for Xvovai ; and in the
Passive, \if<rai for Xvjj, Xv6fi(a-6a, Xvofiacrde for XvopfSa, and
'kvovvToi for Xiovrai. Some of these forms are certainly
archaisms, which have been preserved in the vernacular,
while they have died out from the cultivated language.
7. The final v of the Present Infinitive is generally dropped;
as, Biko) Xvei, for 6f\(o Xvfw.
8. The Present Subjunctive changes the t, ft, o, ov of the
Veris. 79
Indicative into >?, 17, a : in all other respects the Subjunctive
and Indicative terminations are identical ; as,
Indicative. Subjunctive.
Xvft, va \vjj,
Xv«r€, va. \vrjTe,
\vofi(v, va \va)fitv.
9. The Present Participle Active is formed by adding v
to the Present Stem ; as, Xv«, Xvcbi* (originally Xvovts, con-
sonants dropped, vowel lengthened by compensation). In
the Passive it is formed by changing fiai to fitvos; as, \vonat,
\v6fitvos. The Participles are declined regularly.
§ 66. The iMPEKrECT.
1. The Imperfect only exists in the Indicative. It is
formed from the Present by adding the Augment and chang-
ing the termination -a> to -ov in the Active, and -ofxai to -6^r)v
in the Passive. The vernacular changes the -ov to -a, as eXva
for IXvoi', and •ofirjv to -ovfiow, as (J)\i!ovfiovv for iKvofajv.
2. In uncontracted verbs the accent is thrown back to the
antepenultimate in the Imperfect Active ; as, )3X«7r«, t^Xtnov\
\va, (kvov,
§ 67. The Aorist.
1. Modem Greek has retained both the First and Second
Aorist, but in no one verb are both forms in use.
2. The First Aorist is generally employed. The follow-
ing verbs are the chief exceptions, and employ the Second
Aorist :
—
Pies.
8o Modern Greek.
Pres. Aor.
TTtVo), to drink, IWiov.
tpxo^Mi, to come, ^Xdov.
Xan^dva, to take, eXa^ov,
^dW<o, to place, f^akov.
rpexoo, to run, fbpaixov.
^XeVa), to see, (Ibov.
dnodvrja-Ka), to die, dnedavov.
The common language joins a First Aorist termination to
a Second Aorist stem, as, elna, I said, for etnov.
3. In the Indicative the Second Aorist has the same ter-
minations as the Imperfect ; in the other moods as the Pre-
sent, with the following exceptions :
—
(a) The Infinitive is accented with a circumflex, as etn-etf.
(6) The Second Singular Imperative of fpxoyMi, evpla-Ko
Xe'yo) is accented on the last syllable, as, firre.
4. The Second Aorist Passive is formed from the Acti\
by changing ov into iji*.
5. The First Aorist Active is formed from the True Ste
by prefixing the Augment, and adding -a-a, as, Xv, eXvaa ; rv
sTv^a. The First Aorist Passive from the First Aorii
Active by changing -aa into -6r]v.
6. The Greeks avoid such combinations as 6a; etc. ; the
of the First Aor. Act. therefore coalesces with and modifies tl
preceding consonant in the following ways. The of the Ac]
Pass, likewise changes a foregoing tenuis into an aspirate
—
dental into a sibilant. Thus if the Root ends in
—
/3, TT,(f),
the First Aor. Act. and Pass, end in \ira and (pdrjv.
y, «, X, » i> „ ^« and x^l"-
8, 6, T, p, „ „ „ a-a and a6T]v.
TT, c7-(r, „ „ „ a-a or |a and x^l
(For Contracted Verbs see § 71.)
Verbs. 8
1
Ex. First Aor. Act Pass.
rpi'/So), to rub, tTpiyjra, irplcfidriv.
avvdya>, to collect, eavva^a, iavvdx&rjv.
KoranfiOui, to pei'SUade, KaTtTrdtra, (€)KaTan(ia0ijv.
Taaao), to arrange, era^a, eraxOlv.
7T\fKu>, to weave, orXf^a, inXtx^lf'
7. The Aorist of Liquid Verbs does not end in -a-«, but -a;
while the vowel of the stem is lengthened as follows :
—
a, ai=^d; f=et; t= t; i=:v; as, otAXw, to send, e<TTfi\a.
8. Liquids which have a«, ft, XX, in the stem throw away
the second of these letters in the Aorist, as napaLvu), to wither,
ifxapava ; ^aXXa), to put, €/3aXa.
9. If t occurs in the stem of a monosyllabic liquid, it is
changed to a in the Aorist Passive, as, (TTiXXa, fo-TaXrfv.
10. The vernacular uses (Xva-es, eXva-tre, for eXvcrar,
iXva-oTt, and fXvdrjKo, K.T.\. (perhaps a vestige of the Perfect),
for (\vdTjV, K.T.\,
11. The Aorist Subjunctive is formed from the Aorist
Indicative by dropping the Augment and by changing the
termination a into a in the Active, and rjv into co in the
Passive. The second and third persons singular take an eota
subscript in both voices.
12. The Aorist Imperative Active is formed from the
Aorist Indicative by dropping the Augment, and changing a
uto ov (high style) and e (common) : fXva-a, Xva-ov, or Xva-f.
11 the Passive the vernacular uses Xva-ov for XvdrjTt. This
urm is the classical Aorist Imperative Middle of verbs in
fu. Compare to-rao-o with the modem forms (TTaaov, be^ov.
13. The Aorist Infinitive Active is formed from the Indi-
ative by dropping the Augment and changing the termina-
iion a into at, as, tXvaa, Xvaat. But when the Aorist Infini-
live is used with the auxiliary verbs, exw, BeXa, it is written
I'instead of ai, as OeXco Xvaet, ex*" Xvafi.
[ 14. The Aorist Infinitive Passive is formed by dropping
> 6
82 Modern Greek.
the Augment and changing Gr\v into 6r\vcu. (lit.) or 6ri (com-
mon), as, i\v6r]v, Xvd^vai, or \v6rj.
15. The Aorist Participle Active is formed from the Indi
cative by dropping the Augment, and changing a into at
as, eAvo-a, Xvcraj. It is declined regularly, like nat, iraora, n-Si
16. In the Passive the Participle is formed by droppinj
the Augment and changing 6r)v into Beis, with accent on the lasi
17. In the higher style an Aorist Middle is sometimei
though rarely used. It bears an active (reflexive) meaninj
It is formed from the active by changing -a into -aiir}v and i;
the participle into -afitvos. Ex. e\v(r-anT}v, -to, -aro ; -dfifda,
-aaOf, -avTO;
partic. Xvadnevos ; thus eKpv^dfvrjv, Kpv^dufvoi, etC.
§ 68. The Future.
1. The Ancient Form of the Future is very rarely used
it may be considered as lost, and is replaced by compounde
tenses.
2. There are two Futures in Modern Greek:
(a) The First (or Imperfect) Future (MeXXcoj' napaTaTiKos)!
(b) The Second (or Perfect) Future (MtX\a>v avvreXiKos).
(a) The First Future, expressing a continued or repeate
action, is formed by 6d (see § 67, 5) and the Present Sulj
junctive; or by ^«Xw and the Present Infinitive, as,
6a nr}yaiva> Ka& iKaarrjv (jca^e f]fxepav), I shall go every daj
Bikoa trepinara} Ka&e Trpwt, I will walk every morning.
' The usual method is to form the Future from the Present and the
First Aorist from the Future. But in Modem Greek the Ancient
Future has been lost. The Second Future, which might be mistaken
for it, is nothing but the Aorist Subjunctive preceded by 6d. 6d is
perhaps a contraction of OfKti ii/a. Thus 9(\a iva = 0i\fi va = 6i va = Od.
Other writers maintain that this contraction is quite without analogy,
and regard Od as a particle or a fragment of rdxa- Mr. Geldart thinks
that we have this very particle 6f or 6d in the optative interjection (t6(
and alOf : ei9e tXdoi is in Modern Greek (X9( vd eKOr/, which might also
be written ti 01 vd eXOij. He is the more inclined to regard Sd as a
simple particle, because its use with the Subjunctive corresponds to
the use of «e in Homer with the same word, while its employmer'
Ferds, 83
(h) The Second Future is used when reference is made to
an action to be performed once, without prolongation or re-
petition, and is formed by 0d and the Aorist Subjunctive, or
by 6(\ci) and the Aorist Infinitive, as,
6a xmayw a-f]fiepov, I shall go to-day.
6f\(i) ufpinaTTjcrei^ anoylre, I will walk this evening. &
3. In the Passive the two Futures are compounded in
precisely the same way as in the Active.
§ 69. The Pebfect and Pluperfect.
1. The Ancient Form of the Perfect is found only in
the Participle Passive, which is formed from the Aorist
Indicative Passive by changing 6r]P into ixtvos, and the Aug-
ment into the Reduplication, as, iickridrjv, Ke/cAjj/xej/or (accent
on penultimate).
2. The Modern Perfect is formed by the Present of e^o)
and the Aorist Infinitive (both in the Active and Passive),
ex« Xvo-ft, ex<i) 'Xvdrj. Some writers assert that Xvo-et, \v6^ are
mutilated forms of the Aorist Participle, and that the origin
of this tense is to be founded in phrases like the following :
—
liovKaa-as ex^is (Herodotus) ; Oavnaaas ex^ (Sophocles). Asecond form of the Perfect Passive is formed by the Perfect
Participle Passive and the Present of diiai, as, XeXu/ixtVor tlfmi.
The Perfect Active is occasionally formed in a similar way,
as, fx"^ \f\vix(vop, -T}u, -Of, -ovs, -as, -a.
Ex. e^fo (yejypafxpevTjv rrjv fTriaroXfiv, I have Written the letter.
with the Imperfect, as, 6ci lirtOvfiovv, answers precisely to the classical
iwf6vfiox/v dv.
* The Second Form of both Futures is frequently written with an y^nstead of a, as, 5«Acu Trriyaivri, 0(\aj tnTayr). This is done on the sup-position that the word is in reality the third person of the Subjunctive,Bod that ya has been elided. It also supposes that the form of thelibird person singular has come to be used for all the persons, singular(Old plural> Ex. Original Form, 9(\u va irrjyaivTi ; Modern, OeKei rrrjyaiypi
'tkUf -(IS, -ti, etc., injyaivrj.
6 9
84 Modern Greek.
3. The Pluperfect is formed with the Imperfect of ex<*>.
the Perfect is formed with the Present, as, ilxov Xvo-ei ; e?x«
4. The Perfect and Pluperfect are very seldom employe^
All degrees of past time are expressed by the Imperfect o
Aorist.
§ 70. The Conbitional.
1. There is no Optative Mood in Modern Greek ; it
replaced by the Conditional.
2. The First Conditional is formed by (a) 6a. and the
Imperfect ; or by (6) the Imperfect of Qikta and the Present
Infinitive ; as, 6a fXvov, or rjBiKov \v(i,, I would lose.
3. The Second Conditional is formed by the Imperfect of
6t\a and the Aorist Infinitive, as, ^de\ov Xvo-et. There is
the same difference in sense between the First and Second
Conditional as between the First and Second Future, namely,
that the former is used to express a continued or repeated
action, the latter with reference to an action performed once
without prolongation or repetition. Ex. If I wrote to-da
he would receive my letter to-morrow, iav eypacfiov afjixepo
^de\e Xa/3ei ttju eniaroXrjv fiov avpiov. If visits did not preve^j
me, I would learn my lessons, iav 8eu fie ennodtCov at e'lrtaK
^eiSy rj6f\ov fiavdavfi to. fia6f]iiaTa fiov.
4. The Pluperfect Conditional is formed by the PlupevfeU
Indicative preceded by 6a, as, 6a tlxov Xvaei, I should have
loosed.
It is generally replaced by the First or Second Condi-
tional. Ex. If visits had not prevented me, I should have
learned my lessons, eav 8ev fie elxov efinobia-ei al e7n(TKe\lAeis,i
ij6t\ov fiav6dvei Or fia6ei (very rarely 6a. elxov fia6ei) ra fia6f]fiaTa fiov.
The fact is that, in Modern Greek, ^6eXov fiav6avei can
answer either to (i) fiav6avoifii av, I would (repeatedly or
continuously) learn (in a supposed case), or to (2) efidvdavov
Verbs. 85
av in either of its two classical senses, viz. (a) I should now
he learning [if something were now happening which is not
liappening], (6) I should then have been learning [if something
had then been happening which was not happening]. In old
Greek it is only the sense of the context which determines
whether tfiavdavov av refers to the present or to a continued
act in the past : and just the same ambiguity attaches to
^BfXov fiavdduft.
Similarly fj6f\ov fiddti can answer either to (i) (fxadov Su,
I should have learned (at some definite past moment— if
something had happened which did not happen) or (2) /xd^o»/i«
uv, ' I should learn' [at some one moment—not repeatedly or
continuously] in a supposed case.
The structure of the Conditional sentence is one of the
points in which the discriminating power of the Modern
language is strikingly inferior to that of the Old. It is here
that the loss of the optative is most felt.
Vocabulary.
tried, irpoacirdSritTf (npoanaBo)),
tainted, iXiiTo6vfxi](Tf (Xitto-
dvfjuoS,
something, K<Trt n,
I am weary, bored, ^apvvofitu,
the excursion, ^ fK8ponrj.
Exercise.
If I was rich, I should
travel.
If you had heard Mrs. R. B.,
you would have fainted
with pleasure.
The gardener in vain endea-
voured to undo the rope,
and was obliged to cut
it.
Ai* ^prjv nXoiKTios, rjOtkov ntpi-
Tjyfla-dat (6a eVa^f/Sfuoi').
Av rJKovei ttjv Kvp'iav P. B.
ijdfkfs XiTrodvjirjafi tK rrjs
^Sovjjs.
O KTiTTovpbi (Is p.aTr)v TTpotrdrd-
6r]<T( (^e'Sokifiaaf) va Xva-jj to
(Txoiviov Ka\ T]vayKda6r] va t6
86 Modern Greek.
She fainted when she cut her
finger.
He succeeded in loosening
his chains.
If you find that anything is
•wanting to make the room
pretty, say it at once (freely).
They were absent, (they failed)
when they weremostwanted.
The aide-de-camp was not at
the Te Deum : something
must have happened to
him.
The seeds of these plants
should be collected when
they are ripe.
"We thoughthe had announced
to you the news.
"We thought that perhaps you
would come this way.
The last hard winter was
foretold by the shep-
herds.
They generally forecast the
weather accurately.
He wrote such nonsense in
the magazine, that he could
not be admired.
They are delighted with the
town, so that they are never
tired of praising and ad-
miring it.
I admire your picture (por-
'£KvKo6v[ir](Ttv ore txo\//'f tov
SaKTvXov rrjs.
KarapOcoaf va \v(r]] ra dfcrfxa
TOV.
*Eav <To\ (crov) (f>aLvr]Tai ort!
Xeinet rt 8ia va KaracrTad^
TO BcolJUlTtOV KOff^OVf filTf ToJ
fKcvQtpai.
"FXdirov ore irepiaaoTepov tovs^
fi)^ov dvayKt]!/.
O v7ra<nri(TTr]s TKinfv dno ttjv
bo^oKoyiav' irptntt va Tea
(TVVe^T] Kan Tl.
Ot anopoi tS)v (jivrav Tovrav^
irpeTTft va auXKeyavrat orav
apifidaaa-i,
''Evop.i^op.fv oTi eras dvfjyyfikt
(fiXf dvayytiXfi) Ta via.
*Evop.!(nfxfv OTi «ra)s Tjdekeri
TTtpdafi air eSco.
'O TfXeuraiof Spiiivs ;(«/za)v jrp<H
tXe'xdr] vno rSiv TTOifiivav (dffi
Toiii Troififvas).
2vvfjda)s TvpoXfyovai tov Kaipov
dKpi^w.
Eypa^e Tocras avorjaiai (is to
TTfpioSiKov, axTTe ^To d8vvaTov
va Oavfiaadp.
Tols dpeaKfi noXi) ff nokts odev
bev ^apvvovTai va Trjv firaivaxTi
Ka\ va TrjV Savpd^axri.
Qavfid^o) TTjv (iKQva eras* tivai
Verbs. 87
trait) : it is above all
praise.
I admire his courage and
foretell a brilliant future
for him.
1 bought the paper ruled.
I cannot write Greek cor-
rectly.
Tell me why you knit stock-
ings, when you can very
easily find a woman to
knit them for you.
They made an excursion (pic-
nic) to Eleusis, but when
they began luncheon, they
found that the knives and
forks were missing.
They were disheartened when
they found how many
things were missing.
avcoTtpa naPTos eiraivov.
Qavfid^a Tfju dvbpeiav tov koi
7rpo\eya> 81 avrov Xa/x7rp6v
fteWov.
'Hy6pa(Ta to x^'P^' {,'^^)x°P^~
KOiflfVOV.
Afv fipnopSt pa ypdcfxo opdas ra
EWrjviKa.
EtTre pov 8ia ri TrKfKus KaXraas,
d<fi' oS Svvaaai noXv evKoka
va (vpr]s yvvaiKa va ras TrXe^j/.
'E^eBpapov fts Trjv EXevtrtj/a Kai
fv a> ^pxi-(TUP TO yeiipA Tav
ti8ou on (XfiTTOP TO paxaipia
Koi TO nfpovvia,
H.(Tav aTrrfKntape vol ore tvpov
nova irpdypaTa eXfinop.
§ 71. CONTRACTED VERBS.
1. In Ancient Greek there were three classes of Contracted
Verbs, those in aa, ea, and oa, but the Modern language
changes oa into ova and conjugates it as a simple verb.
There are therefore only two classes
—
(a) In aa>, as Tipdm, I esteem, I honour.
(b) In CO), as KoKfoo, I call.
Both of which contract into S>, npS), xaXw.
2. The contractions only occur in the Present and Im-
88 Modern Greek.
perfect of both voices, which are given below. The other
tenses ai-e conjugated like those of simple verbs.
2. The following are the Rules of Contraction :
—
First Class. Second Class.
an,= a fo, (ov= ow
aov=:o) or ov *'?= '?
Those verbs (Sii/rao), TTfti/ao), etc.) which in Ancient Greekformed an exception in contracting 6m into
fi are nowregular.
3. In the common language the Imperfect Active (gener-
ally without the Augment) employs the following forms :
—
-ovaa, -oicFii, -ovcf \ -ovcrafiep, -ovo-ere, -ovaav,
4. Schleicher observes that all contracted verbs formerly
ended in aw. It is noticeable that the common language
has returned to this in many instances, viz. n-c/jin-araTe for
TitpiTraTflTf, (rjTatt for fijret.
5. The Aorist of Contracted Verbs is formed regularly it
aa and 6t]v; but the vowel of the stem is generally lengthened,
as, KTvirda, fKTvmja-af 0(Xeo>, ((ptXrja-a,
First Class.
§ 72. Tifidw, -w, I honour.
Active Voice.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Ttudoi -S) Plur. nfiaontv -Zfiep ,
Tifjtafis -as rifidfTf -are
Tifiati -a Ttfxdovai -Sxri (TifiovvY,
Slug.
Verbs.
Imiwrfect.
(Tifiaov -0)1/
(TifULti -as
fTifxaf -a
(^Common)
-ovaa
-ovate
-ovae
Plur.
fTi[xaofjLfv -(Ofjifv
fTlftdfTf -UT(
irifiaov -a>v
Aorist, «Vi'/iJj(ra.
Future, 6a rtfiqaa, or ^e'Xo) rt/i^ffei.
89
(Common)
-ovaa/Jifv
-ovatTf
-oiauv.
Subjunctive Mood.
Sil)g. va ri/iao) -a
va Tifidijs -as
va Tifiarj -a
Present.
Plur. va Tifxaatjifv -Zfifv
va Tifxdr]T€ -are
vaTifiditicri-Siai (varifiovv).
Imperative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Tifiae -a Plur.
as Tifia ^Ttyxa/ro) -aro))
TifiafTt -arf
as Tifiovv {rifiaiTOiaav
-drwcraj').
Infinitive Mood.
Present, rifiauv -av (ti/z^I in compounded tenses).
Participle Present.
Singular*.
go Modern Greek.
Plural.
Nom. Ti\ia.ovr(i -S>VTfs riixdovaai -Sxrat
Gen. TifJtaoirrov -a)VT<ov Tifiaovcrav -axrav
Dat. Tifxdo<Ti -a}(Ti Tifiaoia-ais -dxrais
Acc. Tiixdovras -mvras Tifiaovaas -axras
Tijiaovra -wvra
TlflaOUTCOV -doVTOiV
Tifidovat -Stai
Tifidovra -mvra.
Passive Voice.
Indicative Mood.
Verbs. 9
1
Imperative Mood.
Sing. Tiftaov -w, -oD, -lov
in Tifxarai (rifiatado)
Plur. Tifideade -acrQt -Uade
Ar TificovTai (TLft.a(cr6aicrav
-aa-daxravy Commou&s Tiixiovvrai.
Infinitive Mood.
Present, nixdeadat, -aadat.
Participle Present.
Singular.
M. p. N.
^OXH. Tiixa6fifvos-oi>fj,(vos TifiaofiiVT] -afxivrj ruiaofievov -atfievov
Gen. Tifiaofifvov -coufvov Tifiaoixevrjs-cofxevrjs Tifiaojiepov -afxevov, etC.
Plural.
Nom. Ttfia6{ifvoi -afifvoi Tifiao^fvai -afifvai rifiaoneva -ayuva
Geo. Ti.yMOfj.ivav Tifitonevuv, etc.
«
Second Class.
§ 73. KaX^u, -w, I call.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Sing. KaXco) 'U>
Ka\e€is -eif
KoXUi -d
Plur. KoktOflfV -OVfl€V
Kokeere -etre
Kokfovffi -ovai (koXovv).
92 Modern Greek.
Imperfect.
Sing.
(KoKtOV -ovv
(KoKtfi -(IS
(KciXef -ft
(Common)
(J^KaXovara
-ovafs
riur.
eKoXenfifv -ovfifv
(KokeeTf -tire
eKoKiov -ovv
(Common)
-ovaafifv
-ovatrf
-ovcrav.
A orist, (KuKeaa, of f»?rea) {CnTa>), to seek, f'Cn^W"-
Future, 6a KoXtaa or 6(Xo) KaXeaei, da (^tjTtja-a) or 6(X(o fijr^fffi.
Sinor. va KaX((o -S>
pa KaXfTjs -fjS
va KdXei; -5
Subjunctive Mood.
Fresent.
Plur. va KaX((t>fifv -a/ifv
va KdXfrjre -^re
va KoXeaxri -aai.
Imperative Mood.
Sing. KoiXft -ft
Verbs. 93
Plural.
Nom. KaXfovTts -ovvT(s KoXtovcrai -ovcrat KoKiovra -ovvra
Gen. Ka\(6vT0)V -ovvrav Ka\(ovaS)V -ovaav KoXeovrtov -ovvrcov
Dat. Kokfovai -ovai KoXtovcrais -ovcrais KoXeovcri -ovcri
Acc. KoXfovras -ovprai KoXeovvas -ovaas KoKiovra -ovvra.
PASSIVE VOICE.
Indicative Mood.
Present.
Plur. KaXfOfifda -ovfifdaSing. KoKeofiat -ovfiai
Ka\e(i -et
KokefTat -tirai
KoKitaBf -flaGe
Kokiovrai -ovvrai.
Imperfect.
Sing.
(Common)
«»caX*o/xTji/ -ovfiT]v -ovfxovv
fKoKfov -ov 'ovaovv
€Ka\f(TO -eiro -ovvrav
Plur.
fKaK(6fi(6a -ovfifda
fKoXifade -tlaSf
fKoXeOVTO -oCl/TO
(Common)
-ovfiacrde
-ov<r6av
Aorist, (K\r]di]v: f^rjTrjdrjv.
Future, 6a kKt]6S> or diXa K\r]6rj : 6a CnTT]6a) or ^eXw fijTJj^^.
Subjunctive Mood.
Present.
Sing, va KokfCifiai -QOfioi
va KaXerj -fj
va KdkerjTai -ijTai
Plur. va KaKeafifda •afieda
va KaXf'rjarde •rfade
va KoKiavrai -wvrat.
Imperative Mood.
Present.
Sing. Kokeov -ov
as Kokrirai (^KoKftirda
Plur. KaXeeade -fiade
&.S KoXStvrai (Ka\eea6(c-
(Tov -fiadoxrav^.
94 Modern Greek.
Infinitive Mood.
Present, KokteaBai -eiadai,
Particijile Present.
Singular.
M. F. N.
Nom. KaKf6fxevo<: -ovfifvos Koktonevrj -ovfievrj KoKeSfitvov -ovfitvot
Gen. KokfOfievov -ovfievou KoKeofievrii -ovfxipr]! KoXfOfitvov -ov/jLtvox
Vocabulary.
hold ! tparfjcraTe (^Kpar-eat -w).
she washes, nXvpei.
the linen, ra aanpoppovxa.
I would that ! €nf6vp.ovv va,
tl.6( vu.
warm the plates, C^arave ra
invaKia (jnaTa).
the boys sing, ra naibla ^//aX-
Xovtri (rpayaSovp).
at the concert, ds -n^v a-wavXlav.
orange, to nopTOKaXiov.
they smell sweet, fvabid^ovn,
he was appointed, diwpia-dij.
Prime minister, 6 npcoBvirovf
yos.
the foreign minister, 6 inrovf
yoi tS)v f^ayrepiKup.
the minister of war, 6 vnovpyh
tS)V (TTpaTiaTlK&V.
meeting, awebpLaa-is ((tuXXoXij
TTipiov).
he made a speech, i^t^cavriat
\6yov.
eloquent, tvyKmrros.
the troops, to. (rTpaTflp-ara.
feelings, to. ala-dfjiiaTa.
Exercise.
Avvaade va poi bavfiarjTf tv (ppdyKOV va nKrjpixrai rov ipa^rfKaTqv^
*E6avpxi^ov vTTfppoXiKa rfjv 6iav (K rov AvKa^TjTOv. "EKpv^e ttjv
i(f>T]pepi8a. 'Pi'\|/'oj/ TO Ttpdx^ia ravra rov xdpTov fls to Kaviarpov
(top KaXadop). 0* dKkd^a ro bmpArioP pov' (ipai rroKv yjrvxpop,
Kparure ttjp opTrpeWap pov plap (TTiyprjP ; 4>atV«Tat on 6a
^pi^l). Upend va paKpvvtjTe to (p6pep.d eras. UKvpei ra av
Verbs. 95
•npoppov^a TToXv KoKd. Upenei va liKvvoi iraKiv ras X"P"5 /^ow.
^Enfdvpovv (fi^f) va ^crav (pwevpfva ds tov KrJ7T6i> (to Trtpt/SoXt) yuou ra
avOrj (XovXovdia) (Keiva. Ziarave ttjv arovnau (tov fw/toj') Koi elne
fls TOV pdyfipov va ^fO-Tavr) to. jrivaKia. Ta naMa ^dWovv ttoXu mpaia
(Is TTjv 'PcocrcriKrjv (KKKrjaiav, Tfjv tJKov(Ta va "^dXrj (rpayovbrj^ fls Tfjv
avvavKiav tov 'QSciov. Ta nvdr] tuvtu ttjs TTopTOKoXfas fvaSid^ovai.
Afv divavrai va <ras /SXai^wtrt ttoXv. AKopladrj npaOxmovpyos. 'O
inovpyos tSiv (^coTfpiKwv naptjTTjdi] (has resigned). *0 vnovpyos
t5)v (TTpaTiaTiKCdv & dvTiKaTaoTadfj (will be replaced). 'H 7rpa>TT)
(TWfBpiaaig iytv€T0 X^^^' E^fcftavrja-e [xaKpov Ka\ €vy\a)TTov "Koyov.
'O 0aai\(vs fVf^fwpijtrc to (TTpaTeiifxaTa ttjv TrapfXdovaav e^So/LtdSa.
'E^f^aiaxrav tov Trpta^fVT^v Trepi tcov (f)ikiKS)v alaStjpaTav tuv irpos
TrjV 'EXXdSa. Ei6e pa ^to dwuTov.
§ 74. Neuter Veebs.
Neuter Verbs are either Active or Passive in form : as,
mjyaiva, I go ; \vnovpai, I grieve. They are conjugated like
Active and Passive Verbs of similar terminations.
§ 75. Veebs in -pi.
Verbs in -pi are still used in the higher style, but in
ordinary writing and conversation a second form in -« 13
employed : as,
crraiva), aT^vcii= lOTTjpi, I set up.
ffero) =Ti6-qpi, I place.
S/Sco z=8[d(opt, I give.
8fiKvv(o =8eiKwpi, I show.
(evya =^fvywpi, I yoke or harness.
96 Modern Greek.
§ 76. Impeesonaii Veebs.
The following verbs are used impersonally:
—
Present.
Verbs. 97
Vocabiilary.
it grieves me, iit \vn(1.
lame, ;^o)\oy.
dressed, ivbtbvfifvos {ivhvofxai).
during the clay, Kara ttjv ^fxfpav.
fresh, cool, 8poa(p6s.
even in summer, koI Kara t6
dfpos (^KoXoKoipi),
the frost, 6 Trayeroj, fj nayatvia.
is setting (of the sun), 8v(i.,
^aaiKfVfi.
the evening, rA /SpaSu.
it is very stormy, flvat jxcydKr)
Karaiyls,
besides, iicrhf rovrov,
Hymettus, 6 'Yprji-ros.
is covered, dvai KeKokvpiifvos
{KaXvTrTa),
the base (of a mountain), ol
irpOTTobfS,
there was a hailstorm, en-fo-e
xd\a^a (TTiTrrw).
dead, vtKpos j of animals, yj/o-
<f>ios.
seldom, oTravtag.
to expose yourself, va tKTfdrJTe
(eK^eVo)).
Exercise.
Me XuTTft (\virovpm) va ae /3Xen-« \iaKaivovTa rScrov. ^alvtrat
Srt fKrinr)a'a rov ttoSo fxov irepiaaorepov d<p' o, rt evopi^op rfjv
ariyfirjp (Ktivqv. ^aiverai OTt eiaOe \iau d8id<popqs irfpl ttjs virodi-
trtati. Bpateid^ti' e^opev 5e ttoKvv hpqpov va KdpafxfV, Eivai roarf
{^fOTTi Kara rfjv f/p^pav' ai vvKTfs o/iwf ivravOa elvai TrdvTore Spoaepal
Koi Kara to KoXoKalpi (6(pos). Tfjv napfKQovuav vvKra ^to irayoavid,
dkXa vopl^o) oTi oi ndyoi BifXidrjaav. 'O rjXios 8vei (/SatrtXevft)* 6
fjXios e8v(T( irpo pids &pai. 2as iretpa^et va f^fpxT}(Tde orav ^ptXH t
TLptttei va Tvpo(T(XJ)T€ orav rjvat. vypbs Kaipos. Uperrtt va ptivrjre
ioSt TO ppdbv, (ivai peydXtj Karaiyis. Aev <f)o^ovpai va f^fpxapxit
orav ^povra Kai dcrrpdiTTd, 'O oiipavos (ivai Kadapwrepos' dWa Btv
€irava€ aKOfit] va ^pe^V' Xtoi/ifft ds to. povvd, 'O 'YfiryrTos tivai
KtKciXvppfvos (TX(86v pfXP'- "^^^ irpon68a>v, 'H X'^'^C'^ fOTraaf
^Bpavae) oXa (tx^^ov ra jrapdBvpa iroWav oiKirnv, Koi fKorovTabts
ftucpuv 7rov\iS>v (nTrjvwv^ (vpeOrjaav yjrocfita (veicpo) tig tovs k^ttovs.
3mavu)s avp^ivn tovto 81s koto, tijv avrf/v &pav tov eirovf, Aci*
98 Modern Greek.
eirpeirt va eKTtd^e ovra. A(v titpfnt va vndyrj rrjv vvKra ravrrjv'
§ 77. Irregular Verbs.
The Vernacular in the case of verbs ending in dya, tya
(a/yw), myoa leaves out in the Plural and in the second person
Sing, not only the y but the vowel which follows it. Thus
Xeyw, I say, Xeyftf or X«f, X«(y)et ; Xe(yo)/xf (i/), Xf(yf)rf , Xe'youfft
or \i{yov)v. Similarly, 7ra(y)ci), Tray, irdfi ; Ttufxtv, Trare, ndv{t).
The following are the principal verbs, which form their
tenses irregularly. There is no Middle Voice, the Perfect
and Pluperfect are formed from the Aorist; the Second
Future is the same as the Aorist Subjunctive, thus the
Aorist is the only tense which in most cases need be given
here.
Present.
Verbs. 99
by loss of the f and metathesis become (J)^ya(oi>, (e)/3yaV(o,
(f)3yaXXa), to take out, ifx^d^a, (fj-QdWco, to bring in.
Present. English. Aorist.
^iv(o, chiefly used to go, f^rjv.
compounded, as
dva^iva, Kara-
^aivu), e^yatVo),
fiapivofxai (papeiov- to be weary,
A*at), to be bored,
/SXeTTO), to
j3oc7-(ca) {poaKfa -aY to
^pfX<^t to
yrjpda-Ka, to
yivofjuu to
Sayjcai/a) (Anc. SoKvo), to
cf. Tvyxdva),
hipva (Anc. S/pca, to
f to play),.
. BdKVVd), to
, di8dcrKWy to
i dtxopat, to
t'So), to
Bivapaiy to
(^apvv6r]v (e^apf6r]i>), Fut ^a
iSape^co, Partic. Perf. (/3«)/i;(t-
pf/xeVof.
see, fldop.
pasture, f^6<TKT)aa.
moisten, t^pe^a.
grow old, (yrjpaaa.
become, fyeiva or eytva,
bite, fddyKoaa (PasS. e8^;^^i»).
beat, eSeipa, Pass. f8dpi}v, Part. Perf.
(Sf^Sap/xe^of.
show, c8ft|a.
teach, tdida^a,
receive, fdex^rjv.
give, tB(oaa or eSwKa.
be able, rjdvvTjdtjp (i8vv^dr]v).
Exercise.
Have you seen Paul? he has Ei8«t< tov llavXov; iyrjpaat iroKv
grown old very fast, and rax^ois koL 6i\u va ytivrj Ka-
wants to become a monk. \6yepos.
What a fearful day ! I am Ti rpopeph fjixepa I i^pdxnv oXor,
^wet through, and the dog 6 6e ctkuXos /** eSayKao-e.
li has bitten me.
n 2
lOO Modern Greek.
He beat me because I showed M* %h(ipt 8t<Jrt tov tbei^a t^v
him his caricature and said ytXoioypacjilav tov, koI /** etn-t,
to me, ' I will teach you to * 6a ai 8i8a^a va /** ffinai(r}s'
laugh at me.'
At what o'clock did you give Kara Trotav &pav tSwo-are rfiv
the letter to the messenger 1 cTrto-roXijv dg tov KOfuoTTjv;
because I did not get it till
eight in the evening, and he
could not take more than
twenty minutes coming.
Start 8(v TTjv TKa^ov npb r^f
6yb6j)i TO ecriTfpas, Koi 8(v 6a
fKupf ntpta-a-oTtpov dno (iKoat
XfTrrd va fX6i}.
Aorist.
(^t)0yrJKa, Fut, 6a e/Syo).
Present. English.
(f)j3yati'<o (e/c/SaiKw), to gO OUt,
[()8ydCoo {fK^dXXco), to take out, f^yaXa.
iyeipopiai, to rise, Or to fiyfp6r]v,
get up,
fWX^o/iat, to be aston- (^cnXayrjv.
ished,
fvrpeiTopai, to beashamed, iverpd-rrr^v (sc. to tui-n inward
on oneself).
iittTvyxavfOf to succeed, to (irtTvxpv,
hit,
epxopai, to come, ^X6ov, Imper. fX6f, TXdtTe, com-
monly TXa, fXare, Fut. dd (X6o},
fvpi(TK<a, to find, rjlpa (fvpov^.
fX<o, to have, elx^v (Imp.),
fw, ^s, Cti ') C^ffj to live, t^r](Ta\ Imperf. i^ova-a; Impe
f^Tf, fwo-t {^ovv), Cfj6i, (rjTa; (^re, {^Tjraa-av,
tipiropS> ^ (e//7ropw), to be able, r}fnt6pf<Ta,
T}^(vp(i> (f^fipw), to know, tj^tvpa.
6iXa>, to wish, T}6fXt]a-a.
dera, to place, f6taa.
' In Anc. Greek dnopfoi, to be at a loss, and (v-nopiw, to succeed, pros-
per, are found, ^ftvopw is probably a corruption of the latter.
I
Verbs. lOI
Present.
102 Modern Greek.
Very well, thanks, but I want
to sit down.
Do you know where Colonel
R. lives? Near the Cafd
Solon, I think.
Let us sit down here ; it is
very hotwalking about; the
sun has burnt up the trees.
How do you do ? What are
you doing ]
I go every day to Phalerum.
I go out in a boat and
bathe.
A capital plan, but take care
you are not drowned. The
wind blows tremendously
sometimes.
Let us walk a little; you
need not go far without
sitting down.
IIoXi) Kaka, fix^aptara)^ aX\i
6f\<i) va Ka6qaat,
Tvatp'i^tTf trov KaroiKel 6 avvray
fiaTdp)(i]S P ; I]\r](TLOV to\
Ka(f)evfioV ^6\(ovos, vopi^ui.
As KaB-qaapfV e'So)' eivai ttoXi
^(orq va TTfpmaTi] ris' 6 ijXiai
fKovae TO. 8fv8pa.
Tl KdpVfT€J
Ilrjyaivai Kaff fKadTTjv els Ti
^dXrjpov' nrjyalvat fxe rr)
"Xfp^op Koi Kopvio \ovTp6v.
IIoXv KoKa KapvfTf, aWa Trpoa
t^are (jltj TVViyTJTt. 'O avepo
TTveei, (K^ohpoTara iviore.
As TrfpiTraTTjcraipfV oXiyoV de
f;^6Te dvdyKTiy va {rtrdyqi
paKpav X^P'^ ''" iia6r]crT}T€,
Present. English. Aorist.
itXaici), to cry, eK\av(Ta.
Kptpva, Kpepu) -do, to hang up, (Kptpaira,
Xap^va, to take, re- fXa^ov.
ceive,
XavSdvoftai (com- to be mis- i\av6dar6T)Vt
mon \a6fva>, to taken,
err, eXa^ev<ra)^
Xf'-yoj, to say,
vddp to learn,
tmov, Subj. va (et)7ra), Imperat.
(ft)7r/ or {fl)n(s, Pass, (in
high style) eppedrjv. Part, pc
6(U, Perf. I'art. dprjpevos.
(padov.
Verbs. 103
Present.
104 Modern Greek.
pulled my hair. Be quiet,
or you shall both suffer for
this.
Go straight through the town,
and take the road to the
left, which will bring you
to the railway station. Youcannot make a mistake.
How much do you get a
month? Only 300 francs
a month as Professor, but
I make something more by
writing for the papers.
Get up, or I will send the
master with a stick. Doyou think I care for him %
The boat has stopped; will
they put us ashore 1
j8;;£f ra \x.ah\ia.—Ka^^(rnr«
fia-u\a I aXXojf 6a nddtjTf ko
oi 8vo aas 8i avro,
nr/yaivt Kur fxiBdav tia r^t
7t6K«os Koi, Triipe tiji/ irpos ra
aptartpa oSov, iJTis 6a ui <f>tps
(h TOP aTa6fi6u tow criSi;
Spofiov. Atv Tjpnopfls va ko-
ptjs Xddos.
Tt pia6bv Xap^dvfTf Kara prjva;
Movov 300 (jipdyKa Kara
prjva COS KadrjyrjTrjs, dWa Ktp-
8i(a> uKoprj Kan Ti ypd(j)a>v di
rets ((prjptpidas.
Si^KO), aXXa>f 6d <TT([\a> tov hi-
SdcTKaXov pi rfjv pd^buv.—'
'Sopi^fts OTi TOP (jio^oipai
;
'H Xtp^os (<rrd6t]' 6a pas dno-
$i^da<oaiv tls ttjv ^rjpdvf
Present. English.
Verbs. 105
Present.
io6 Modern Greek.
tired, Kovpaajjitvos,
the siege, fj TroXiopKia.
a year ago, irph iv6s trovs.
the parcel, t6 dtpa.
the interests, ra <rvft(f)fpovTa,
tiresome, evoxKrjriKdg.
wet, ^ptypfpog.
silly, fixopoi.
the post office, r6 Taxyhpofidov,
Exercise.
Atv inidiipo) V avc^S) rhv \6(f)ov arjpepop fitra p.trrr)ix^piav' fifiat
Kovpacrpfvos, "ETrpcTre va tov avayKaar^re v dpaipftrj) o, ti tin€,
'H TToXtopjcta ^p6r} (bifXvdr]) rrpo fvos fruvs. *E7^^rp«^^aTe poi »
d(f)fj<rci TO bepa pov (vravda' 6a e\da> va to irapa els rf/v (iTi(rTpo(f)i]t
pov, *A(})fj(raTf pt va (ftpovricra dvd vpav 8ia to. (rvp<f)epovra pov,
BaXtre to KaOiapd eras irKrjaiov tov irapaBvpov. Ilrjyaivoi €X« aira{
TTJt f^8opa8oe. 'Yirdytre t/cei octoj' bvvacrOe avxvoTtpov, Tivtcra
isoKv ivo)(\T)TiK6s, Eipai ^ptyptvos. 'EyrjpacraTe noXv Koi fiadt
pcopos. 'Pirjft Tan fnidroXas Tavras fls to TaxySpopdoy, Ati^oV
poi Ti dvaywaaKeis,
Vocabtilary.
I can, I could, bivapai : Aor.
T]dvvrj6r]v (Lit.). fjpnopS) :
Aor. fjpnopea-a (Com.).
I will, I would, ^cXo), rjQekov or
r]6fkr]<Ta.
I ought, 6(f)ti\(0, TrpeTTti,
I must, irpenfi, dvayKa^opai.
I should, firperrf.
information ^, «* 7r\r}po(f)opiai,
the affair, ^ vnodtais,
the decision, ^ dn6(f)a(ns,
to yield, give in, eVSi'So).
to sing, Tpayovba.
to accompany, avvoSfva.
exactly, just, lata taia, dxpi^as,
to refuse, dnonoiovpai.
to deny, refuse, dpvovpau
the country, rj i^oxh-
to use, treat, peraxeipi^opai.
the duty, to Kad^Kov.
however that may be, owwi
Ka\ &v fXU-
to understand, Karakap^dva.
to allow, firiTpenai.
' Found in the New Testament, with meaning, fulness of assurance
certainty, cf. i Thess. i. 5, Coloss. 2. 2, Heb. 6. 11. The verb w\Tjpo<f>opft
has in 2 Ep. Tim. 4. 5 the sense of ' to fulfil,' and in the Pass, of thing• to be fully believed,' Luke 1. 1.
Prepositions. io7
to catch (a train), Trpo(f>ddvci>.
the misunderstanding, ^ naptv-
what can have hecome of? H
Exercise.
Uoioi arrh <Tas hvvarai va }xoi daxrrj nXrjpocfiopias n(p\ ttJs
inodia-fMS ; 9a pot ^to itoXv XvTrrjpov va (TvvairavTTjdmpfV. Twpa
nptiTfi va T« ««7ra> Trjv diT6<f}a<riv pov. Ets parrfv irpoa-fnaBrjcra va
ohiXtjo-o), 8iv fjSvvfjdrjv va 7rpo(})epc» Xt^iv. 'ETrpfTTC va fkdrjs («'a
(iX^es f\6fi) pa(v pas fls ttjv 'Pa>pr)v. "Enpfne va (vbacra). 2v
f/pTopt'is va (pyaa6r]s' to (vplaKca (ixapioTortpov va ae ffXtnto ep-
ya^opfvov, 0a erpayovbovcraTe tav 6 8i8d(TKa\6s eras r/ro foS> Ota va
aas <Tvvo8fvaTj • Go. ^to T]vxapi<TTT]pfvos f'av tjSvvuto va idrj top
<f>l\ov Tov OKoprf piav (popdv. Tt 6a fXfyef fav ijpxfTO arjpepov
;
'HBfXopev vjrdyei fls t^v f^oxrjv avpiov, iav r} d8f\(})r] pas 8ev rjadfvei.
"EKapfs io-ia taia to ivavriov d(f)^ o, ti enptTTf va Kaprjs. IlpeVet va
p( d(f>T}<Tj]s va Kpiva nepi atrrov. KadrjKov fX^Tt va p^ d^t'j/jjrt tovs
avdpanovs va pfTaxfipl^fi^VTat to. ^Sm toctov aiCKripSas. Hpnopfi va
Xtyrj o, Tt ^f'Xff Kav(\s bev tov niaTfiifi. "Otto)? koi hv fxjj, 8iv
€ivai ISiKTi aov bovXfid (it's no business of your's). Aiv bvvapai
va KaToXd^a) Ti ivvofi ypdffxov TOiavTrjv iiTKTToXijv. Aei/ Trpenei va to
«7rirpe\^)7. "Eirpfire va virdyrjs oTav crov fina' Ta>pa eivat dpya i:\fov.
'Eav 8ev iTpo(f)6d<T(opfv tov cn8r}p68popov 8vvdpe6a va vTrdyci)p,(v f(f>
apd^r]S. UpfTTfi va xnrdpxjl Kappia TTcpfvvorjais ptra^v twj/. Tt va
tytvf rh irathlov', eirpttrt va ^to «8w vpit pias Stpas. Eyw ff
dn(iroi6vpT]v, aXX' avTr) 8fv 8vvaTai v dpvTjdg TinoTf, Ti's 6a to
iniaTtvtI
{tIs fjdtXe to irurrevcTti ;)
PARTICLES.
§ 78. Prepositions.
I. In Modern Greek many Prepositions govern other cases
than in the Ancient language.
io8 Modern Greek.
2. The Accusative is often used instead of the Genitive
and Dative.
3. There are 18 Prepositions, which may be divided into
5 classes :
—
(i) 4 Prepositions which govern the Genitive.
(2) 2 „ „ Dative.
(3) 3 »> „ Accusative.
(4)6 „ „ Accusative or Gen-
itive.
(5) 3 » n Accusative, Geni-
tive, or Dative.
§ 70. Prepositions which govern the Genitive : irpo, dvri,
fK, airo,
1. "irpi (does not drop the omicron before a vowel) :
(a) of Time—before : ^\6ov ds ras 'A6r]vas irp6 rpimv (tS>v,
I came to Athens three years ago ; (larjKdt rrpo e/xoO, he entered
before me ; npb ttoXXoO, a long time ago.
(6) of Place—in front of, before : 17 Atyiva KtWai. npo tov
ntipaias, Aegina lies in front of the Piraeus.
2. dm—instead of, in exchange for: poi eSuKf yaierras
{x(^Kov)dvT\ dpyvpav vopiarpdrcov, he gave me coppers in exchange
for silver coins ; vTrrj-yt dvr tpov, he went instead of me. In
composition dvrl has also the force of 'against'; as dtnUtipai,
to be opposed to, to be set against. Followed by vd and the
Subjunctive it means—instead of; as, dvri va imaTpeyjrD fidCs,
instead of returning at once.
3. ^K, before a vowel e'l
:
(a) out of, from (of place) : as, f^^Xdtv (tV) tov Btdrpov, he
came out of the theatre.
(6) made of, of : as, rb haKTvkibi dvai (K xpvaov, the ring
is made of gold.
(c) from (cause, origin, agent) : as, dirtdavtv tK nvptrov, he
died from fever.
Prepositions. 109
((?) from (of time), since: as, i^ (K(ivf}g ttjs &pas, from
that hour.
4. diro
:
(a) from, since (of time) : as, dvat «8« an6 rpimv i^Bo/iddav,
he has been here tliree weeks (since three weeks).
(6) from (of place) : as, (({)vy(v duo ttjs olKtas rov, he fled
from his house.
ano is frequently used with the Accusative : as, t6 rJKovtra
dir avTov, I heard it from him ; dno ^v\ov, made of wood
(^uXivor) ; dno rov 'lavovdpiov, 1 833, from January, 1833.
5. The following Adverbs can be used like Prepositions
with the Genitive case : fvtKa, on account of; avev, 8(';^a, 8ix<os,
without ; irXfjp, irdp($, except ; ptxPh ^XPh so f**" ^.s, until
;
xdpiv, for the sake of; ikto^v, dpdpta-a, among, in the middle
of, between ; 8ikt}v, like, as ; indva, over, upon ; vn-oKaro), below,
under; (pwpoaBtv or tfjurpos, before, in front of; oTrlaa, KaroTnv,
behind; Kovrd (from Byz. kovtos, short, cf. Kovrovpos, short-tailed,
Achmes. I53)» nXrjo-lov, near; 6 Xoyvpa, Tpiyipw, round about;
dvTiKpi (vern. dyvdvria), opposite to ; /xnft, with ; npiu, before.
These words are generally followed by tls or dno with the
Accusative, and bear the meaning of the above-mentioned
prepositions—upon, under, before, etc. Ex. : 'EKadtfro ttXtjo-Iov
fls TovTov TOP aphpa, he sat near this man. Before the mono-
syllable pronouns, the demonstrative pronouns, and a few
other cases, they can however be followed by the Genitive,
without any intermediate preposition. Ex. fKadrjTo irXrjaiov
fiov, he sat near me ;p.a^v /iov, with me ; irp\p toC ;(e(/ioM'or,
before the winter.
§ 80. Prepositions which govern the Dative : eV, avp.
iv, in : as, cV avTjj rfj x^P9y ^^ this country. Replaced in
common language by tls with Accusative.
aok, with (lit.) : (generally replaced by fitrd or pt), as,
dptx^pw^ ^^ ''iloiKoyfveia tov, he went away with his family
;
vvy e«w, by the help of God.
no Modern Greek.
§ 81. Prepositions which govern the Accusative : «<$•,
ova, fie.
1. CIS :
to, towards, in, into, at : as, 6a xmdya tls Tfjv IloXiv, I shall
go to Constantinople (Stamboul) : 6a ^fxai tU ttjv oIkiop ivros
fvos TfTaprov, I shall be at home in a quarter of an hour.
Used in an elliptical construction with the Genitive : as,
6a (TVVaTTavTr)6a>fjL(v tls tov vnovpyov, for, 6a avvanavTT)6a)fi(v (Is rfjv
oiKiav TOV vnovpyov, we shall meet at the minister's.
2. avd
:
(a) up, upstream : as, 7rXe« dva (t6v) norapov, I sail upthe river.
(b) by (signifying divisions): as, abtvaav dva Tfaa-npas,
they marched by fours.
3. (ic, the common form of utrd, is always followed by the
Accusative—with, together with : as, fie Trjv 6vyaTepa tov, with
his daughter ; eKrinrja-e to SXoyov fie ttjp pd^bov tov, he struck
the horse with his stick.
§ 82. Prepositions which govern the Genitive and Accu-
sative : p-eTd, nepi, 8ta, vtto, KaTd, xmep,
1. (icrd :
(a) With Genitive—with, together with: as, fieTo. tUv
dbe\(f)(bu tov, (or, fui(\ pe tovs dbiKcfioiis tov), with his brothers.
(6) With Accusative—after (of time) : as, ptTo. ravra, after
this ; pera Tpels prfvas, after three months.
2. irepi (does not drop the eota before a vowel)
:
(a) With Genitive—about, regarding : as, opiXovptp ntpl
TOV ^aaiKecDs, we are talking about the king.
(6) WithA ccusative—round, about (of time and place) : as,
vnriyov ecfji-mros Ttepl ttjv 'AKponoXiv, I rode round the Acropolis.
3. Bid (vulgar form yid) :
(a) With Genitive—through, by means of: as, ^Xenopei,
biu tS)v 6(f)ddXp.S>v, we see with our eyes.
Prepositions. 1 11
(J) Of place, motion : as, hva t^j TroXeaj, thi-ough the
city; hia BahaatTTjs, by sea ; 8ia r^s yiaa-araXias, via Marseilles,
(c) With Accusative—on account of, for the sake of: as,
eraf dyaTTw 8ia ttju fxryrepa aas (or X^P'" ''^^ firjTpos craj), I love you
for your mother's sake ; iparci 8id nva, I ask for some one
;
Tov inaivSi hia ttjv diaycoyrjv tov, I |)raise him for his conduct
;
fiia Ti ; Why 1 On what account ]
(d) In the direction, for : as, 6a dvaxatpfjcra) avpiov Sia ttjv
TaK\lav, I shall start to-morrow for France.
(e) Followed by va and the Subjunctive—for the purpose
of, in order to : as, (ptpert poi vepbv feoToj» bia va ^vpiaOw, bring
me hot water that I may shave.
4. uTTo
:
(a) With Genitive—by (agent) : as, to fii^Xlov elvat ytypap.-
fifvov vno TOV Ka6r)yr]Tov, the book is written by the professor.
(6) With Accusative—under (of place) : as, t6 Biarpov tov
Aiovva-ov ('BdK)(Ov) dvai invo Ttjv 'AKpoTToXiv, or, vno Kara dno ttjv
'AKp6no\iv, the theatre of Dionysus (Bacchus) is under the
Acropolis.
(c) Under (of rule or sovereignty) : as, at 'IvStut tivai Inb
TT}v BaaiXia-aav ttjs 'AyyXias, India is Under the Queen of
England.
[d) Upon, on (of conditions) : inh tovs Spovs tovtovs, on
these conditions.
5. Kord :
(a) With Genitive—against : as, S dpxriyos t^? dvTino\iT(v-
a-(ats fKap.( \6yov kuto tov inovpyflov, the leader of the opposition
made a speech against the ministry.
(6) Down to, down on : as, enfat koto yrjs, he fell to the
ground.
(c) With A ccusative—according to : as, dvai dpiarovpyrfpa
KOTa Tfjv yraprju pov, or, Kar ipf, it is a masterpiece to mymind ; KaTa Tag ntpiaTdaus, according to circumstances.
II
a
Modern Greek.
(d) With Accusative—at (in point of time) : &s,€ytvvTi6r]
KOT fKfivov Tov xp^vov, liG was born at that time.
6. uTT^p
:
(a) With Genitive—for, in favour of (opposed to Kara) :
as, «a/xf \6yov iirtp rfjs 'AyyXiai, he spoke in favour of Eng-land ; vnfp irarplSos, for his country,
(6) With Accusative—over (motion) : ix'^PW^*' ^^^p 'ra
f(rKafifi€Pa, he exceeded the bounds of decency ^.
(c) Over, more than : as, firj Siafifivtjrf virep ras rptts Stpm,
do not stay more than three hours.
§ 83. Prepositions, which govern the Genitive, Dative,
and Accusative : irapa, tm, npos.
I. irapd
:
(a) With Genitive—from, by (agent) : as, eXadov Sapov
nap' aiiTov or an avrop, I received a present from him ; eypdcpr)
Trap' aiirov, it was written by him.
(6) With Dative—by, with, and at the house of : as, ij
apert) Kadtarq f/pas dyanrjTovs napa dea Kal dvBpwnois, virtue
renders us beloved both by God and by men.
(c) With Accusative—near: as, napa rfip BoKacraav, near
the sea.
(d) With Accusative—against, in contravention of: as,
enpa^f napa rrjv ovvdfjKijv, he acted in contravention of the
treaty.
(e) With Accusative—less, minus : as, tig ras oicrm napa
8€Ka Xenrd, at ten minutes to eight.
' This expression is interesting. In A no. Greek tnrip rcL fffKanpevaaWecrOai, meant to overleap the mark (Plato, Cratylus), tcL tOKapfiiva is
generally interpreted 'a trench as the limit of the leap of the irtvraexoi'
but the Modem Greek phrase would rather sug^'est that the meaningwas the same as t6 cxdnfta,—a place dug out and made soft for theleapers tc slight on.
I
Prepositions. 113
2. litl'.
(a) Wi(h Genitive—upon, (rest) : as, ^ ((fuj^fpis Ktlrai fVi
TTJs Tpane(T]tf the newspaper lies upon the table.
(6) In the time of, under (of government, or king) : as,
^ fj.fyd\r] iravmKrjs Tov Aov8ivov crvvf^r) tVi KapuXov B', the great
plague of London occurred in the time of Charles II.
(c) With Dative—on account of, for, on : as, Xwrrov/Ltai r/rl
Tji da-Btvfia eras, I grieve on account of your illness ; eVt toutw,
whereupon, upon tliis.
{d) With Accusative—on, upon, down on (implying
motion) : as, tppi^t t6 nui8\ tm to tdacftos, he dashed the child
on the ground.
(e) During : as, fVl uapavra rjjxtpas Sec ((payf Kptas, during
forty days he did not eat meat.
3. irpos:
(a) With Genitive—(elliptical construction) for the sake
of, by : as, npbs Qtov, for God's sake.
(6) With Dative—in addition to : as, npbs toIs aWois pds
tint, in addition to other things, he told us.
(c) With Accusative—to, or towards: as, dnerddrj irpos
tfif, he addressed himself to me ; dirjvdvvdr] npos ttjv BovXrjv,
he went towards the Chamber
§ 84. Remakks on the Prepositions.
. Prepositions (except tv, tls, «) are oxytone before their
after their case many are paroxytone, but in Modern
k they are seldom found in this position.
2. All Prepositions may be compounded with Verbs.
3. "When followed or compounded with a word beginning
writh a vowel, prepositions drop their final vowel. IIpo and
irtpi are exceptions to this rule. If the word has a rough
breathing, t and n final are changed to 6 and ^.
I
114 Modern Greek.
4. In composition :—«V and aiiv change their final i» to ^
before 3, tt, <^, \^, to y before y, »e, Xi I, aiid before X, /x, p, o-
to these letters. N.B. "When avv precedes f, or o- followed
by another consonant, the final v is dropped : but with iv the
final V is retained. Ex. ^ o-vfijr^o-tr, the debate ; (vantipa, to I
instil.
I lean against the wall.
Close to the sea.
From what illness did
die ? From fever.
I know him by his voice.
he
On November 12.
I do not care about that.
They borrowed money at 30
per cent, on their monthly
wages.
I rely upon you and your
promise.
After the rain, the sun ap-
pears.
For three weeks, two months.
In Ancient Greek aud Mo-
dern Greek.
A quarter to eight.
I come from England.
Outside the town.
Nobody except you.
Exercise.
'S.Trfpi^ofiai (Is Tov Tolxov.
Kovra (nXrjcrlov, <nfia\ fls rfjp
6aka<T<Tav.
Ano itoiav d<r6iveiav dmdavt;
E(C nvperov.
Tov yvapi^co ano rrfv (Jxovtjv
Tr/p 8ct>8(KaTr}u roi) 'Noep^plov,
Aev pi /ie'Xet Si' avTO.
E.bav(ia6rj(Tav ^fjpara irpos rpv
cLKovra Tots eKarov Trpo(^o(piX.r}'
(Tames tov ptjvialov purBov twi^
Baffi^opai els eVe /cat (Is rr/i
imocrxfo'iv aov.
Y(jT(pa ano rqv ^po^riv <f>(ti
v(Tai 6 ^los.
Aia rpfis (^8opd8as, 8va pijvas.
'Apxaia 'EXXijwfca Koi N/a 'EXXij-
viKa /cat v(o('KKr}viKa (vemar
cular, Pcu/xau/ca).
0/cro) napa rirapTov.
Epxopai dnb rfiv 'AyyXlav (h
T^s 'AyyXt'aj).
E^w ano r^v noXiv or (ktos ryi
TToXecof.
Kavfvas (ktos crov.
Prepositions* 115
Yesterday I was at your
brother's.
r have not my watch with
me.
Be took him by the hair.
Death for the fatherland.
For the present .... for the
future however.
His love towards me.
^bout 9 o'clock.
Inside the town.
On the table.
wonder at that.
Che money changers asked a
draclime too much for
every gold piece.
Cvery two days,
iefore the door.
•"ive minutes to twelve.
k.t that time.
!liey sell the oka (about
3 lbs.) at I o drachmae.
*X^<f TJflOVV fls TOV d8t\(f)0V (TOV,
(high style) rrapa r^ ddcX^^
<rov.
Afu €)((i> TO i>po\6yi6v iiov /tn^i'
fiov.
Top (TTtaa-fv arrh ra fiaXXtd.
'0 VTTfp narplbos Qavaros.
Kara to napov . . . , tov XoiwoC Or
tlTTO TOvbf Koi fls TO f^qS, .
H npos ffJif aydnr] tov.
Hepl Tas ivvia,
*Ewos TTjs TToXco); {jj.io'a tts rifv
TToXip).
'ETrdvo) (Is TO Tpani^t (ejri t^s
Tpan(Cls)'
AnopSt St* airro,
Mlau 8pa)(pf]v ittpiiiKfOv f^rfrovv
01 dpyvpapoi^ol did Kadf XP^~
aovv vopurpa.
Kddf dvo) fiptpcts,
Upo Trig 6vpas, fpiirpos els ttjU
Ovpav.
Am8(Ka napa nivTt (XeTrrd).
Etf or Kara tov Kaipov (K(Ivov.
To iTdiKovv or TrwXctrot npos btKa
dpaxpMs TT^v oKav,
Vocabulary.
) run, Tp(x<i».
le wisdom, fj aro<f>ia.
16 integrity, fj tipiottjs.
pright, honest, Tipios,
W prison, fj (f>v\aKrj,
the East, ^ *AvaToK^.
marble, t6 pAppapov,
the shop, TO paya^eiov, to fp~
yaaTTjpiov.
the cage, 6 kX«]36s (to kXw/Si'oi').
I 2
1
1
6 Modern Greek.
to draw caricatures, (cd/xv«
mind your own business, kvt-
Ta^f TTjiv'^ bovKfia(v) <tov.
the police, 17 darvvonia.
to wipe out, (|aXe(</>(u.
the sponge, 6 (nroyyof.
be quick, ypfjyopa.
the corner, 17 yavia,
the chain, ij aXuo-tt.
my wife, ^ av^vyos fioo.
Exercise.
He ran up the hill, "Why are you always speaking against
me and in favour of my rival] Because in my opinion
(according to me) he is far above you in wisdom and in-
tegrity. What do you know about wisdom 1 In two years'
time, you shall be in prison with your wise and upright
friend. Go through the town, and look towards the East
;
on the hill you will see a house with marble walls. In the
shop was a man in a cage, and beside it two black slaves.
It is against the law to draw caricatures on the wall. Mind
your own business ; the house was built by me, and I shall
put anything I like upon the walls or inside it, on the top
or underneath it. The police are coming. Quick 1 give me
something to wipe it out. Come and stand in front of it to
hide it from the eye of the law. Throw me a sponge out of
the window. For goodness' sake, be quick, or they will be
round the corner. I shall be bound with chains and torn
from my wife and family.
§ 85. ADVERBS.
I. Adverbs of Manner and of Kind.
Those Adverbs of Manner and of Kind which are formed
from Adjectives have already been mentioned in § 40. Of
the rest the following are the most important.
Adverbs. 11
7
aXXccdf, otherwise.
Xaa, straight ; Ex. Go straight up, Ujjyaivt to-a inava.
taa, itra, or tana, lo-tn, exactly.
(Tai, thus (ovTui).
fTai K fTtrt, pretty well, so so. Ex. How are you ? ns>s
flvOf ; Pretty well, ero-t < frai.
ncos, how.
Kadas, «f, on-cos, thus, as.
§ 86. Adverbs of Time.
x6(s, yesterday.
(TTjiMfpov, to-day.
avpiov, to-morrow.
npoxSis, the day before yesterday (used for any recent
day).
fudavpiov, the day after to-morrow (used for any inter-
mediate future day).
ajrd^e, this evening.
e^eVof, this year.
irtpva-i, last year.
Tov xpoyov, next year.
iTore, never. Ex. -noTe p.ov, never in my life.
TTOTt ; when ?
irdvTore, always. *
Tore, then.
Tapa, or Topa, now.
(Is TO f^TJs, for the future.
€i6vs, immediately.
uptaas, immediately, at once.
aKopr], yet.
ciXoefa, oXovev^ Continually, incessantly.
liS Modern Greek.
§ 87. Aiverhi of Place.
oirov, TTov, where.
navTov, everywhere.
fSco, (VTfiOfv, here, hence.
cKfi, fKfidev, there, thence.
ava, tnava, up, above.
Kara, down. Under, below.
ftfra^v, between, among.
fioKpav, far.
fftTipos, forward, before.
oTTtVo), behind.
eWo'y, ;xe(ra, inside, within.
tKTQs, besides, outside, without.
Tikqcrlov, near.
Adverbs of place have the following terminations •—
-
(a) 6i, rest in a place, avr66i, there.
(6) 6(v, motion from, 'HX^of (KfWtv, I came thence,
(c) a-f, and 8f, motion towards, 'YTrrjya (Ktlcrt, (trnevaa
oi(caS«, I went thither, I hurried towards home.
§ 88. Miseellaneotts Adverbs,
vat, yes.
fiakia-ra, certainly.
Sxi, no ; oxt 8a, no indeed.
bfv, not (with Indicative).
(ifi, not (with other moods and the Verb Infinite).
TToXv, napa ttoXv, much, too much,
(Txf^ov, nearly.
trcos, perhaps.
Kav, for Koi au, at least, even.
Conjunctions. 119
frX/oi/, more. Ex. AtV fjfinopco 7r\(ov va npoxap^a-u), I can
go on no more.
troAtj', again.
\iav, very.
£x. 'Yirfiyfre ; have you been ? Nat', yes. AivaaSe va TO
KafiTjTf ; can you do it 1 MaXia-ra, certainly. t6 eKofiert ; did
you do it 1 "Oxi, no. Aiv to fKafta, I did not do it. M^ to
Kdfir)s, do not do it. Uapa TToXw oKpi^d, too dear. 'Iiras 6a
(K0rj, perhaps he will come. Eivat \iav oTrXovs, he is very simple.
OiiBf Kav ((}>dvTi, he did not even appear.
§ 89. Conjunctions.
Kal, and.
if Kai, though, although.
ovT(—ovTf, neither—nor.
ov8f, neither, nor (emphatic).
nrjTf—fif)Tt, neither—nor.
Hfu—be, indeed—but.
6 nev—6 fit, the one—the other.
aX\a, but.
ofi(os, however ; olx ^ttov Sfiws, nevertheless.
(dv, nv, if. 'Edv and orav with both Indicative and
Subjunctive in Modern Greek.
$
—
^, either—or.
etTf
—
f'tre, either—or.
oTav, when.
ore, when (with the Indicative),
ciuf, until.
irpiv, before (always followed by the Subjunctive).
d(p^ ov, d(})ov, since.
tV «, fvcp, whilst.
a^.a, as soon as.
iioTi, because.
120 Modern Greek,
SxTTf, so that.
iva, that.
va, that (followed hy Subjunctive).
Ex. de\a> va Xva (Anc. 6(\<o Xiitiv), I whh to loose.
With the Imperfect it expresses a desire. Ex. Sa tKOfi^tp
ainro, Oh, that he would do that.
oTi, that.
ona>s, in order that.
fiTj, lest, that not.
The particles ydp and oSv are now never used in con-
versation.
§ 90. Intekjections.
Tt Kpifia, what a pity.
fia Tov Aw, by Jupiter.
Kuvfiivf, poor fellow.
av6f]Tf, you fool.
"Xafinpa, splendid.
tvyt, well done.
finpa^o, bravo.
ZfjTca, hurrah.
ZfiTcaaav ot Baa-iXels, long live the King and Queen.
W apaia nov thai, how beautiful it is.
§ 01. Remarks on the Peculiaeities of Modern
Greek Syntax.
The cultivated language for the most part preserves the
grammatical forms of the classical period. The relation of
Modern to Classical Greek is most ably treated of in Ap-pendix II. Only the more ordinary cases, where the Modein
form differs from the Ancient, will be noted below.
The Cases. 121
§ 02. The Article.
1. There is no indefinite Article. In conversation its
place is sometimes filled by ««, \i\.a, ev, or by the indefinite
Pronoun, tIs. * Some ' (partitive) is not translated : as, give
me some bread, 8dr /xot ^/rw/ii, or boi fwi okiyov ^ufiL I have no
bread, otv ?)(ci) i^co/xi.
2. If the Adjective precedes the Substantive, the definite
article is placed before the two ; if the Adjective follows the
Substantive, the definite article is repeated before each : as,
17 i)pala yvvT] or r) yvvr] t] (opala (emphatic), the beautiful woman.
3. If a demonstrative Pronoun {alroi, eKtivos) precedes the
Substantive, the definite Article stands between the two : as,
(Kflvos 6 av6pumoi, that man. *OXov and nas when used in tlie
sense of ' all ' follow the same rule.
4. Names of Persons, Cities, Countries, are generally
preceded by the definite Article : as, 6 Kvpior OidbbiyKTutv,
Monsieur Waddington; ^ Kvnpos, Cyprus ; t6 Aovdlvov, Lon-
don 3 6 (TviTayflorap\i]s OvaiT, Colonel White.
5. In writing, all the words which depend upon a sub-
stantive can be inserted between it and the Article : as, rj
iT(p\ ^s 6 Xoyor fniTponTj, the commission in question.
In the same manner dependent words can be inserted
between a substantive and a participle : as, yvvaiKo {yvvrj)
iv Ttj xr)p(ia biareXovaa, a woman continuing in widowhood.
6. The Article is often used in the place of airor, oit^, avro,
he, she, it : as, to (^6ptfx.d tov, his coat ; roij fina, I told him.
In these cases the Article is properly a curtailed form of airos,
but no sign is used to denote this
§ 93. The Cases.
I. In Modern Greek the Prepositions are often used to
express the force of the Genitive or Dative. The Genitive
[23 Modern Greek.
is replaced by ano or /^e with the Accusative, and the Dative
by ets with the Accusative : as, tXni ro <»? rov vTrqpfTriv, tell it
to the servant.
2. The Accusative* sometimes stands in the place of the
Dative : as, /i« (he, he told me, for fxol eint. The Genitive
fiov is also employed in the vernacular; as, fxov fine.
3. The Nominative is sometimes employed, where we use
the Genitive : as, eva ^ovKuXt Kpaai, a bottle of wine ; tva
^(vydpi ydvTia, a pair of gloves.
4. The Genitive Absolute is used in writing but not in
conversation.
§ 94. The Adjective.
1. The Adjective stands before the Substantive, with which
it agrees, except when the two together form the Predicate.
Even then, the Adjective usually stands first, as, 6 icaXof
avdpcoTTOS, the good manJ
6 xmripirrji flvM KoKos avdpconos, or
avdpairos Ka\6s.
2. If an Adjective stands without a Substantive, avSpanos,
a man, is understood if it is Masculine ; npaypa, a thing, if
it is Neuter. Ex. ot irXoiaioi, the rich men ; eivai Svo-koXov,
it is a difficult thing.
3. In the written language the Comparative is followed by
the Genitive or by napd ; as, eipai KaXl^irepos eKeivov, I am
better than that man. In the spoken language the Com-
parative is generally followed by otto, with the Accusative,
as, o (fiiKos aas fivai v-^j^rjXorepos air eKeivov, your friend is taller
than that man.
4. The Comparative is joined to Verbs by the words, nap
* A very common phrase is, N<i aas flwai, Let me tell you. The tra-
veller will hear this, whenever a Greek ia going to begin a story or
wishes to attract his hearer's attention. (It is pronounced 'Nasspo'
or ' Nashpo,' quickly, as if one word.
The Pronouns. 123
o rt, nap otrov, a(ji* o ri, d(f> oa-ov, as, tiuai KaWlrrpog avdpconos
nap' o Ti aroxdCtaBf, he is a better man than you imagine.
§ 95. The Numerals
1. When Numerals (up to 12) are employed in the Femi-
nine, cipa, hour, o'clock, is understood, as, ds rfjv plav {copav),
at one o'clock ; fls rag 6kto> (&pas), at eight o'clock.
2. To denote a date they are put in the Neuter Plural
(fTT), years, understood), as fls ra ;f/Xta oKTOKoaia Trfvfjvra enrd
{fTTj), in 1857 ; or, in more elevated language, kuto. to ;^tXto<7Tow
OKTaKocriocrrop irtvrqKoarov t^bopov eros.
3. x'^'<»f> ft thousand, is properly a Substantive, and
governs the Genitive, as, rpfts x*^'"^*f dvdpcmcov, but it is
frequently used as a Numeral Adjective, as, rp«s :t»XtaSer
avdpanoi, three thousand men.
§ 06. The Pronouns.
1. The Personal Pronouns are only used before the Verb,
when special emphasis has to be laid on the person, as,
ryot) TO (Kapa o^t fKflvos, I did it, not that man.
2. Tlie monosyllabic Personal Pronouns {pov, pi, etc.) are
placed before the Verb, unless it is in the Imperative, as, o-e
f?5e, he saw you ; but n^jjo-c pt, let me alone.
3. If two such Pronouns are employed in the same sen-
tence, one in the Accusative and the other in the Genitive or
Dative, the one in the Accusative is placed last, as, bos pol to,
give it me.
4. In the Compound Tenses these Pronouns are placed
before €x<". but between ffeXo) and the Verb, as, tov fx<^ tlnti, I
have told him ; 6fKa> tov fXnfi, I will tell him. They are also
placed between the Particles, 6d, av, pi), hev, as, vd, and the
Verb, as, 6a to Kapa, I will do it; &s t6 Xd^rj, let him take it.
134 Modern Greek.
5. The Possessive Pronouns can either follow the Substan-
tive they depend on, or stand between the Adjective and the
Substantive, as, 6 navpos (tkvXos fxov, or, 6 fiavpoi fiov (tkvXos,
my black dog.
6. The Relative Pronoun agrees in Gender, Number, and
Person with its antecedent, but in Case it belongs to its own
clause, as, 6 avdpanos, top ottoIov (hioi^av, the man whom they
sent away ; iya, oarn fKapa Toxiro, I, who did this,
7. What ! How ! are expressed by ri (indecl.), as, ri iapaia
6ia ! "What a beautiful view ! t» \ap.np6v ! How splendid !
8. Some one (indef.) can be rendered by rls (indef.), as,
pLoi tme Tis, some one told me, I was told. The more usual
rendering is by the third person singular passive, as, Xeyerat,
it is said, or, the third person plural active, as, \eyovai, they
say.
9. As in French, the Negative Pronouns, Kavtts (contrac-
tion of Koi-av-fls), nobody, somebody, norf, never, rlnort,
nothing, require a second negation with the Verb, as, biv
tKapxi rinoTf, I did nothing; Kavtis 8ev Bvvarai, no one can.
I o. ' None,' * no,' have not an exact equivalent in Greek.
The sentence must be turned ; as, I have no money, SeV exa
II. It is worthy of notice that in the Modern Forms
(fieva for ffjif and eVeVa for ae the original p of the Accusa-
tive is preserved. This v may represent the Sanscrit m, as,
mam, tvdm ; but it is more probably a false analogy from
ovSeva.
§ 97. The Veeb.
1. In Modem Greek there is no Middle Voice, but the
Passive has in some cases a Reflexive and in others a Reci-
procal force, as (l) viirrofiai, I wash myself; (2) dyan<s3^6a,
we love one another.
2. Neuter Verbs are both Active and Passive in form, but
The Verb. 125
cannot govern an object in the Accusative, tpxcfiai, I come
;
irqyaivo), I go.
3. The Ancient Infinitive is rendered by vd and the Sub-
junctive, or by oTt and the Indicative. Thus GeXa ekfftlv is
rendered 6f\<o va fXBm ; ma-rfva aKovfiv is rendered nurrtva on
aKova.
Only monosyllables can stand between vd, 6a, as, biv, n^,
and the Verb.
4. The Participles are much less frequently used. The
language is more analytic. Thus (pxofj.(vos fl8op is rendered
orav f)px6nT}v (ibov ; but in some phrases the relative Pronoun
and the Indicative in English is rendered by the Participle
in Greek. The man who bears this letter, 6 (f}€p<ov t^k
fniarokrjv rairrrjp.
5. The distinction between the Tenses formed from the
Present Stem (viz. the Imperfect, First Future, and First
Conditional) and those formed from the Aorist Stem (viz.
the Aorist, Second Future, and Second Conditional) must be
carefully observed. The former have reference to repeated
or continued action, the latter to an action to be performed
once.
Ex. da Trrjyaiva (First Future) (Is rfjv 'A/cpojroXti' Kaff fKaa-Trjp,
I shall go to the Acropolis every day ; 6a im-oya (Second
Future) arjpepov tls tijj/ Tpdnt^av, I shall go to the Bank to-
day (once) ; typa^ov (Imp.) orav flafi\6t, I was writing when
he came in ; rjyip6r}v (Aor.) orav fla-ri\6t, I rose when he
came in.
6. The Perfect is very seldom employed. The Aorist and
Imperfect denote all stages of past time, thus, I have been
four times, and, I went four times, are both translated by
the Aorist, vTtTJya rerpoKis.
7
.
The negative ttv is only used with the Indicative ; p.^
with the other Moods and with the Participles.
126 Modern Greek,
Exercises on the Foregoing Rules of Syntax.
TO APGPON.
©f'Xo) okiyo '^dpi, tfp divaral rn va (fxiyrj fitpiSa ins avT'^P,
Atv Bvvajxai pa aov doxra avfi^ovXrjv riva. Tipos fipcu to apdlop
fKtiPO fiaipov akoyop, to mroiop ^XtTTti tis Kaff fKacTTrjp (Jjpfpap) fls
TOP bpopop tS)p llaTtjcriatv ' To yl^apop^ akoyop dpijKfi fls fpa d^ia>fia-
TiKOP Tov nvpo^qXiKov, * aWd Sep (i8op to /xavpop, Aiari dtp dyopd-
fcTe T^v oIkiov fKfiptfPJ
'O (}>i\os e8S> 6a ttjp fjyopa^fp tap fix* to
XptjfiaTa aras. 'O k, Kovp,ovp8ovpos (ipai npudvTrovpyos, Ka\ 6 k, ArjXi-
yidpprjs vnovpyos t5>p f^aTtptKap^ (1879). 'O Bopv^os T^f 6aXdavr]S.
'O av6p(x)TTOs 6 OTTolos /i^vft tls TTjP otKiaf fipai avp^das fvrvxris.
'H fPfpyfia Tfjs TovpKias Ka\ r) tcop Avpdpewp ttrxop fnippoijv inX
TovTov, O (rv^vyos ttjs (j)fp(Tai iroXv aaxfjpa.* ivpbs ra TfKva tov.
II.
HAPATHPHSEIS EDI TON lIT02Ei2N.
H X«/i/3os^ TjTO yf/idnj {jiXrjprjs^ VfpoVy axTTf tbaKa fiiap irorca-
ovpa^ {fp pdKTpopf fls TOP xmripfTTjp koI tov tinop pa ttjp cTToyyiajj.
Ta p,dXXipa <f)op(paTa tivai to bpotrtparfpa'' kutu to depos. Tov
iipiXrjaa, dXXd Stp fjdfXrjaf p dnoKpidrj fls ipf. 'YTTTjpeTrjaf rpia
fTTf fls TOP OTpaTOP Koi TOTf fifTfTfdr]^ fls TTIP ((fifbpfiau. UXrjpaat
TOP dpa^dp 8vo (f>pdyKa Ka\ pjxro t^v mpav. O difpprjptvs* f^Tft f$
(fipdyKa rT)P rjfifpap. Hoias fjXiKias fiuai 6 Aidboxos ] Eifat fphtKa
fToip. E;^€Te fpa ^evydpi vnobrjpaTa^* pa fit Sapfiatyrtl
' Grey. " Artillery oflBcer. • Minister of Foreign Affairs. * Be-haves very badly. * The boat. • A mop (Turkish). ' Coolest.* Was transferred. • The interpreter, cicerone.. *• A pair of boots.
Exercises on Rules of Syntax, 127
ni,
EniGETA.
'O \LtyaKoi jxavpos tricvKog tlvai Kakos (f)v\a§. OJ apxcuoi Kpl*
vovrai ^ imo Tti/av ort iiTTJp^av fjpideoi. . Ot <f)p6vipoi avdpamoi
KOfivovv pupias fPiore. EiVcu noXv fxaKpvrtpa dno Bpfintcriov fis
'AXf^dvBpfiav fj UTT 'Adrjvav. Eifat KoXkiTfpov va vndyj] Tis 8ia
^rjpas* fj 8ia BaXdairrjs. Ta drponXota ttjs TaKXiKrjs eVatpi'as' eivai
KoXXiTtpa tS)v aXXav (Taipiap. Oi 6po/iot Ttjs KiovaTavTivovTroXfus
tlvai voXv Ppanepoi* (^aKuOapToi).
IV.
APieMHTIKA.
Tt &pa fivatJ
"Eivai TeVcrapey. 'ExrvTr/jaei' 1^ Ka\ fua^ (^pttrtiav)J
MaXtara jrpo fjfuafias (opas. Kara iroiov tros fyfPVTjdr] 6 Hirr',
Ets TO \iXia inraKocria irev^vra ivvia Koi eyeive TrpaBimovpyos (Is ra
;(iXia (irraKocria oyborjKovTa reaaapa, Ei/cocri pi^iXidfies cTpaTov
tjbvvcuno va bia^Sxn ra aivopa,
V.
ANTQNYMIAL
las X/yo), Kvpif, on ey« irptnti, va XajSca to xpfjpara^ kcu oxt fKelvos.
'O^i, d(f)fVTr],' eya (Kapa oXt]v ttjv fpyaaiav, Avros poi (vntv ort
trii TO *ix^s 8ft)<ret els avTov. KrvnTjae p( &v ToXpas koi 6a ai
^vaKTvnf](Ta).'' ©a tov (paxaipcova,^ dXXd pe (paxaipaxTfv avros
irpcoTos. To pavpov (^opfpd pov fivai atcoviapfvov.* To SaicruXt'St,
TO OTTOioi' eSoxra fls ttjv d8(X(f>rjv pov ftckdirr}.^^ *E/xt, 6 onolos eicapa
t6 itdv hC avTovs, ptraxdpi^ovraL TocovTorpoirasI
Ti apaia irpaia !
Tt KoXos avdpmnos irov eii'ai ! OibiiroTf "^eCdfTai, aXX' al irXrjpo-
(fwpiai^^ TOV fivai aTfXtls. Aev TXa^ov tiriaToXas urjpfpov.
* Are regarded. ' By land (literally, dry). ' Messageries Mari-times. * Dirty, foul. * That I ought to receive the money, • Master
;
a corruption of aiOfVTrjs ; adopted by the Turks as a title and re-intro-
dnced by them into Greece. ^ I will hit you back. • To stab with akiufe. * Dusty. ^ Has been stolen. ^^ His information is incomplete.
128 Modern Greek.
VI.
PHMATA.
'Ew-VTr^^v' iv w tnai^a (or Trat'fw*') to cricket. 'H/xTropov^fv ^a
fior)0a>iifp dWr)\ovs (por]da>fif6a) tav <7V fifivrjS ttkttos. IlTjyaLvei
vii (TVfi^ovkfvdfi Tov larpov. "HKovcra on biu tivai KoKd, axrvf rjkOov
va fptoTTja-oi TTfpl aiiTov. Qa nrjyaivrfre^ tts to Btarpov rov ^fipmva
TovTovi *0x' ''^oXii frvx^d, 0a rwayto' avpiov ro fcmtpas va iSw
' II TrOVatore' kot f^aipfo-tv.* AiapKova-ris rrjs tnavatTrdtTtas'^ oi
*E\X»;i'«r firoXtprjcrav ytwaicos. 'O nv6pa>nos, 6 onolos (kr]<TT((i$T),
(Ivai 6 TpantCiTrjs pov. Aupxcrai rtr tov Kmpov rov evx'^piarcos
rrat'fwv iridvo (KktiboKvp^aiXov). "E^w ypdyj/d (ey/iat^a) (Is tov iv
AofSt'fO) vpdKTopd'' pov. "Eypayf/a ar]pfpov fr/roii' irfpiaaoTfpa
XP^poTO. hiyovcriv oTt 6a o-vp^rj noXiTiKr) Kpiais. AtaSt'Sfrat * oti
6 npecr^vs iv KcovcrTavTivovnoKfi TraprjTTjdrj Ka\ on avriKaTfarddq
VTTO TOV A. Kanoios po\ dnev on ^a6e els tov x^pov ttjv napeXBovcrav
vvKTa, 'A<p' ov rjyopdaaTf to /3i/3Xio»' itpfTtd va to dvayvaxnjfrt.
VII.
nPOGESEIS.
Uriyawe tts rh BiaTpov dvr ipov. *0;^i, (vxapia-Tto, t(v 6a ff(\6co
eK Trjs oIkios tvtKa tov yj/^ixovs. 'Earddrj irpo tov (piroptKOv (ot/cou)'
KoL fTpdfiri^e to. pdK\id tov, ftrfiTa St Tpt^as koto, tov toixov f<f)ovfv6r].
Atari Ct^*^^ TtepifrcroTtpa dno ipiva Trap oaa ^6fX(s (rjT-qatt (av
^prjv "EWijv ; Miav Tiprjv, Kvpit, fxopfv St' oXovs. KaXa, No/xtfa)
on 1 2 <^pdyKa ttjv fjpfpav 8t o\a ^^ elvai apKerd. Aev irXrjpovoi
irepteraoTtpa. BaX« rd wpdypaTa ^^ pov tU ttjv apa^av.
^ I was struck. ' Faithful. ' Note the force of the two tenses.
* As an exception. ' During the Revolution. Genitive Absolute.
• Who was robbed. '' My agent. * It is reported. * Shop. '• Than
you would ask. " For all. " Put my things.
Prosody. i'29
§ 98. Prosody.
T. In speaking, the Greeks emphasize and prolong the
accented syllable, to the exclusion of any diflference in dura-
tion between long and short vowels. The Prosody of Modern
Greek is founded upon this practice.
2. Accented syllables are treated as long, with the ex-
ception of a few monosyllables, where the accent is not
pronounced.
Unaccented syllables are treated as short.
Thus avTo? is considered an iambus (*-»-).
^<X(i3 is considered a trochee (-^).
avdpanos is considered a dactyl (-"^iv^).
fvyfvf]i is considered an anapaest (^v.^).
3. The principal and more simple ancient metres are used
by the Greek ])oets of to-day. Perhaps the most con mon
metre in tlie longer poems is that called the ' political/ of
which the following lines will serve as examples,
—
Aristophanes, T/ie Wasps, 244:
r 2 3 4 __ 5 6 7
) eVIavTov
I
as k6\|afxev \ovs a>v
||^6i/c|^o-eV
|aK\a
Jquantitative.
On p. 189:
1 ,^ ^ 3 4 5 ^7
1) kCI
OTuPf I iTftoliaX\
T] avy\ij, ae|j86^a ! 6puiLaa\\ievfj
jaccentual.
All 1234 5 67ii{J) A I captatn
|bold 6f
jHalijfax whS \\ lived In
(country
|
quarters.
'be metre is trochaic tetrameter catalectic, with anacrusis,
e. with a syllable at the beginning of the verse which is not
e'ckoned in the metre, but serves as a ' back-stroke ' {avuKpov
[)lii»|w)> preparatory to getting the metre under weigh. In (i)
'lis syllable is in, in (2) kC , in (3) 'A.' A trochee is — o :
E
130 Modern Greek.
a trochaic * metre ' = a trochaic dipodia = two trochees (or
their substitutes) : a trochaic tetrameter ought therefore to
contain 8 trochees. The above verses contain only 7 : they
are therefore called ' catalectic/ ' imperfect ' : though this
term is more commonly applied to a trochaic tetrameter
which lacks only one syllable.
As to caesura, the rule requires that the first pair of
dipodise should terminate without caesura : thus, e. g., in
(i) the rule would have been broken if, instead of ovi sZv\\tj^Xk.\
fjaev we had oiJs oi\\6Sv tJTraerp^ej/.
The scheme of the trochaic tetrameter catalectic metre is
as follows,
—
lacru
PAKT II.
DIALOGUES AND LETTERa
CONTENTS.
Dialogues.
PAOV
1. Ordinary Phrases 133
2. Travelling by Steamer (Corfu to the Pii-seus) . • .13+3. Arrival at an Hotel ........ 139
4. With a Greek Master 142
5. With a Guide 145
6. Asking the Way 146
7. Presenting a Letter of Introduction 147
8. At the PostOfSce 149
9. Athens 151
10. About a Family in which to Reside . . . . • 155
11. With the Head of a Family (Terms, etc.) . . . .15712 Arrival in a Family ........ 159
13. Meeting in the Street ...*.... 161
14. In a Cafi£ 161
15. With a Washerwoman........ 163
16. In a Bookseller's 164
17. In a Stationer's . . ., . , . , .166I 18, Travelling in the Interior ....... 167
19. Shooting . . ...• •.•.171£ 2
132 Modern Greek.
Lettees.
PAGE
1. Invitations. Answers . . 174
2. To the Director of the Post-OflSice . ^ . . . .1763. To a Greek Master 1 76
4. To Engage Rooms at an Hotel , . . . . ,1785. To a Doctor 178
6. Requesting a Letter of Introduction 180
7' To the Minister of the Interior, asking whether it is safe
to travel in the Interior . . , , . . iSo
8. Reply to No. 7 182
9. Information about Athena . , 1S2
PART II.
DIALOGUES.
(1) Ordinary Phrases.
Good morning. How do you
do 1 How are you 1
Good bye. Au revoir. Good
night.
Excuse me. It is mine. Give
me that, please.
I cannot understand you.
Please repeat. Please speak
slowly.
Can you talk English, French,
German, or Italian ]
Write it down. What do you
mean ] I do not know.
Very well. Splendid. Thank
you.
I am much obliged to you.
You are most kind.
Never mind. I do not care
about that.
I am very sorry.
Please tell me your name.
Where do you live 1
What o'clock is it 1
KaXfju ^fiepav (pronounced koX*
Tjfjifpa), Ti KcifivfTf', UwsfLcrde;
XaiptTt, Kdkrjv dvrdiicoiTtv,
KaXfjv PVKTa (pr. KaXtjvvicTa}.
SvyyvwixTjp, Eivai IBikop fjiov,
Aos (boTf) fioi fiidvoy napa-
Ka\S>,
Aep bvpafiai va <raf ivporjcrco,
'E7ravaKd^eT€ napaKokS). Op.i-
Xijo-are dpya, napaKoXci.
'O/itXeiTf 'AyyXtKo, FaXXtKa, Tep-
HapiKa TJ IrdkiKa ',
Tpa^ari to, Ti ivvoureJ
Atv
rj^fvpoi.
rioXv Koka. Aafinpa, Kv)(apurToi>.
25? (ifjuu TToXu vTr6)(p(a)s.
Eiadf TToXv KoKos.
Aev TTfipdCti. Aev [Xf fifXei St*
avTO.
AvTTovfiai noKv.
Etn^«(Te) poi TO ovop.d aov irapa,'
KciKai,
Uov KaTOlKflTtJ
Tt S)pa (Ivoi f
134 Dialogues.
When do you leave for Con-
stantinople ?
Take care. Go faster. Stop,
coachman. Turn to the
right—left.
Go on. Wait. Return at
II p.m.
How far is it %
Ilore ai'a;^a)peTrf 5*a n]v Kcov-
VTavrwoxmoKw;
Tlpoae^e. Ufjyaivt yprjyopuTfpa
(pyXrjyopaTepa). ^Tacrov ajia^a.
STpfyjre 8t^id— apiarepd,
Upoxapeij or ffjLwpos. Ileptpfve.
EiriarpeyJAt els ras fv8(Ka p.. p.
(jifra pecrrip^plav),
Il6(rov paKpav (ivai\
(2) Tkavellino by
Steamer.
Corfu to the Piraeus.
Has the steamer from Trieste
arrived ?
It will be late to-day, on ac-
count of the bad weather.
When does the steamer for
Pirseus sail 1
In two hours.
Is the captain on board ? I
want to speak to liim.
Yes, sir ; I will take you to
him.
AVhere is my cabin ]
For how many persons, sir ?
I am alone.
"What luggage will you have
in the cabin 1
I want all my luggage in.
TASEIAION (nEPmrHSIS) Al'
ATMOnAOIOY.
'Atto Kfpicipas (Is Ileipaia,
''E(f)da(Tf rb dTp,67T\oiov (k Tep-
y((TTr)s ;
9* dpyrjo-rj (rfjpepov tvfKa t^s
KaKOKaipiag.
XIoTf d.va)(()>p(i TO urpoTiKoiov Bia
Tov Jldpaid
;
MiTci 8vo &pas,
*0 Tfkoiapxos fivai tig t& dr/mJ-
ttKoiuu^ ©eXo) va tov 6piX^(Ta>.
MdXtora, Kvpie' 6a ads oSijyjJtrw
irpos avTov.
Uov tivai 6 daKapiaKos pov j
Ata TTOcra a.Top.a, KvpitJ
"Eipai povos.
Uo'ia irpdypuTa (jrolas dnoaK(vas)
6f\eT€ va exr}T€ fls tov Qakapiv
Kov aas'f
GcAci) Ska Ta Trpdy/iaTa p.ov.
Corfti to the Pirceus. -^^^
You are not allowed, sir, to
have the large box iu the
cabin.
Well, bring the bag and hat
box.
Steward, bring some water
and a towel.
At what o'clock is dinner %
There will be no dinner on
board to-day, sir.
I must have something. Give
me an omelette, some beef,
and a bottle of Corinthian
wine.
When will you have it, sir %
At once. As soon as we start.
Let me be aloue in the cabin
if possible.
There is only one sheet on the
bed.
That is the custom here, sir.
I do not care what the custom
is: I insist upon having
two.
Give me a glass of water
Wake me to-morrow before
we reach Cephalonia.
Wake me to-morrow at six.
Are we iu sight of Cepha-
lonia ?
Yes, sir; we shall arrive in
half- an-hour.
Aei* firirpeTTfTai, Kvpie, va e^'/''"*
TO fitya K10UITIOU tls tov 6aXa-
fltCTKOV.
KaXd' (pfpf TOV aaKKOv Koi t^v
KaneXitpav (niXodr'jKTjv),
Tpocf)o86Ta, <pepf pov oXiyov vepov
Kal p'lav piTokiav.
TLolav a>pav fivai rb yevpa (to
delnvov^J
AtV 6a fxn yfvpa iv t» dr/xo-
nko'm (rrjpfpov, Kvpie.
Upentt va (ftdyca kuti Tt. Aor
pot {hoae pov) piav opfXtrrav,
oXiyov IBcoBivov Kal piau (f>iuXi]v
KoptpdiaKov Kpacri.
ndre Ta deXere, KvpW,
IlapavTa. "Evdiis dpa dvax<>>p']0'a-
p(v.
QeXa va ^pai povos, tl bvvarov, iv
T(S 6aXapi(TKa,
'Yndpxfi ev povov vivbovt fts to
Kpf^^dri.
OvTa avveid'L^trai fvravda, Kvpit.
AeV pe peXti iro'ia fivai fj <rvvfi6(ia
ivravda' enipfva) va pot 8o6wat
Svo.
Ao's poi iv iroT^pi(ov) v(p6{y).
Svnvrjae pe avpiov nplv (f)da(roi-
pfv tls TTjV K(cf)aXXriviav.
SvTTvrjtTf pe avpiov els tcls e^.
BXeTTopev Tr)P Ke((>aXXr]viap j
MaXtora, Kvpit' 6a (f>6a(ran€v
fitTO. ^piatiav &pay.
136 Dialogues.
Put some hot water in the
basin, and clean my boots.
Bring me some coffee and a
biscuit.
Yes, sir ; will you have any-
thing else 1
I should like an egg, but be
quick about it.
AVhat is the name of thistown?
Argostoli.
Is it the first time that you
visit Greece?
No ; I have been in Greece
before, but I have never
come this way.
The view is very fine.
That mountain is grand.
Where is Ithaca %
There, far away on the left.
What a ban'en'rock it looks.
Is this island Zante 1
Yes, ' Zante, Zante, Fior di
Levante.' In summer it is
like a lovely garden.
"WTien shall we reach Patras ?
We shall be there at 7 p.m.
and stay till 1 1 p.m., and
reach New Corinth at 6 to-
morrow morning.
BdXf oKiyov ^«jtov vepbv els rrjv
XeKavriv koi Kitdi'purov {yvaXiat)
TO viTo8r]fj.aTd fiov,
^fpt fjiov vXiyov Ka(f)f Koi tv
na^ifj-dSi {Slnvpov).
MiiXlffTQ, Kvpif' 6i\(T€ r'iTIOTt
riXXoJ
Gt'Xo) (V avyov, alCKa Ki'ifit oyKf)-
yoapa,
nw9 ovofid^erai rj TroXts avrr) ;
*PipyocTTokiov.
E(i/a( T} irpoiTT] (f)opa, KaQ^ riv
inicTKenTfadf rr/if EXXn'da
;
*0;^t" rfkOov tls rfjv 'EXXdSa
iiX\oT€, dXX' ovbtnoTf rj\6op 8ia
T^s obov Tavrrjs.
'H 6ea fivai wpaiordn;.
To opos avTo f ij/at fifyaXoTrptnts.
Tlov ewai fj 'l6aia)j
E»cei fiuKpav trpos ra dpicmpa.
Tt yvfxvos ^pd)(os (palvfrai,
'H vrj<Tos avTTj (ivat rj ZaKwOos]
MdXtcrra'
*T] ZaKVvBos, T] ZdKVv6os,
TO I'lvdos TTJs 'AvaraKrjs . .
Kara to KoXoKoipi 6p.oia^(i /xa-
yfVTlKOV Krj770V.
ndre 6a (p6da<op(v els Tas Hd-
Tpas;
Qa rjpLfOa tKe'i els Tas fTTTO. fi.H.,
6a p.eivaip.ev fJtexP'' '''V^eu8f-
KaTrjs fi.fi. Kai 6a <p6d<ra>pfv els
Tijv Neai' Kopivdop els tus e^
avpiOV TO TT/JCOl.
Corfu to the Piiccus. ^Zl
Do you intend to go ashore 1
How much do you charge to
take me on shore ]
Two francs.
That is too much ; I will give
you one.
Very good, sir; here is myboat.
Bring that luggage.
Have you put all my things
in the boat ?
Howmany packages are there ?
Three, sir.
There ought to be four. Look
for the other.
Now are you ready ? Push
off.
There is a franc for you.
Have I time to go to the Con-
suhite before the steamer
starts ]
Yes, sir. The steamer does
not leave for four hours, and
the Consul lives close by.
Is this New Corinth 1
Yes. We have to disembark
at once, and drive across
the Isthmus.
Shall I not have time to
ascend Acro-Corinth %
No; the steamer sails from
Kalamaki as soon as the
SKOTTfverf va f^iXdrjTf fi? Trjv
irjpdv ;
Uoaa 0€\ets vd fie ^yaXr]s e^oo
{va fie aiTo^i^aa-rfs^;
Avo (ppdyKa.
Eivat napa iroKv' 6a aov bdicru)
tva.
Hokv Kcikd, Kvpie' e8a> eivai fj
^dpKa pov (17 Xf'/i^of pov).
^epe aira to itpdypara.
"E/SoXff oka Ta Trpdypara pov
els TTjv \(p^ov;
ndca tefiara (^dirotrKtvaV^ eivat ;
Tpi'u, Kvpie.
'Y-Tvpene va rjvai T((T(rapa' Kvrra^e
8ta TO aWo.
EtVat fToipos TupaJ
Epvpos
(aTru>6r](Tov).
'iSoii fv (fypdyKov.
"E^co Kaipov va imdya eis to
Upo^fvelov irplv dva^upriarj to
arpoTvKoiov]
MdXtora, Kvpie' to aTponXoiov
bev 6' dva)((i)pff(Trf Ttapa fieTa
Vfcraapas wpns, Ka\ 6 Trpo^tvos
KaToiKel ir\T)criov.
AvTT] eivai ij N«a K6piv6os^
M<i\i(TTa' fidvs irpenei v diro-
fii^aa6S)p(v Koi va SteXdapev
((f>dpd^r]s Tov 'icrdpov.
Aei/ 6a ex<>> Kaipov v dva^at etj
TOV ^AKpoKopivdov;
"Ox^' TO aTpoTTKoiov avaxcope'i
(K TOV KdKapaKlov ev6vs dpa
138 Dialogues,
passengers have crossed the
Isthmus.
What carriages are there 1
The Steamboat Company has
carnages, but I recommend
you to hire a private one.
Give five or six francs.
Steward, how much do I owe
you?
Ten fraacs in all, sir.
Here is a 20 franc piece.
Give me back ten.
I have only paper and cop-
per, sir. Here is half a
ten franc note and eight
francs of copper.
You are giving me too much.
No, sir; paper and copper
are depreciated (1879).
Please put this copper in
paper.
Can you take me to Kala-
maki, coachman 1
I am engaged, sir.
Send another carriage for me.
Put my luggage on the car-
riage. Quickly.
Drive on. Stop ! Go faster.
Do not beat your horses
like that.
Is that the steamer forPiraeus 1
I will go on board at once.
01 iin^uTai hia^axri rov Icrd'
fxoc.
Tt fidovs Sfia^ai vnap^ovcriv;
H aTfioTrXoiKr] iraipia ex^ei afin^av,
aXXa eras crvviarco va fxio-daxrrjTe
filav idtaTiKrjv. Aclxrare TrtVre
fj (^ (fipayKa,
Tpofpobora ^TratSt), ttocto <rov
ofpeiKd);
Ev oXo) 8//ca <PpdyKa, Kvpie,
'I80V fv vofiirrfta xpvcrovu tS>v
eiKocrt (f>payK(ov. Entarpf^ov
fioi (80s poi oTTiaoy) fieVa.
E;^a) fiovov X^P''"' '^''' X'*^'f°''>
Kvpif, *l8ou TO fffiiav fvos X^P~
TovoyLicrpLaTOS ratp 8fKa (ppayKcov
Koi 6kto> (fypayKa tls x«^'"'''»
Mol Bidfis ndpa TroXXd.
*'0;^t, Kvpif' TO )(apTov6fU<Tna Kai
6 xoKkos (Lvai viroTfTip,T}p€Pa.
Ti;Xt^f (li X"P'"'0''> irapUKaXo),
Tov ;faX(c6i' TovTov.
Avvn<rai ph fte (f)fpf]S fls to
KakafiaKiop, ajxa^rjXaTaJ
E)(a> dyaiyiop, Kvpie.
2T«tXe fiov aWrjp a/ia^ap,
BaXe TO npayfiwra fiov (n\ Ttjs
afia^rjs. Ta;^ecar. Tpfjyopa.
'n.p0X<i>pf]O'0P (ffiwpos). 'Sracrov.
IlTjyaiPf TaxvTfpop. M^ KTxmas
€T(n TO oXoyd aov.
Ekupo fivai TO dr/xowXotov 8ia
TOP IlfipaLd j Qa iiri^i^acrBS)
dfiia-ms.
Arrival at an Hotel. 139
Steward, I want some break-
fast. Let me have some fish
and lamb.
Give me some red (black)
wine.
I cannot drink the Avine
resin6.
Shall we pass Salamis and
Aegina 1 Please point them
out to me, when we are
near them.
Are those mountains on
the right in the Pelopon-
nesus ?
Yes; they stretch far away
to the south-east.
Tpo^oSdra, Btkut va. irpoyfvfia'
TiVw" 86s fxoi oklyov 'yf/'dpi, Koi
dpvdici.
Aos fioi oKiyov fiavpov Kpaai.
Aev fjpTropu> vu jtiw to peTaivdrov
Kpaai.
Oa ntpdaapep dnb rrjv 2ci\apiva
Koi Trjv Atyiuav ; Ad^e pov av-
rdf, (ri irapaKoKS), orav (1p(6a
1t\T](TioV.
Ta opt) fKelva npos ra Se^ia (ivat
TTjs Tl(\onovvfj(TOvI
MaXtora* iitrtivovTai irokv paKpav
irpos Ta voTtoavaroKiKd.
(3) Arrival at an
Hotel.
Can you tell me which is the
best hotel 1
There are no good hotels at
the Pirseus.
In what part of Athens is the
hotel you recommend 1
The best hotels are in the
Square of the Constitution.
Have you any rooms free 1
We want a sitting room and
two bed rooms.
A*ISI2 EI2 TO XENOAO-
XEION.
'HyJTopftTe va poi eiTnjre ttoiov
eivtu t6 KaXXiTfpov ^fvoSo-
Xf'iov ;
AeV imdpxovv KoKa ^evo8oxf7a
tls Tov Ilfipaid.
Elf TTolov ptpos Tap A6t]v5)v fivai
TO ^evo8oxf^ov TO onolov auft-
(TTOTf ;
Ta KoXXt'rfpa ^(voSoxtta tivat eU
TTjV TrXuTf'iav TOV '2vPTdypaT0i.
'Ex^Te dapdria (Kevdepa;
QeXofifV filav aidovaav koL bvo
bapaTia tov vttvov (jcoiTiouas^.
140 Dialoo^ues.
How much do you charge a
day for the three rooms %
The price is twelve francs a
day for each pei-son, includ-
ing meals.
Will you dine in the public
dining-room ?
We prefer to have our meals
in our own room.
Let us have dinner immedi-
ately; we want to go to bed
early.
Make a good fire in the sitting
room.
We are covered with dust, I
should like a bath.
If you want it we have every-
thing ready.
Waiter, show the gentlemen
their rooms.
If you take the rooms by the
month, it will be much
cheaper.
Waiter, bring my luggage
into my room.
Where are my things %
Are you sure tliat the bed is
quite dry %
The sheets seem very damp.
You must change the sheets.
Tell the waiter to make tlie
bed and air the room whilst
1 am out.
noo-oi/ ^r]T(iTe fKaiTTrjv fjfifpav Sta
ra Tpia dtofiaTia;
H Ttfif) fivai 8o)8eKa ippayKa Kara
iiTOfiov, fif TO (Payr^Tov,
OeXere va •yev/iaTifjjre tls to
fCTTiaTopiov;
npoTinS>fifv pa Tpmyaptv (Is to
Safiariov fias.
As dftnvrjaafifv evdvs' Oikofifv
va irXayidcTiOfjiep ivwpis.
Ava'\fr€ KaXfju (fxoTiav tls Tfjv
aWovaap,
Eififda KeKaXvfinevoi airo ctkovii
{KoviopTov), (TTtBifiovu va Ka/iO)
XovTpov.
'Eav dyoTtuTf, ()(0{i(V to navra
frot/Liu.
YiTTjpeTa, Sfi^ov tls Toi/s Kvplovs
Tu hmpAria toiv.
'Eav fvoiKiddrjre to. BcofxaTia KaTa
fxrjva 6a j/vai iroXi) (vdtjvoTtpov,
Ynrjpera, (})epf to. irpdyfiaTa (Is
TO 8a)p.a.Tt6v fiov.
Uov (ivai TO. TrpdypLard fiov J
Etcrat ^(^aios on to Kpf^^dri
(ivai (VT(Xci)s (TT(yv6v j
Ta aiv86via (f>aivovTai noXv irypd.
Upend V aXXd^r}T( Ta aivSovia.
EiTTt (Is TOP viTr}p(Tr]v va (Toipdarj
TO Kpf^^aTi Ka\ V depiaj] to
tfOfidnov, (p ci) c(/xa( e^to.
Arrival at an Hotel. 141
There is no bell in the room.
At what o'clock do you wish
to be called in the morning ]
1 think I shall require another
blanket on the bed.
My head is too low, bring nie
another piUow. Put out the
light.
Bring me some hot water at
half-past seven in the morn-
ing.
Where are my boots 1
Have my boots been cleaned 1
I want more towels.
I have forgotten my tooth
brush. Go and buy me one
as soon as you can.
Take my clothes and brush
them.
My hair-brush is in the port-
manteau. Have you found
my comb 1
Bring me some better soap.
Put plenty of cold water in
my bath.
I should like to have four
candles instead of two.
Would you prefer a lamp ?
Liv inapx^fi kwScop (Is to Sw/uJ-
TlOV,
Kara noiap Supav tnidvuuTt va
aas arjKoicrovp ttju irpaiapJ
No/JtX<i) oTi 6a Xd^cD dvdyKrjp icai
aXXov xpapiov (^naraviat, OKf-
•ncKTp.aTOi),
To K((paKi puv (ivai TraXv ^^afirjXd,
<^epf fiov Koi ak\o pa^iXdpi
(irpocTKKpdiKaiop^, 2j30<re to
<f>S)s.
4>epe fxov ^((ttop vtpop (Is raj
(TTTa Koi Tjpiadap to Trpaii.
Uov dual TO. nanoi/Taid pov (ra
inrobjipaTo) ',
'EKadapiadrjaap ra InoBripaTd
fjLOv;
6(Xa) Tr(pi<T(TOTepas niroXias
(irpotToylnaY
'E^e;^a(ra ttjp ^ovpTaav ra>p ddov-
Tdv. Ilriyaiv( pa [lov ayopdarjs
uiap TO Ta\vTtpop,
Udpe TO. povxd pov Koi ^((TKOPiae
Ta.
'H (iovpTcra tS>p p.aWiS)P dpai
(Is Th biadKKiop. 'Evpts to
KTevi povJ
4>€pe pov KaXKirepop aanovpi.
Bake a(f>dopov Kpvov pepop ds t6
\oxrrp6v pov.
^'EneBvpovp vd e;^<a T(<r<rapa <nrfp-
pLaT(T(Ta (Krjpia) optI 8vo.
UpoTipaTe piap \dpnap^
142 Dialogues.
Waiter, bring me tlie bill.
Have you made out our ac-
count ?
You charge a great deal.
Ilaidt, 0(/>e \iov rhv \oyapia(Tfi6r,
ExafifS Tov Xoyapia'jfwv /xaj ',
ZrjTUs iroWd,
(4) Conversation with aGreek Master ^
You are very late this morn-
ing. It is now a quarter past
eight,andyou said youwould
be here at half-past seven.
I am very sorry, sir, but we
can make it up by going on
longer at the end of the les-
son.
Yes, but that is not the same
thing. I must insist upon
your being more punctual.
Have you written anything
to-day 1
I have translated an entire
scene from this French play.
You are very industrious and
are making great progress.
I will correct this first, then
we will read.
Please write clearly, especially
the kappa and the lamvtha.
The accent is wrong. Here
is a mistake.
ATAAOrOS nPOS AIAA2KA-
AON THS EAAHNIKHSFAQSSHS.
IIoXu rjpyTjcraTe rrju rrpcoiav rav-
Tr]v. Eivai o/crw koL rirapTOV,
Koi eiirere ort da ^ade eSw t^v
e^b6p.r]v Koi fjfxiafiav,
AuTTOv/xai TToXu, Kvpie, aXXa dvvd-
pfda V dvairKTjpajTaipfv tovto
napartivovrts to tsKos tov fia-
GrjfiaTos.
MaXicTTa, dWa bev (tvat to avTo
Trpayfia. Qa fnip-elva va ^crOe
aKpiSforfpos.
'Eypd-^art TtTTore o^/zfpoj'J
'M(Tf(f)pa(ra oXokKtjpov (rKrjVTjv €K
TOV TaWiKov TOVTOV BpdpaTot.
Eiade TToXu eVt/xeX^r Ka\ Kafivtre
TToXXay npooSovs. Qa 8iopda)cra
TOVTO irpStTov Koi vcTTepov 6a
avayvdxrapev.
TpdcjXTe, irapaKoXS), Kadapd, Iduog
TO KaTTTta Kal to \dp^8a.
O TOVKTpOS (lUai i(T(f)a\pfV0S.
'l8ov (V \ddos.
* For words used in lesson, see Vocabulary, p. 277.
With a Greek Master. 143
"What is the Genitive of this
word?
The Genitive of that word is
not used.
What is the Present Indica-
tive of tliis verb 1
I will look it out in the dic-
tionary. How is it spelt 1
What is the first letter %
Blot that page. "Wipe the
pen.
Have you a pencil 1
Will you take the French
copy ; I will take the Greek,
and you can translate aloud
what you have just written.
It will give you facility in
finding the words.
I cannot read it off in Greek
very fast.
Well, try as fast as you can.
I cannot remember the words
at the moment, although I
know them well.
A little practice will remedy
that difficulty. Bravo ! You
are getting on capitally.
I will say the dialogue I have
learned.
I will read the English.
Now I will say a sentence in
Greek, and you shall answer
me. Let us suppose that
TLoia (XvaL i; ytvucfj t^s Xf^eat
ravrris',
'H yeviKT} TTJs \f^f(OS TavTr/s ttvai
aXpi](TTOS.
Iloios fivai 6 fpecTTag t^s opicr-
TiKTJs Tov prjfxaTOS TOVTov;
Ga jraparqprjaa els to \(^ik6u.
Has dp6oypd(f)fTcuJ
Hoiov aval
TO rrpioTOV ypdpfxa ;
XTfyvuXTOTt TT)V (TfXl'Sa TaVTTfV.
2,(f)oyyiaaTe to kovBvXiov.
"ExfTt /wXvfiboKovdvXovf
HdpfTe, irapaKoKciy to FaWtKbu
din-iypa(f)ov' tyw 6a Trapa to
'EXXijvikSv, vfitls 8* bvvaadf va
ptTat^pdcrqTt ptydXoCpavas o,
Ti iypdi^aTt rjbt}. Ga (vkoXvv^
drjre va tvpTfre tos Xe^fis.
Aev bvvafiai va to duayvdxra 'EX-
XrjPioTl TToXv oypTjyopa.
KdXtof ' SoKtfidaare oaov bvvatrde
Tax^Ttpov.
Aev bvvap.ai va ivBvfiSspuu Tas
Xe^fis els TTjv (TTiyfi^Vy fjLoXovari
KaXS)s Tas yva>pi^a>.
'OXryj; npd^is 6a depaTTevcrr) tt]V
hv<TKoXlav Tairrrjv, Evyf. Upo-
^alvere d^toXoya,
Ga eiTTO) TOV SidXoyov, toi» onolov
efjLa6ov,
G' dvayvaxra to 'AyyXiKdv,
Ta>pa 6a Xeyo) (f>pda-iv Tiva 'EX-
XtjvuttI Ka\ vpels 6d fxoi dnav-
Tare. *As vnoQevanev oti fx
144 Dialogues.
you are calling upon mewith a letter of introduc-
tion. (See Conversation on
this subject.) I will take
the part of a washer-womanor a hotel-keeper.
Before next lesson I will learn
two or three of the dialogues,
and then I shall be able to
understand and answer in
those subjects.
You can have the Yocabulary
of the subject open before
you. You will be able to
find the word you require.
I must read some modern
poetry to get used to the
pronunciation by accents.
Very good ; we will try some
of the extracts. Take care
about the accented syllable,
and the other syllables will
take care of themselves.
The pronunciation is difficult.
Do I pronounce that right ]
Not quite. You should learn
a piece of poetry and say it
aloud whilstyou are dressing.
I am tired of the house. Let
us not lose this glorious day.
We will go for a walk to-
wards old Phalerum.
(TTiaKfTTTfcrai, e^cnv (rvcTTaTiKrjv
fTTKTToikrjv' e'yw fie 6a Kufivco
TO fjiepos fiids irXva-rpai ^ ii/6s
^epo86)(ov.
Y]po Tov fTTOfifvov iia6f]fiaTos 6a
fjid6(A> 8vo ^ Tpeis SiaXoyovs, Kal
ToTf 6a Tjfxai iKavos va (vvoS>
Ka\ V anavrSi ds to. avriKtifxtva
Tavra.
HfiTTopelTe va exV"^ '"^ Xf|tXo-
yiov TOV 8ia\6yov tovtov cipoik-
Tov ivamiov eras. Ovtco 8e 6a
hvvrjadf va (vpL(TKrjT( t^v Xe'^ii',
TTjv onoiav 6a xpei,d(rj<r6e.
Ilpmei V dvaywai<jK(ii vforrepd
Tiva irw.TjftaTa, OTrms aTroKTrjcroi
TTjv e^tv TTJs npo(\)opas bia tov
Tovicrpov.
noXii Ka\d' 6a hoKindcrafiiv Tiva
t5>v dnoKTiracTfidTrnv. Upoat^aTf
CIS TTjv Tovi^ofjifvtjv av\\a^r]v,
KOI al aWai (TvXXajSai 6a (ppov-
Ti^ovv p.6vai TOiv fit tavrds.
'H Trpo(f>opa eivai SuctkoXos. Upo-
(f)fpa> TovTO Ka\a>s ',
"0^(1 eVrfXcos* TTpeVet va nd6riT(
(V Ttfxdxiov TToirjfiaTos Kal va to
Xeyjjre ev a evdverxde.
^Eliapvv6r}v TTju olKiav. Ay /x^
Xd(TCCp.(V TTJV "KafiTTpav TaVTTJV
fjfiepav. Oa TrfpinaTTjarafifV
Tvpbs TO nakaiov ^dXrjpov,
With a Guide. 145
With great pleasure. We can
talk Greek all the way.
I do not understand. Tell me
in English what you said.
Thanks ; now go on talking
Greek.
Be so good as to speak Greek.
I did not come here to learn
French.
Please speak slowly and dis-
tinctly. I am a little deaf.
The time is up. I must be
going away.
When will you come again ]
To-morrow at the sametime?
I fear it is impossible. I amengaged, but I will come in
the evening at nine.
Very good. I shall be ready.
Please be punctual. Good-
bye. At nine to-morrow.
AvudfjifOa va 6fii\S>nfv '£XX7-
viKa Kaff oKt]v rrjP 686u.
Aev fvvoS). EliTfTt fioi o,ti
ciTTaTf, 'AyyXioTi. "EvxapKTTS)'
Toipa (^aKo\ov6i]craT( va ofii-
\tjt€ 'EXXijwftd.
AdjSfTf T^v Kd\o(rvvT]v va SfiiX^re
'EWtjvikci. AfV ^Xdov eSco va
HaSoi TdKKiKa.
OfiiKfirf, TtapaKoKS), apya Ka\
KaOapd, £t/iat oXiyov Ka>(f)6s,
O ^pi')Vos irapriXde' irptnei v
dva^f^aprjao).
ndre ^d tXdijre iraXivJ
T^u av-
TTjv apav avpiov',
^o^oC/xat OTi (ivat dSvparov.
Ex(o SciXTfi virQ<TXf<Tiv, dXXd da
(Xd(t) TO icnrfpas ets rds ivvea,
TLoXi) KoKd. 9d fip.ai erot/xor.
'EoTf, irapaKaXS), dxpi/Si)? etj
rfjv S>pav. XaipfTf. Aoiirov
avpiov (Is rds ivvia.
(5) With a Guide.
r want a good guide, so that
I may lose no time in ask-
ing my way.
iVould you like one who can
speak English ?
];ertainly not. I want one
who can speak Greek, that
I may practise.
MEG' OAHrOY.
Exa avayicqv koXov obrjyov 8«d
i^ fuf xdvoi TOV Koipov fiov
^rjTav TOV bpoptov,
QiXfTe odrjyov opiXovvra ttjv
'AyyXiKT]v;
Be3ata)s oxL Ge'Xo) oSrjybv Ofu-
XovvTa TTjv 'EXXrjvtK^v 8ia va
KUfivo) aaKT)(rw,
146 Dialogues.
Are you a guide 1
Yes, effendi.
"What do you charge a day 1
Six francs a day, sir.
Eicrat SStjyosJ
'MaXuTTa, d(pfi>Tr].
Uocra 6f\(is rfjv fjfiepnv '
E^ (ppdyKa ttjv rjpepav, Kvpit.
TOVTOV
'
MaXiara, Kvpie, tivat rifiios Koi
f^VTTVOS.
KoXa, 6a <ras BfupS) vmvOvvoVf
iav p.e airara.
Qa fielvo) (vraiQa fiiav f^bopdSa
Koi 6(Xco va 18(0 KaXa oXa ra
mpaioTfpa irpayixara.
Do you recommend me this Mol a-vma-TaTf rov uvOpui-nov
man ? •
Yes, sir, he is honest, and
intelligent.
Well, I shall hold you re-
sponsible if he cheats me.
I shall be here a week, and
want to see all the most
beautiful things well.
You must always speak Upinn va SpiXfis iravroTf 'EX
Greek. Not too fast. Re- Xr^viKo., "O^i noXv yprjyopa.
peat what you said. Say it 'E7ravaXdp.^ave o,ti uTrfg
in French, in Italian, in Aeye ro TaXXiKa, 'iTaXuoi
English. 'AyyXiKd.
What is that building—hill Tt tlvai to Kripiov roiiro—6 Xd
—street—house ? <^oj—^ 686s—rj oIkIu;
What is the name of this limy ovofid^erai t) nXarfia avrrj\
square 1
You must be here at eight Uper^ei va ^a-ai e'Sw avpiov T
to-morrow morning. ^rpwi ds ras okto).
Very good, sir, I will be IloXv KoXd, Kvpie^ da rjnc
punctual. aKpi^Tjs.
(6) Asking the wat in
A Town.
Can you tell me where Mr.
Coumoundouros lives ]
Is this the bouse of Mr. Tri-
coupis ?
OnOS ZHTHSHi TI2 TON
APOMON EN THi HOAEI.
Avvacrdf vd fioi etnrjre irov Karot-
Kel 6 K, Kovp.ovv8ovpos ',
'H oiKia avTT) (ivai rov k. T/>t-
Presenting a Letter of Introduction. 147
Will you sliow me the way
to the Railway Station—to
the English Legation %
"Which door ought I to knock
atl
Knock and go in. You will
find a second door.
Go straight up the hill.
'Evap((TT(l(T6e m (loi Sei^qre tow
dpofJiov Tzpos TOP ^TnBpbv rov
2i8T]po8p6fiov—77/30? Tr}i> Ay-
y\iKT]v TTpecr^fiavJ
Iloiau Ovpav TrpeVet va KTwrjcra)
'
KTVTTTjcraTf Ka\ ettreX^erf. 6a
(vprjTf bevTfpav noprav (dvpavY
Urj-yalvere laia indva els tqv
(7) Peesentinq a Letteb
OF Inteoduction.
Is it far to the house of
Mr. VNo, sii*, it will take three
minutes in a carriage.
Drive to the house of Mr.
Go and fetch a carriage
;
choose a good one.
Close the carriage. It is
cold.
Is Mr. at home 1
No, sir, he is out.
At what hour shall I be most
likely to find him 1
"When will he return 1
Not before dinner.
ErXEIPI2I2 2Y2TATIKHS
Eni2T0AH2.
Eivai fiaKpav ^ oIkio tov k,
deivaJ
''0;(t, Kvpie, aTT()((i rpia XfTrro /ne
TTjV apa^av.
Tpa^a fls rfju oiKiav tov k,
Urjyaivt va <f>fpJ]S fiiav apa^av,
Ka\ 8iaXe^( p'lav KoKriv.
KXeTcre tt]v apa^av. Eivat
*0 K. bflva fivai ds to (nriTi
)
"Oxi, Kvpu, fivat e^co (o$co).
Karo irolav &pav tivai nidavop
pa TOP evpcoJ
HoTt 6a (Tri<rrpeyf/Tj;
A(P 6a (THiTTpe^ irpo tov ycv-
paTos.
' Prop-r Names are declined.
L 2
148 Dialogues.
Give him this letter and mycard, and tell him I will
call to-morrow morning at
eleven.
Very good, sir.
Please give him this letter
and ask him if he will see
me.
How do you do, sir 1 I amdelighted to receive any one
who has a letter from myfriend.
You are very kind.
And how long have you been
here?
I only arrived the day before
yesterday.
And how does the town
please you 1
It is beautiful and the climate
delightful.
At what o'clock shall I find
you at your hotel %
I am always in until twelve.
What are you doing to-night 1
A few people are coming to
u« and we should be de-
lighted to see you.
Many thanks, but I have pro-
mised to go with a friend
to the Society of Parnassus
to hear a lecture.
Ady Tov Tr\v iirimoiX^v ravrqv kcX
TO €iri(TK€TrTrjpi6v fiov, Koi (ini
TOV oTi 6a Ttfpdva avpiov €is
ras fv8(Ka.
IIoXu Ka\d, Kvpif.
UapaKokS) dos tov ttjv tVto'TO-
Xiji/ TavTTjv Kal f'pmTrja-f tov idf
6f\rj va /i€ IBj],
Ti KapvfTf, Kvpif ; Xaipci) St-
)(op(v6s Tiva, 6 Snoloi e^^ei
fiTKTToX^v dno TOV (j)l\ov pov,
Eto-^t jToXv tvyfvfjs.
Kal nocrov Kaipov ex*''* ^^Ta^&a\
Y[pO)(6is povov t^6aa-a.
Kai TTws ads 0atV«rai rj noKnJ
Etcoi iipaia TrdXtf, to fie kX/j
fivai Tfpnvov,
Kara noiav apav da ads (Zp-
els TO ^fvoSoxf^ovJ
Eipai TrdiTOTf peaa ptxpi t\
bunbfKarqs.
Tims 6d irepdoTjTe tt^v ^pabid aas
©a tkOovv f8a> TO ^pd8v ptpiKi
Koi 6d (v)(api.(TTr]6Siiptv va ad\
idoapfv.
2ar fiixapi<rrS> ttoXv, aXX vne-
(j\i6r]V vd vndyco ptTd Tivos
(fjikov pov (Is TOV 2vK\oyop<
' Uapvaaabv ' ottcos aKOV(r»
8iaTpi^r]v Tiva.
i\
The Post Office. 149
You do not lose time. The
Syllogues are almost always
open to the public
You will see a meeting adver-
tised in the paper, and you
can always go in.
I must go now, sir. "We have
breakfast at eleven at the
hotel.
Good-bye. I shall have the
honour of calling to-moiTOW.
If I can do anything for you,
please let me know.
AeV yavfTf Kaipov. Ot (rvXXoyot
(ivai ax^^ov iravroTf avoiKToi but
TO Koiv6v (Ji)(OV(ri.v i\(xj6(pav rrjv
(laobov^,
0a ibr]Tf ras <rvv(bpid<Tfif dy-
ytWopevas 8ia tS)V fC^ij/ifpiSwi/
Koi bvvaaOe va (laeXdrjTf,
npfuft V avax<i)pr)(ra> rcopa, Kvpie.
To npoyfvpa naparidfTat tls to
^€vo8o)(f7ov (Is Tos fvSeKa.
XalpfTf. 0a XajSo) ttiv TipfjV va
aas iTn<TK((\)6Si avpiov. Eav
dvvapai va irpd^io rt imtp vpStv,
<rds irapaKakS) va. /xoi to finijTf.
(8) The Post Office.
I beg your pardon; could
you tell me where the Post
Office is ]
Come with me to the Square
of the Constitution, and I
will show you the way.
You must turn here to the
left and keep straight on
past the Chamber.
It is in the same building as
the Home Office.
You will easily recognise it
by the crowd.
Is it that building just above
the English Embassy and the
office of the ' Ephemeris ' 1
TO TAXYAPOMEION.
Me crvyx<>ipf'^'''f) S*'' fov Xeyere
nov fivai TO Taxv8pop(iov j
'EXarf pa^v pov fls ttiv irkaTelap
Tov ^vvTayparos Koi 6a aas
t(i^o> TOV bpopov,
npent I va yvpiarjTe ebm trpos to.
apiaTfpa Ka\ j/a 8ifv6vv6i]T€ kut'
(vdflav nepav r^s Bov\tjs.
"Eivai (Is TO avTo KTipiov p( to
vwovpyeiov tS)v E<T(OT(piKS>v.
Qa TO dvayva)pi(TT}T( (VKoXa dnb
TOV naXvv Kocrpov,
Mi'jTrois (ivai to KTipiov (K('ivo
aKpi^ws Trapairdvco dno ti)v
dyy\iKr}v ivp«T^(iav Ka\ to ypa-
(pdov T^s 'E<f>T)p(pi8os j
I50 Dialogues.
Yes, sir; it Is at the corner
above.
When does the post leave for
England ]
On Thursday and Saturday
at 6 p.m. The postage is
30 lepta for abroad.
When do letters reach Eng-
land ?
They take about a week. Aletter posted on Thursday
readies London on Wednes-
day, and one posted on
Saturday will be received
on the following Saturday.
When does the mail arrive
from England ]
Ou Thursday and Saturday
morning. You have only a
few hours to write replies.
Eor Greece, the postage is
only 20 lepta.
Give me three stamps of 30
lepta and two of 20.
Is that right 1
No, sir; you must put on
another 60 lepta,
But it is ' Papiers d'Affaires,'
Manuscript.
Y'ou must write it on the
outside, and leave the ends
MtiXtora, Kvpit, eivat tts rf/v
(7rdva> yaviav.
Uore di'ax<>>pel to Taxv^pofxetov
8ia rfjv 'AyyXlav;
TtjV nfflTTTTJlt Kol TO 2d^^aTov
fls Tcis f$ p. p. Ta TaxyhpopiKa
Tik-q tLvai TpiaKOUTa \ewTa bia
TO e^coTfpiKov,
Hore c^dduovv al fTriaroXal fls
TTJV AyyXiav
;
Xpfid^ovTai piav e^bopdba irep'i-
•nov. Mm iniVToKr] picjiOela-a
(IS TO Ta^vBpopelov ttjv IlfpTrTijv
(f>6dv(i fls AovSilvop TTjv TfTdp-
Tr]v, Kai aWt] pi^dilaa (Is to
Tox^hpopflov TO 2d^^aTov, 6a
\ri(f)dfj TO fnopfifov ^d^iSaTov,
UoTf <p6dvfi TO Ta\vhpop(iov (^
'AyyXias;
Trjv nepTTTr/v Koi to 2dj3^aTOV to
Trpai, \JAiyas povov (opas
eYtre 8ia va ypdxf/rjTt djravT^afis,
Ata Tr}v 'EXXaSa Ta Ta;^uSpojui(ca
TfXrj fivai fj.6pov fiKoai Xejrra.
Aoy poi Tpia ypappaTaarjpa t(ov
TpidKuvra XenTiov Ka\ 8vo T<i>¥
(Xko<ti.
'Elvai (rwcrra
;
0)(i, Kvpif, Trpenei va ^dXr]Tt
aKopr] fv TOiv f^rjirra XfTrroJi/,
*AXX* (ivai )((ip6ypa<pov.
UpfTrei va to ypd'^f/ryre air f^co ko
V dcpTjoTjTf Ta oKpa dvoiKToi
Athens. 151
open. Then it will be suffi-
ciently stamped.
Are there any letters for me \
What is your name, sir ?
There is my card.
No, sir, there are none.
If any come, will you send
them to the Hotel d'Angle-
terre—des Etrangers—NewYork ; and please send them
as early as possible, as they
may be important, and re-
quire answers.
You can rely upon me, sir. •
Take these letters to the post
and stamp them.
Ask whether the post haa
arrived.
No, sir; the boat has been
detained by bad weather.
Tore 6a. f)(rj ri irpiirov raxy-
hpofiiKov TiKos.
Mi^TTCDf vnap)(nv(Tiv emoroXat bC
Has ofOfid^eade, KvpifJ
I80V TO €TnaKfinr]pi6v pov.
Oxi, Kvpit' 8iv vndpxfi Kappta.
Eav eX^wcrt rivfs, fvapta-TTjdrJTe
va Tas irtpy^Tt els to ^(vo8o-
Xelov Tijs 'AyyKtas—Tav Sevau
—Tijs Ne'af Y6pKr]s' Koi irapa-
KakS> arelXaTe ras to to^v-
Tfpov, bioTi KTcof fwai anovbaiat
Koi XPuCova-iv aTravTrjo-eas.
MdvaTf T](rv)(os, Kvpie, Koi BtXco
(jipovTiaei.
Hrjyaive Tas eVtOToXay Tavras els
TO Taxv8pop(7ov Koi /SaXe ypap-
paroarjpa,
EpdiTi](rov iav ri Ta)(vbpopfiov
f(f)6a(Te,
"O^i, Kvpie' TO aTpoTrXoiov Kad-
VarepTja-fv (vtKa KUKOKaipias*
(9) Athens. AI AGHNAI.
The Museums are open to the Ta Movo-eTa (Ivai avoi<ra {dvol-
public on certain days in the yomai) 8ia to koivov Kaff i>pia--
week. p€vas r]pepas t^s f^bopdbos.
Is the ITyeense collection on *E^(T(6t] fj o-vXXoyi) t&v MvKrjvai/
view at Athens 1 ds 'Adljvas npos 6iav;
Yes; it is in the Polytechnic. MaXtora* dvai us to lloXvre-
Xyfiovt
15* Dialogues.
There is a large piece of Mo-
saic in the Royal Garden
in a good state of preserva-
tion.
There is a fine collection of
ancient coins in the Univer-
sity.
Some interesting discoveries
have been made in the
recent excavations on the
southern side of the Acro-
polis.
There has been an attempt
to revive the Olympian
Games in the Stadium.
Plato's Academia, and Co-
lonus, the scene of one of
Sophocles' plays, are within
an easy walk of the city.
The best view of Athens is
from the top of Lycabettus.
You can reach the top in half
an hour.
Mars Hill is on the other side
of the town, close to the
Acropolis.
The view of the Temple of
Theseus is very fine from
the train as you enter the
station.
The Ceramicus is also very
'Yrrap>;«t \i.iya MaxraiKov ivros
Tov ^aaCKiKQv ktjttov, Biarripov-
fi(vov (V KoKfi KaTaardafi.
Yirdpxfi i>pa[a avWoyfi dp)(n'iwv
vomeriiaTuv iv t^ Travfnicrnjixitf.
27rov8aia» rives dvaKaXvif/eis <ye-
vovTo els ras eaxdras yevofxevas
dva<TKa(l>as irpos rf/v pearjp^pivTjv
irkevpav rrjs AKponoXeats,
'Eyevero npocTTrddeid ris va ena-
va\r](f)6a)(Tiv ev tw ^TaBico ol
'OXvfiTnaKoi dywves.
'H AKabrjpia tov UXdravos Koi 6
KoXavos, rj aKijurj fiids rpaycobias
TOV 2o(f)OK\fovs, KelvToi els
fxiKpav divoaTaalv ex. T^r tto-
\ea)S,
H apaioTepa 6ea t5>v *h6t)vS>v\
et,vai eK ttjs Kopv(pjjs tov Avkw
^rjTTOV.
Avvaade v dva^rire els rrjv Kopv-I
<f)fjv evTos fjfjiicreias apas.
'O "Apdos Hdyos, (6 Xd^of tow
"Apeuts) eivai Trpos ttjv a\\rj»i
TrXevpav rrjs noXeas, nXrjaiov\
Ttjs AKpondkeois.
'H dea TOV Orjaelov e7vai ttoXw ;
a>paia eK tov (Tibrjpobpofiov afia
elcreXdere els tov (rradpov,
'O KepupeiKos eivai enlarjs noXvj
Athens. 153
near the railway station.
There are some fine monu-
ments in it well preserved.
It takes a long day to drive
to Marathon and back.
Eleusis, through the pass of
Daphne and along the Sacred
Way, is not too far for a
good walker.
On Easter Tuesday the annual
fete at Megara is held.
Many strangers go there to
see the peasants dance.
The costume of the peasants
is very picturesque.
Another delightful excursion
is to mount Pentelicus. Tobe at the top in time to see
the sun rise, one must sleep
overnight at the monastery
at the foot.
The marble quarries are well
worth a visit.
The view from the top of
Hymettus is also very fine
but less extensive than that
from Pentelicus.
I should like to go to My-
cense. Is it easy to go
tliere ]
nXTfatov ToC aradfiov rov aibrj-
po8p6fjiov,
Yirdpxovaiv (v avra Tiva lapaia
fivr)fi(ia KoKo)! 8iaTrjpovp(va.
Xpeid^fTai oKokXtjpos fjpfpa va
vndyr) Ttf €<^' (ifid^rjs ds Mapa-
BSava Kcu va (nicrTpiy\ni,
'H 'EXevcTJf hia tov trreiov toO
Aa(f)viov Koi dta Trjs Upas 68ov
bev tivai ttoXv fuiKpau 8ia xakov
ire^oSpopov,
Tfjv TpiTTjv TOV Tld(Txa yiverai ^
fTTjcria iopTT) fjy to. Meyapa,
EtoXXoi ^€voi irrjyalvovp (Ktl va
i8(t)ai Tovs xcopiKoi/s pa \opfv-
(0(TI.
At ivSv/jUKTUii tS)v )^a)piKOiv fipai
ypacjiiKaTaTai.
*AXX»7 (vxdpioTos fKbpofiT) (ipai
(Is TTjP UfPTfXrjp, Ata va
^ddarj Tis iyKaipas fls rr)»
Kopv(f)t)P, OTTwr idr] T^v dvoToXrjv
Toil TjXiov, TrpeVet pa K0ifJiy]6fj ds
TO pOPaOTTjplOV (Is TOVS TrpoTTO-
8as TT)P irporjyovpevTjv pvkto,
Ta XaTOfjLfla tov fiappdpov d^i-
^ov(ri va TO fniaK((pdjj tis.
'H Ofa (K tov 'Ypr]TTov (ivai
(niarjs ttoXv iapa'ia, dXX oXtytb-
Tipop (KT(Tap(pr} T^s Bias Trjs
nepTfXrjs.
^ETr(dvpovP va vtrdya (ts ras
Mujoji'af. Eivai (vkoXop pa
VTrdyrj TIS eVfiJ
154 Dialogues.
The easiest way is by water 'H tlKoKaripa obos tlvai dia
as far as Nauplia, where OaXdiraijs fi^xP'^ Navn'Kiov, onov
horses must be hired to npiiTei va fuaGaxrrjrf Ittitovs
take you to Mycenae, Tiryns, 8ia va vndyrjre ds rdt Mvkt]-
Coriuth, etc. vas, rfjv Tipwda, ttjv Kopivdov
K.T.\,
How many days does the trip nJo-ay ^p.ipas SiapKtl to ra^d-
take ] Biov
;
You can see everything easily Awaade va iSjjre ra ndvra Iv
in four days. avian tls -reavapas f/fifpas.
Is there anything worth visit- 'Ynapxei n a^iov iniaKt^taa iv
ing at Corinth 1 Koplvda;
From the top of Acro-Corin- *EKT^sKopv(f)T]STov'AKpoKop[vdov
thus you have one of the ^X^ff 6iav e< rSiV Xapvporepav
finest views in Greece. ev 'EXXaSt.
It takes about two hours to 'Yndyfi rtr (VTOs 8vo apZv ((fuTT-
ride or drive from Corinth iros rj e^' apd^qs «k rrjs Kopiv-
to Kalaniaki, whence a 6ov fls t6 KaXap-aKi, 66(v to
steamer brings you back to drfionXoiov ads fjrava(f>€pei tU
the Piraeus in about four Ueipaid ivros rea-adpoiv n-fpiVoi
hours. wpcov.
What season in the year JJoiav apav rov erovs 6d e'^fXe
would you choose for tra- yerf fiui ra^eiSiov iv ra iacoTf
veiling in Greece 1 piKa r^s 'EXXaSoy;
The winter is most enjoyable 'O x^'^l^^" *'""' ° /:xdXXoi' tixd
in Athens ; but I should piaros ds rds 'Adrjvas' 6a i^e
choose March, April, or \(yov 8e rov MdpTiov, 'AvpiXio
May for travelling in the rj Md^ov 8ia irepifiyrjaiv ds n
interior. ia-coTtpiKov.
Throughout the month of Kafi* Skov t6v 'lavovdpiov 6 olpai
January the skies are almost vos dvai a-x^^ov dre^fXor.
cloudless.
Residence in a Family. -^SS
(10) About a Family in
which to beside.
E. I want to find a family
who would receive me into
their house.
G. You mean that you wish
to have rooms there; not
to have your meals with the
family.
E. No, no. I want to have
my meals there. You do
not learn Greek by living
in the same house with
Greeks. I want to hear
them talk, and talk to them
myself.
G, But, sir, it is not the cus-
tomhere to receive strangers.
Our habits are so different.
It will not be very comfort-
able for you.
E. It is the only way to learn
Greek quickly, and I shall
adopt it, whether I am com-
fortable or not.
G. I admire your determina-
tion. But in a few days
you will return to yuur
iiotel.
E. We shall see. In the
meantime, how am I to find
a family ?
HEPI OIKOrENEIAS EN Ht
eEAEI NA KATOIKHSHt
TI2.
E. GtXo) vh. evpca oiKoytveidv
Tiva, rJTis 6a fi eSe;(eTO ftf
TTjv oiKiav Trjs.
G. 'Evvoflrf OTi imdv^iUTe va
(XV"^ Sw/ita'Tta e/cet, o;^i o/xcay
Koi va TpcuyrjTe fie ttji/ oIko-
yfVfiav.
E. "Ox}, oxi ! ©eXci) Koi va Tpaya,
Aev fiavddvd tis 'EWrjviKa Kor-
oiKwv fiovov ev Tfi avTrj oIkIo.
fjied' 'EXKtjvcov. Qe\(o va roi/s
aKovci va opikaxri Ka\ va opiXa
Kal iya> n'pos avTOvs.
G. 'AXXa, Kvpie, 8(v tivai (tvvtj-
6fia eScd va 8e;^coiArat ^fvovs.
Ta tdipd pas eivat noXi) dia(popo-
TiKa. Aev 6a aas fLvai ttoXv
avairavTiKov.
E. Ell/at o povos Tponos va pd6r]
Ti-s EWrjviKa Ta\€u>s, koI 6a tov
'iTapahc)(6a> eire 6a rjvai evapfcr-
TOV fiTf dev 6a j]vai,
G. Qavpd^io Trjv aradfpoTrjTa
(raf. AXX' (vtos oXiycav rjpt-
pS)v 6d fniaTpt-\lrt]Tf ds rh
E. 0a idwpev. 'Ev tovtois ttoos
8vvapai va evpco olKoyfVddv
nva
;
155 Dialogues.
G. I will inquire among myfriends, with pleasure ; but
I fear it will be difficult.
E. I think I shall put an
advertisement in the "Qpa.
G. Such a thing was never
heai'd of It is impossible.
E. If it is extraordinary it
will attract attention, and
that is the object of an
advertisement.
G. But only a low class of
people will answer the ad-
vertisement.
E. Well, I shall go and see
them and judge for myself.
I am determined, so come
and help me write the ad-
vertisement.
'An Englishman desires to
enter a Greek family. Herequires two rooms, and
wishes to take his meals
with the members of the
family, in order to talk
Greek. Terms, 300 francs
a month. Address, IT. A.
Hotel des Etrangers.'
G. Yes, I think that will do;
300 francs a month is quite
enough.
E. They ought to include in-
struction for that sum. In
France, Germany, and Italy
G. Ev)(api(TT(i)S 6a f^fTaaa fit-
ra^i) tS)v (fjiKoiv fiov' ahXa (po-
^ovfjiai oTi 6a J/i/ai tvaKoXov.
E. No/[*tfc<> OTi 6a KaTa-)(<op[<T<ji
flboTToirjcriv riva tts rijv ' "Qpav,
G. Toiovr6v T^ oiibfTTOTt rjKovaBrj.
£(i/at ahvvaTOV.
E. *Eaw T/i/at rrapabo^ov 6a «X-
KVCrrj TTjV TrpO(TO)^r]V TOV Kocrpov,
Koi ovTos (ivai 6 (TKOTTos puis
(l5onoif](Tfa>i.
G. *AXXd t6t€ povou f] Kara ra^is
TOV \aov 6a X«/3); vn oi//'«' rfju
uhcmoir^aiv.
E. IIoXii Ka\a, da vTrdya va roi/s
ida> Ka\ va Kplvut p6vos pnv.
JLipai diTo(f)aaiap(VOS, uxTTf fXa
va pe ^or]6r](TT}s va ypdyp^o) rfjV
*lbonolq<nv.
* AyyXor rtj (ni6vp(l. va flcr€\6rj
f.s riva fXXrjviKfjv olKoyevtiav,
E^(i dvdyKr]V 8vo baparLav kcA
im.6vp(i va rpuiyjj ptra rmpfXcov r^s olKoyiveias ottcdj opf
Xfj (\\r]viKd. Tiprj 300 (f)pdyKa
TOV piiva, Aiddwcris M. A.
A(vooox^(iov TOiv Afvmi'.
G. MaXttrra, vopi^a on ()^(i
KaXSii' 300 <f>pdyKa kutci prjva
(ivai upKfrd.
E. UpfTTd Tore va crvpirfpiXap-
^dvTjTUi Ka\ fj 8i8a(TKa\ia fls t6
TToaov. Elf TTjv VaWlaVj Ttp.
Residence in a Family. 157
I paid much less.
G. But here it is not the
custom, and you must pay-
rather more. Give the ad-
vertisement to this man
;
he will take it to the office,
and pay what is due.
ftavlav Koi 'irdkiav tTrXfipaxra
TToXv o\iya)Tfpov.
G. EbS) ofjid)! 8(v (iifoi (TVVTjdaa
Koi TTpfiTft va irXrjpaxTtfTf 7rfpi(T~
(Torepov. AoTf rqv fldonoirjcnv
(Is TOV avOpOilTOV TOVTOV, OCTTtP
6a Trjv virayrj els to ypacfte'iov
Kcu 6a 7r\r]po)<rT] to irpenov.
(II) Conversation with synaiaaesis me tina 01-
THE Head of a Family. kofeneiapxhn.
G. I have seen your adver-
tisement in the paper, sir.
E. It is very good of you to
come so promptly. Do you
understand what I require ]
G. Certainly, sir. I have
taken a new house which is
too large for my own family.
The rooms are very good.
E. Can I have my meals with
youl
G. I fear it will be difficult.
E. But it is a necessity. I
regret that we cannot ar-
range. Good morning, sir.
G. Yes, sir, if you can eat
our Greek dishes.
E. I do not mind anything,
so long as the house is clean.
G. We have breakfast at
11.45 ^Q^ dinner at 6. In
G. EtSov, Kvpie, T^v yvoaaTOTToit]-
(Tiv <ras fls TTjv ecj)Tjp.(pi8a,
E. Eicrdf jToXii KoXos Stort fantv-
aare va eXdijre. KaraiXap^uvfTe
rt C'l'^S) ;
G. BfjSata, Kvpie. "E;^© eVot-
Kiaa-peinjv vtav oIkiuu noXi) fieya-
Xrjv bia TTji/ olKoyevfiAv p.ov. To
8a)p.dTia (Ivai noXv KoXd.
E. Avvafiai va Tpaya fia^v (Tagj
G. ^o^ovpaioTi6ajivai8v(rKoXov,
E. 'AXX* tivai dvdyKT]. Armovfuii
8f dioTi 8ev (Tvp(pa)VOVfitv. Xai~
prrf, Kvpie.
G. MdXtaTa,Kvpie,&v^fnroprJTtva
Tpwyr)T€ TO. fKXrjviKap^s ^ayip-o.
E. Aev fif p.fXti 8ia riirort, (f)ddvfi
fiovov Tj olKia va fjvai. KaOapd.
G. Upoytvpari^ofiev fls rag
11.45 *'*' yfVftarif^oixfv tls ras
158 Dialogues.
the morning you could have
coffee and anything else you
required.
E, Those hours suit me very
well. What do you ask a
month %
G. I cannot take less than
350 francs a month, and I
assure you that I shall gain
very little.
E. Then you must manage
your household very badly.
I will not give more than
300 francs a month for
everything, and I expect
you to give me an hour's
Greek lesson a day.
G. But you do not know, sir,
how dear provisions are.
E. I know that tliey are
cheaper here than in Paris,
and there I only paid 300
francs in an excellent family.
G. I hope you do not regard
me as a rascal. I am a man
of honour, sir, and I assure
you that I shall gain nothing.
I will accept with this con-
dition, that you will stay
at least two months.
E. I can promise for one
month, but after that I can-
not be sure. Probably I
shall remain three months.
6. 'Yr]v iTpcoiav 6a nii>T]T( Ka(j)€
Kai o,Tt aXXo ^r]Tr](TfT€.
E. At Sipai avrai eifot ttoKv Ka-
rdWifkoi 81 (fif. Tt (rjTf'ire
Tov fir]va (St (Kaarov firjvaj]
G. Aiv bvvafiai va Sf^^^co oXtyco-
Tepov tS)V 350 (f)pdyK<ou Kara
fJLrjva, Ka\ aas ^e^aiS) on 6a
xepSi^o) naiXv oXiyov.
E. Tore eiade ttoXv Kaxos oIko-
Kvprjs. AeV 8i8(o nepiacTOTepov
TCiv 300 (f>pdyK(ov Kara priva
bi o\a, Ka\ fvvoo) va [lol 8i8r]Tf
ekXrji'iKov fia6r}fia fuas wpas
Kaff eKaaTTjp,
G. 'AXXa bev yvcopl^fre, Kvpit,
it6(tov OKpi^a eivai ra Tpo(j)ipa.
E. Tvccpl^d) OTI eivai fvdrjvoTfpa
f8S> OTTO Toiis napiciovs, koi opa)s
tKfl fTrkfipavov 300 (jypdyKa
(JLOVOV ft$ a^ioKoyov oiKoytvtiav.
G. Aef Trtorevo) va [xi 6ecop^Te
Karfpydpt]v. Eipai Tifxios av-
6pa>'iros Kill eras fif^aia on
bev 6a Kepbfjcra (jitpbicra)) W-
iTore. Qd 8fx6S) inro tov opov vh
[Xfivrjre bio p.TJvai TOv\d)(ii(TTOv.
E. 'H^TTopoJ va vrro(rxf6a) b
tva p-rjva, ciKKa fitr avrhv bfv
bvvafiai va r)p.ai ^f'^aios. Uido'
vbv va fiuvci rpfis nrjvas.
Residence in a Family. 159
Gr. I hope you will stay at
least three months, as I liave
to spend a great deal in
buying furniture. "When
will you corae ]
E. I should like to come to-
morrow. Will everything
be ready 1
G. At three to-morrow every-
thing will be ready for you.
E. Very good. I shall be
there at 4 p.m.
Gr. 'EXTTi'^w oTt Ba fiflmjTf rov-
Xa;^i(rTov rpt'is ixrjvas fVetS^
6 avayKaadSi va 8aTTapr](Ta> ttoX-
Xct 8ia V dyopdao) fTTinXa,
HoTf 6a fXdrjTf5
E. 'EneBiifiovu va eXdco avpiov.
©a ^vai TO ndpra eroi/xa;
Gr. Eiff ras rpus avpiov oka 6a
rjvai eroipa 8t vfids.
E. noXii Ka\a. Qa eX^o) fts rat
(12) ABKivAii IN A Family.
Where is my bedroom ]
Here, sir.
Are the sheets dry? Whyhave you only given me one
sheet ] Go and get another
directly.
Is there anything in those
drawers "?
Open the cupboard. I want
to hang my coat up.
Clean my boots, please, and
call me in the morning at
7. I will take coffee and
an egg at 8.
Bring me some hot water for
shaving.
When will dinner be ready 1
AGISTS EI2 OIKOrENElAN.
now flVai 6 KOITWV fXOVJ (^ fp«/3'
^aroKafiapcnj
E^dj, Kvpie,
Ta aivdovia (ivai oTfymj Atari
fioi f8a>Kas novov tv aivhoviJ
TlT]yaLV€ Ka\ <f>fp€ aXXo d/ueorwr.
'YTrdp)(€i Ti (Is aira to (Tvprdpia;
Avci^f TTjv cKtvodrjKrfv (to vtov-
Xdnij. GeXw va Kpefidaa to
(f)6pfpd fiov.
KaOdptaov, TrapaKoXS), to. vttoSj)-
fiard pov Ka\ ^inrvrjat pf to
irpaX els ras 7- ©a irdpa Kaipe
Ka\ ev avyov fls ras 8.
^fpe pov oXiyov ^((Ttov vepov 8ta
va ^vpiadSt.
ndrt 6a ^vai iroipov to yevpaJ
i5o Dialogues.
It is now a quarter of an
hour late.
The master of the house is
out.
I don't care. I cannot wait
;
I am in a hurry. Put din-
ner on the table.
Do you like that dish \
Yes ; I like all vegetables,
especially haricot beans.
Will you have some salad
with your chicken ?
{JFor oilier dishes, etc.,
Thanks, I have finished.
Will you excuse me? I
must go out at once.
' The Theatre begins at 8,
and it is twenty minutes'
walk.
At what o'clock shall you be
backl
About 1 1 ; but I had better
take a key, so that the ser-
vants need not sit up.
*Hpyr)afP rJSr} tv rerapTOV r^f
S)pai.
'O d(fieinT]s (olKobfaTroTTjs) flvai
Aei* pe peXet. Atv Tjpnnpciy va
TTtpipiva. Bid^opai. BdXc to
(jiayrjTov fts to rpant^i.
2aj dp((TK(i TO (payr/Tov tovtoJ
MaXi<TTa, p.' dpiaKovv oka Ta
"kaxaviKa, Idiass to (paaovXia.
QeXfTf oXlyrjv aaXuTav pi to
novKi
;
see Vocabulary, p. 263.)
'Ev)(apiiTTSi, (TfKfiacra.
Me (Tvyx<»pflTe JUpeirfi va ($-
(X6(a dpeams.
To dfuTpov apxi^d f's TOf OKTOi
Koi TrpeTrei va ^adiaa (iKocrt
XfTTTa.
Uoiav aipav 6a iinaTpi'^rirfJ
Ilepl Tas fvbfKa' dWa KaWl-
repnv va ndpco fva Kkfibi, Sta
pa pfj ptvuvv ol xmrjpiTai aypv-
Give me the key of the front
door.
If the dogs bark at you, throw
a stone at them, and they
will run away as fast as they
can.
Thanks ; I have my stick. I
am not afraid.
Aof poi TO KKfi8iov TTJs ipnpoa-
6ivris Qvpas.
'Eav TO (TKv\i.a aas yavyl^nvtri
plylraTf piav nfTpav Ka\ da
(f)vyovv TO Taxyrtpov.
ElxapioTw' fx<o Trjv pd^8ov fiov,
AcV (f)ofioipM.
Meeting in the Street. i6i
(13) JfEETING IN THeStKEET.
How do you do 1 How are
you?
Very well, thanks ; and you \
I have a bad cold.
I am very sorry to hear it.
"Well,and how are you getting
on in Greek ?
Capitally. The language is
very pleasant and not so
difSoult as I expected.
One learns Avithout working
if one talks Greek all day
long.
Well, what news is there 1
Not much. 1 fear there will
be war, however; the peo-
ple are excited.
Have you heard the report
that Moukhtar Pacha, the
Commissioner for the Rec-
tification of the Frontier,
has retired, and will be
replaced by Said Pacha ]
It cannot be true, Said Pacha
will not leave Constantino-
ple.
I heard it on good authority.
2YNANTH212 KAG* OAON.
Ti Ka\i.viTi ; Ilwy iiaQf\
TLoKv Kaka^ fv^apicrra)' v^tis 8eJ
Eifiai jToXw Kpvo\oyT}[i('pos.
AvTrovfiai noKv (aKovcav tovto\
Kal TTcos TTtjyaivfTt els to. 'EXXij-
viKa',
Aafinpa. Eivai fvxapiaros yh.axr-
(ra Koi o;(i Toaov 8v(tko\os ocrov
(VOfll^OV,
Mavdavft Tts x<*'p'f va KaTaytvrjTai
fav opiXjj 'EXXrjviKa Kad' oXiji*
TTiv fjixtpav,
Kal ri vea ()(op,^v]
0)(i TToXXa. ^o^ovpai iv tovtois
on, 6a yeivrj nokefios' 6 Xaos
fivM (^rjppevos.
HKovdare rr/v etSrjaiv ori 6 Movk-
Tap naaaiy 6 iTrlrponos inl rrjs
btappvdpiaeois rav avv6pa>v
dneaiipdrj, koi oti 6d avrtKora-
aradr} VIVO Tov 2atS TraaraJ
Afv etvai Buvarov v (iKrjdevrj. 'O
2ai5 iraaas 8ev (f)€vyei dno rrjv
IloXiP.
To rjKovcra €k deTiKrjs nrjy^s.
(14) In A Cafe. EI2 KA^^EION (ka$eneion).
Which is the best Cafe here 1 Uolov ehai to KaXXiTtpov Ka(^nov
(^Ka(f)fvflov) ivravda',
Ta icaipfla Toii 26Ka)vos, Kal tovThe Cafes Solon and Kout-
M
l62 Dialogues.
soukos are the best. You
must go past the Chamber
and straight on down the
hill. They are in the Place
de la Concorde.
There is music in the square
on Sundays, Tuesdays, and
Thursdays.
Give me a cup of coffee.
Will you have it sweet or not,
sirl
I will take it k la Turque.
How much is it ?
Ten lepta, sir.
It is not the custom in Greece
to give tips to the cafe wait-
ers.
Waiter, bring me a sweet-
meat, a glass of water, and
the chess.
AVliat is that liqueur they Tt tvorov tivai (Kf'ivo to onolov
KovTcrovKov tivai ra KaXXirtpa.
IT/jfTTei va TTfpda-qTf Trjv Bovkfiv
KOI va KarafiriTf la-a top Karr]-
(fiopov. 'Eivai fls TTjv 7iXareIai»
TTJs * 'Ofiovoias.
Ilatfft fiovaiKr) (Is rrjv ifKaruav
TtjV KvpiaKr]V, rfjv Tpirriv Koi
Trjv Ufp.nrrjv.
Aos fjioi fva Ka(j)e.
T\vKvv rov 6eX(Tf, Kvpie, ^ o;(t
;
Tbu SfKco TovpKiKov. Jloaov ex* ' >
Ae/ca XeTTTti, Kvpie.
Aev (Ivai, (Tvvrjdtia els ttjv 'EXXaSa
va Bldcoai /irra^iai fls(^va(f)ikfv<i>-
aij Tovs inrjpfTas tov Ka(j)fiov.
IlniBi, (f>epi fiov (V yXvKi(Tp.a,
(V TTOTtjpiov v8aTos Ka\ to ^a-
TpiKlOV.
are drinking]
It is ' mastique.*
Tell the boot-black to come
here. Here, boot-black !
Here, cab ! Drive to the club.
Have you any English news-
papers ?
Yes, sir. Here are the ' Times
'
and * Daily News.'
Will you have a cigarette ?
No, thanks ; I prefer a cigar.
irivovai',
"Eivai paoTixa.
EiVe TOV \ovaTpov va t\6r], E,
XoCfxrpf
!
"Ap.a^a, Tka (dS>. Tpd^a els Trjv
"E^fTf ayyXiKas icfyrjfiepiSas',
MdXtora, Kvpie. 'iSou ol ' KaipoV
KOI TO.^ 'Hpfpfja-ia Nea.'
GtXere ev aiyapovj
*0;^i, tv)(api(rT(o' rrpoTip.S) tv
irovpov.
i
Wt'/A a Washerwoman. 163
Are you ready 1 Let us go. E'o-^e fzoifios ; *Aj vndyaixfv.
1 am tired. I shall go home. Eifxai Kovpaa^iivos. Qa imdyut
(IS TO aniTi,
(1 5)"WiTH A Washerwoman.
How soon can you let me have
my linen back ]
I cannot send the shirts before
Thursday, sir. The other
things you can have to-mor-
row.
Very good, but you must
promise them for Thursday
evening.
There is a list of my things.
7 shirts,
7 collars,
5 pair of socks,
1 2 pockethandkerchiefs,
2 pair of drawers,
3 undervests,
6 white ties.
You may put as much starch
as you like into the shirt-
fronts.
I forgot to ask how much you
charge.
My prices, sir, are rather high,
but the washing, sir, will be
thoroughly well done.
Very good. I trust to you,
ME HAYSTPAN.
Elf noaov xpovop Tjfinopfls va
fioii ini(TTp('^r]s TO. dairpoppovxd
nov;
Aev fjpiropS) pa (ras OTfiXw rh
VTroKdpi<ra npo rr^s Ile/LiTrT?;?,
Kvpit, Ta aXXa pov)(a oputs
Tjpnopflrf va ra fXTjre avpiov.
IIoXu KaXd, dWa rrptnei va vno-
o'X^^n^t OTt 6a ra <fiepr]S Tf]v
Hipnrrjv to iantpas.
I80V 6 KOToXoyos tS)v pov)(Civ pov.
7 i/jTOKapiaa (^xiTwvfs),
7 KoWdpoi (iTfpikaipia),
5 C^'h^ Ka\T<Ta»v,
1 2 pavbfjXta (Jiivopaicrpa),
2 (aa^paKa,
3 (paviXts,
6 aarrpoi Xaifio^fToi.
H/xTTopfIf va /SaXjjf oaijv KoWav
6e\(is tls ra TrtpiarijOia tS)V
xmoKapiauiv,
'E\r]crp6vr]aa va cpwrijcra) rroaa
6f\ti.s.
H Tipfj, Kvpu, fivai poiXXov pe-
ydXr], dXXa to nXvaip^p 6d
ydvTi Kadiis npfirfi,
UoXi) KaXd, 'Epmarfvopai tls
U 2
i54 Dialogues.
and remember, not later than
six on Thursday.
Certainly, sir, without fail.
eVe, Koi Kurra^e va to. «;(&)
o^t dpyoTtpa drro ras f$ rrjs
Mcj'Xiora, KvpUj x^onpls <j\Xo.
(16) In A Bookselleb's.
Where is the best bookseller
in the town ]
There are two good shops,
close together, in the Hue
Hermes.
Wliich do you recommend ]
"Wilberg has foreign books:
atAntoniades'.a little higher
up, you will find all the
Greek books you want.
I want to buy the 'Papesse
Jeanne,' by Roides, which I
am told is a very clever
novel.
Yes, it is the wittiest novel
in Modern Greek, but I
advise you to begin with a
comedy.
Buy the French and Greek of
some play of Sardou. Read
through a scene carefully in
both languages. Shut the
Greek and translate from
the French.
EI2 BIBAIOnOAEION.
Hov fivai 6 KaWiTtpos ^t^Xio-
TTcbXj/f rrjs noXews ',
'Yndp\ovai. 8va koXo /St^XtoTrw-
Xeia, KftVfi/a to (v nXrfa-Lov rov
aXKov (Is TTjv obov 'Eppov.
Ilinov (Tvpi(TTaTe;
'O BiXpnepy €)^€i ^€va ^i^Xia' tli
Tov 'AiTOCtaSow oKiyov dvcoTepa)
6a (vprjTf oka to. eWrjviKa ^if:i-
Xt'a, TSuf oirolav exerc dvdyKrjv.
QeX(o V dyopdcTco r^v ' UaTricnTav
'ladvvau' inrb Poi8ou, jj onoia
po\ Xtyovv fivai jroXu ev(pvei
pvdiaroprjpa.
MoXiora, flvai to tl^viaTtpov
pvdicTTOprjpa Ttjs vecoTepas eX-'
XrjviKTJs yXo)(T(Tr]s, dXXa acts
avp^ovXdco V dp\i(TT)Te pe
piav Kcopcobiap.
'AyopdcraTe to 'E\Xt]vik6i> kqI
TaXXiKop Keipfpov Ko)pcp^ias
Tipos TOV ^ap^ov. A.payva>(TaTe
pfTO. Trpoaoxfjs plap (TKTjprjv Kai
els Tcis Bvo •yXcoffcras, KXtitrare
TO 'EXXt)pik6p KfiptVOP Koi p€-
Ta(PpdaaT( ck tov ToXXikov.
J
In a Bookseller's. 165
"What a capital plan ! It will
make the study of Greek
quite amusing.
Yes, and it will teach you
the idioms of the language
in a very short time.
When you can read easily,
you ought to begin the his-
tory of Greece, by Papar-
rigopoulos, a really great
work, or the Histoiy of the
Bevolution, by Tricoupis.
But I wish to learn some-
thing about Greece at once.
What books are there %
There are two recent works
:
New Greece, by Lewis Ser-
geant, and ' La Grfece telle
qu'elle est,' by Moraitinis.
Both meritorious works.
I have heard of a book called
' The Greeks of To-day,' by
Tuckerraan, who was Ame-
rican Minister here.
It is a most amusing and
true sketch of the country
and people.
Where can I buy it t
It is out of print, but I will
write to London for a copy.
Thank you, and please send
Tt \a\nxpoi rponos ! Oa KufXTf
Tfjf aaovbrjp rtjs EWTjVLKijs
(UTfXas 8ia(TKt8aaTiKt]v.
MaXtora Koi Bia tov rporrov Tov-
Tov 6a diSaxS^re ra j'Stco/iara
T^f y\cL>a(Tt]s (VTos ^paxyrdrov
Xpovov.
'Orav tvvTjdrJTe v avayivai(TKr}T€
ilKoKios, TTpenei v dpx^Lcrrjre ttju
IcTTopiap rrjs 'EXXaSos vtto K.
IlanapprjyonovXov, irpaypariKcos
p-tya fpyov, Jj rfiv ^laroplav r^i
'EXXrjviKtjs 'ETTavacrTaaeas vno
2. TpiKoinr).
'AXX' iiTiQvixoi va pa.6a> kuti ti
TTfpi 'EXXuSos ndpavra, Uoia
/St^Xia virdpxovcrt J
'Yndpxovat 8vo via fpya' fj * Nea
'EXXaff VTTo AovSo/3iKOu 2ep^fvT
Koi. ^ * 'EXXqs Ota tivai vtto
MojpoIrtVj;. 'AncfiOTepad^ioXoya
(Tvyypdppxvra.
HKovara rrepi tivos fti^'Klov ' Ot
'EWrji/ft TT]! trrjjjiepov vno
TaKfppaPy 6 6no7os t]TO irpea^vs
rrjs ^Ap.(piKrjs iv 'Adfjvais.
Eivai Xi'aj/ tvxdpia-TOU Ka\ aXtjdfs
aKiaypdtpTjpa toO tottov Ka\ tov
'Kaov.
Tlov bvvapai va to dyopdaaJ
*H e/cSoertf (^r]VT\ri6j], aKka 6a
ypd'^at (Is TO Aovblvov va pov
OTfiXovv ev dvTiTxmov,
Ids fv\api(TT(Of Ka\ napaKaXu
1 65 Dialogues.
it to the Hotel des Etrangers
for me as soon as you re-
ceive it.
"Kfiv^art TO (IS TO ^«i'o5o;^«ioi»
t£>v Stvav, ajxa to Xd^tjrf,
(17) In A Stationee'8.
Have you writing paper 1
Certainly, sir ; what size do
you require 1
Show me what you have,
and I will choose.
I want some larger paper than
this, and some envelopes.
The only larger size we have
is foolscap.
Ah ! that will not do. I must
take this. Please wrap it
up in paper for me. Howmuch is it 1
Five lepta a sheet, and you
have 23 sheets. That will
make one franc.
I will pay you in copper.
Then it will be one franc
fifteen centimes ; copper is
depreciated.
Is there anything else I can
sell you this morning 1
Yes, I want some sealing
wax and wafers.
X am surprised at your using
wafers.
EIS XAPTOnQAEION.
E)(eTe x^P'"' '""'' ypayf/ifiaTOs J
Bf/3at<or, Kvpit, irolov crx,r]fiaTos
«\'fTf avayKqv;
AfT^e fiov o,Tt <X*'* *"' ^^ **"
Gf'Ao) (jityaKfiTfpovX**/""' ^^^
TOVTO Koi fiepiKovs (})aKfWovs.
To povov ptya\(iT(pov axw^t '''^
onoiov e^ofifv, ftvai ds TtTapTov,
Q. ! avrb 8(» Kapvft. Upinfi
va napdi tovto, 2e napaKoXS)
TvXi^e TO CIS X°P'"*''ndffoi/
UevTS 'X.cTTTa to (j>vXKov koi
iirripart eiKoiri Tpia (f>vWa' Kap-
va t6 0X.0V iv (ppdyKov.
0a aas Saxra ^oXkov.
Tore Kapvti (v <f>pdyKov Koi btKa-
ntirre XfTrra* 6 xoXko; tivai els
V7T0TipT]CriV.
Exfte avdyiajv SKXov tivos, to
OTTolou pa Svpapai va aas irco-
\i]a(i} TTjv TrpcoLav tovttjv;
MoKiara, 6fX<a oKiyov ^ovXoKfpi
Ka\ 0(TTl(g.
'EKirXfiTTopai aKovcov on /jera-
)((ipi^i(T6t OOTtfS.
1
Travelling in the Interior, 167
Why \ They are most useful
and convenient.
I fear you have not any
Englisli J pens.
No, sir; but you will find
these very good.
I will try a few. Wrap them
up with some blotting-paper.
1 cannot bear the sand you
use in this country.
Where shall I send the parcel
to]
Send it to the house of Mr.
Coupa.
L.iar'i. \ £(fa( ttoXw )(pi](Ti[j.ai kuI
KaTakXrjXoi.
nevas rov J.
"Oxi, Kvpif, dWa 6a tvptjrt rai-
Tas noXii KuXds.
©a duKifida-oi pepiKas. Ti;Xt|e
ray pe oXiyov CTTOviro^apTov.
Afi» 8vvap,ai va vnoi^ipa) tj]v
appov, TTjv onoinv peTa\(ipi-
C«rd( (Is rov Tonov roiirov.
Hoi) vd oreiXcD t6 dtpaJ
SrfTXf TO (Is T^v oiKiav rov k.
Kovna,
(18) Travelling in the
Inteeiok.
Can you tell me the name of
a good dragoman ] I wish
to ride across the Pelopon-
nese.
Yes. I know a most trust-
worthy man. I will send
him to you.
Do you know the Pelopon-
nese ]
Certainly, sir. Look at these
testimonials.
How much would it costi
We are a party of four.
I would provide horses, food,
HEPIHrHSIS EI2 TO
E2QTEPIK0N.
Avvaade vd p.01 (tnrjre to ovopa
KoKov Tivos hupprfveccsJ
GeXoj
va Ta^fibfvcrci ((jiiinTOS Kaff
oXfv TTjv II(\o7r6vvr]crov,
MdXtora' yvcopi^o) audpamov nva
Xiav d^LomaTov, Qa ads tov
OTeiXci).
Tvapi^fTf Ttjv Il(Xon6vvrj(rovI
Be^aiwp, Kvpte. Uaparqprja-aTe
TCI TnaTOTToiTjTiKd TavTa.
Hodov 6d K0(TTi<Tr] t6 Ta^dbiov
TovTOJ
'Eip(da Tecraapa aTopa.
*Ey(i) 6d ads TrpopTjdfvu) dXoya,
i68 Dialogues,
everything for 80 francs a
day, for all.
That seems a great deal, but
I will ask my friends.
We accept. "We shall start
from Katacolo and ride
across to Nauplia and
Epidaurus.
That is a beautiful journey.
You will see the plain of
Olympia, the temple of
Apollo Epikourios at Bassse,
Argos, Mycenae, and Tiryns.
You can retui-n from Nau-
plia to the Piraeus, or ride
to Epidaurus and take a
boat there.
"We must ride faster, or it
will be dark before we reach
Argos.
No, sir, the horses cannot
gallop.
They must. Drop the bridle.
Is anybody there ? Ostler !
Put our horses in the stable.
Is there a house here, where
we can pass the night %
Yes, sir, follow me.
We wish to sleep here, have
you a clean room ]
Yes, sir, here is a beautiful
room, but it has no beds.
rpo<f)r]v Koi ra navra hia oyBo-
TJvra (jipdyKa TrjDt'juepav 81 oXovs.
Mol (})nivoiiTai TToXXa, oAXa 6a
fpa)Tr]cra> rovt <}}l\ovs fiov.
Sfx^ofieda. G' dvax(opf]aa>fi(v
ano TO KaraKciXov Koi 6a vnd-
ycofifv f(f)i.mroi (Is UavjrXiov
Koi 'Eni^tavpov,
Eii/at fopaiov ra^dbiov. Qa 'brjTt
Tr/v 7re8idSa tijs 'OXvpniai, tov
vaov TOV EniKovptlov 'AttoX-
\(ovos, TO "hpyos, rag Mi'(ciji/ar
Koi TTjv Tipvv6a. HpnopetTf va
€Trav€\6T]T( dia NouttXiov us
Ileipaia fj va IndytTe ((pimroi,
fls EniSavpov Kai tKfl va nd-
pr]Te ulav XffiQov.
npfTTfi va nopfv6a)p(v ra^vro-
pov, aXXo>f 6a vvKTaxrrj nplv rj
(p6d(T0}pfv fls TO Apyos,
0;^i, Kvpie, Ta aXoya 8iv tjpnO'
povv va Kokirdacixri,
npend. A(f)r}(T€ top )(^a\iv6v,
Eivai Tts eSw ; imroKopf.
BaXf Ta a\oyd pas (Is tov
(TTaiiXov,
'Yndpxd Kappia olna ivTavOa,
onov va 8vi^6a>pev va St/X^m-
pev T^v vvKTaJ
MaXtora, Kvpit, aKoXovBrja-aTf pt.
'Emdvpovpfv va Koipr}6wp(v iv-
Tav6a, (X^'f Kadapov dcopdriov^
MaXiora, Kvpif, l8ov lapdlov Sw/xa-
TioVy alO^a 8(v e;(€t Kpt^^dna.
Travelling in the Interior. 169
Fortunately I have brought
one.
We are hungry. Have you
a chicken or Eome lamb \
"Would you like potatoes ?
The meat is not cooked
enough. Cook it a little
more.
Send our dragoman here.
Give me a light.
What have we to payl
100 francs, sir.
Show me the bill. I will
conect it.
Pay him 50 francs. It is
enough.
There are 50 francs. Take
them and let me go. Get
out of the way.
Drive on, coachman. Let
him talk.
Hold your tongue. I shall
not listen.
We ought all to have brought
our own beds, and as much
food as possible. The hotels
are abominable.
Order three horses, two for
gentlemen and one for a
lady, to be ready to-morrow
at seven o'clock, if it is
fine.
Would you not prefer a mu/e,
they are more sure-footed 1
Eiirv;^cos «yob ('f)(pa to ISikov
fJ-OV.
Ufivcbfifv. "Excels Kavev vovW ^
oXiyov apvij
©eXere TraraTts {y(o)fxriKa) J
To cf)ayr]T6v dev (ivcu upKfTa
^rjpifvov, "^tjat TO oXiyov ire-
piaaoTtpov.
^TflXf pas e8co TOP bifppTjvta,
Aoi fjiov €v (f)5)S.
Tt ()(optv va nXT]pa(Ta)p(» f
'Ekqtov (f>pdyKa, Kvpif.
Af'i^ov poi TOP KaToXoyov, Qa
TOP biop6(t}(Ta>.
liXrjpaxraTf TovTifVTrjKOVTa (jipdy
Ka, Eivai apK€Ta.
'I80V TTfvrjura <f>pdyKa. Hdpe to
Koi a({>(s pe va <f)uya). ^vyt
an ipnpos pov,
Tpn'jSa, dpa^a, "Acfirjai tov I'a
Xe'yi?.
2i<j>na' Siv aKovca.
"EnpeiTt va ^fpa)ptv o\oi to Kpt0-
d^Tid ^las Ka\ oatjv f/bwdptda
TTtpiaaoTepav Tpo4>rjv. Td ^(vo-
8o;^fIa fivai dnoTponaia,
IlapdyyfiXe va eTOipaadaai rpia
aXoya, 8vo Sia Kvpiovs /cat (V
bia Kvpiav, avpiov (Is raj (tttu,
fciv Tjvai iipa'ios Kaipos,
Aev TTpoTipart tva povXdpi;
(piav
Tjpiovov)' jSaStfet dcT(pdX(CTT(pov,
lyo Dialogues.
No, a mule is so uncomfort-
able to ride.
The saddle is not on properly.
Are the girths right t
Tighten the girtlis.
Loosen the girths.
That bit is too small. Change
it.
The reins are very thick.
Is this horse sure-footed
—
fast—quiet 1
He is a little lame.
No, sir, he always goes like
that. It does not matter.
Are the shoes all right \
Hold this horse while I help
the lady to mount.
Lead the horse with the bag-
Can we cross the river here ?
Yes, sir, it is only two feet
deep.
Send for the priest of the
village— the school-master
—the chief man—the De-
march.
Sir, good day, we wish to
pass the night here.
Welcome. Our accommoda-
tion is humble.
Will you send a man to
0;^t* TO fiovXdpi eipai ttoXii a*ca-
TaXXTjAoj/ 8i Imracriav.
'H (TfXn (to ei^iTnrtoj') bev tlvai
KaToKXfjXcos ^aXfievr], 'll fcbi/jj
T^s creXas eifot aaiaTciJ
2(^t^f TTjv ^dtvTjv (ttjv vyykav^.
'AnoKvae ttjv ^o>ui]v (^ecr^t|e Trjv
Ta yKtfua ravra eivai ttoXv fiiKpd.
AXXa^e ra.
Ta r]via flvai 7ro\v ;^oi>8pa.
To aXoyov tovto e;^ei a(r(f)aXes
/3uStcr/xa, fivai rax^v—rjav^ov^
XtoXaivft oXiyov.
*0;(t, Kvpie, TtavTOTf er^t iTTjyaUfi.
Aei* TTfipd^ei.
Ta TTeraXa tovtu eivai KoXdJ
KpaTT/iTe TOVTO TO aXoyov, eV a
e'-yo) ^or)dci) T^v KVpiav v dva^l],
Odrjyei to akoyov p.e Tas ano-
(TKfvds.
Avvdp.e0a va 8iaj3w/iei/ ivTaiida
Tov iTOTafiov;
MaXiara, Kvpie, e^fi p-ovov 8vo
noboyv ^ddos,
2TftXf dia TOV TTOintav rov ^apiov
—roi' bihacTKoXov—tov irpov-
\ovTa TOV Ar)pap)(ov.
KaXrjptpa, Kvpif, eiridvpovpev vcl
8i€X6a,p€U TTJV pvKTa ivTavda.
KaX«br wplaaTf. Ta npos dvd'
itavmv etcat nevi^pd.
SreiXare Tiva irapaKoXovfifv va
Shooting. 171
guide us % How far is it
to Nauplial
How many liours shall we
take to reach Mycenae on
horseback ]
The road is very steep and
narrow.
imi obrjyqa-rj. Uocrov fiuKpav
fwai ftos fls t6 NauTrXtov;
Ilocras copav da KafxoofjLfv va c{)dd-
trci)/xe«/ fls ras MvKrjvas {(piUTToi'
H 68of fivai TToXv KpT]fiva)8T}i koI
arfVTj,
(19) Shooting.
"Where is the wind 1
It is in the north. "We shall
have good sport.
It is in the south. The birds
will be up in the mountains.
It is no use going out.
Have you got my cartridges ?
Fetch the dogs from the boat.
Have you loaded the gun
—
the rifle ]
Bird on the left— on the
right.
Do you see where they went 1
They have gone over the
mountain.
I have hit him. I have
wounded him.
Look out. There's a pig in
those bushes.
Keep the dogs back. Don't
make a noise.
There he is.
Come along, he is wounded.
He cannot get away.
KYNHriON.
Atto ttov eivai 6 avtfiosj
Etwi ^opeios. 9a f^afiev koKop
Kvvriyiov.
Eicat voTioi. Ta rrovkia da ^vai
(Is TO ^ovvd. Eivai dva^tXis
va (^eXdcofifv.
"E^fis TO. (^vatKia fxov ;
4>epf TO (TKvKih diro rfjv Xffi^ov.
Eyepiaes to TOvcpfKt (to ottXov) j
Eu TTovXi npos TO dpUTTtpd—'
bf^id.
BXeVrrf ttov VTTTJyov J
'Yniiyov \nrfp to opos.
To (n(TV)(a. To fTrXrjyaaa.
Upoaf^f. 'iboii eicfl tv yovpovvi
fls TOVS ^aTOVS (Kfivovs.
KpdTT)(Te Ta onio'Oi aKvXid, M^
Kdprjs 66pvl3ov.
'EKfl fivai. No to !
'AKoXoidrja-ov, fnXrjyadr}. Aiv
q/iTTopet va yXvTaxTr],
172 DialoFttes.
Give me my l<uife.
Take care, sir.
All right. I am ready.
Well, how many woodcocks
did you get ?
It was too wanii for wood-
cocks. They are in the
mountains.
Is there any game in that
country 1
The wood is full of game.
Take the hag back to the
yacht and get dinner ready.
We shall be back in an hour.
Aoy jxov TO fia\aipi fiov.
Upoae^aTtj Kvpif.
TloXv Kn\a. Eifiai troifios.
Km TTOcrats ^vXoKorais iKTvnrj-
vaTf ;
'Hto rroXi) ^icrrr] 8ia ^vXeKcSraiy,
El fat fts Ta ^ovvd,
"E^fi Kvvrjyiov tis iKtlvuv tqv
TOTTOVJ
To Sdcros tivai ytfrnTQ Kvvijyi
(nXripes KVvrjylov).
TJrjyaivf rov craxKov (Is ro 6a\a-
prjyov Koi eroipaae to -yfC/xa.
&a (Travfkdapev fitra piav wpav.
LETTERS.
1 74 Letters,
LETTERS.(1) Invitation.
Mr. and Mrs. B. request the honour of Mr. A.'s company
at dinner on Saturday, the 28th inst,, at 6.30 p.m.
Answer.
Mr. A. has the honour to thank Mr. and Mrs. B. for their
kind invitation, and regrets exceedingly that he has promised
to go into the country to ghoot, from the 27th inst. to the 3rd
prox.
Invitation.
Dear Mrs, X.
I regret exceedingly that my being in mourning prevents
!ny receiving you as I should like, but it has been impossible
for us to give dinner-parties since my aunt died eighteen
months ago. If, however, you would like to come in for a
cup of tea in the evening, we shall be delighted to see you,
and to hear an account of your adventures at Megara.
Yours affectionately.
Answer.My dear Mrs. A.
Your invitation to come in after dinner is most hospitable,
and I need hardly say how much I should have enjoyed
accepting it, but unfortunately I caught a cold yesterday on
the Patesia road (which is certainly the most dusty, windy,
and disagreeable in Athens), and my doctor forbids me to
leave the house. My husband is too busy with his horrid
antiquities to give a thought to anything that has not been
buried at least 1000 years. I look forward to the pleasure
of meeting you at the great ball at the Palace on New Year's
Day, to which I am told everybody is invited.
Ever yours, with love,
Y. X.
Invitations. 175
EniSTOAAI.(1) nP02KAH212.
Kvptof Kol i\ Kvpla B. Xafi^dvovai rrjv Tifjifjv pa Trpoa-KaXfcroxTt
(Is ydfj-a Tov Kvpiov A. rw ^a^^avM, 283 tVra/ieVou firjvos, 6.30/*.//.
AHANTHIIS.
'O Kvptos A. Xafx^jvei t^v Tififjv va fvxapK^TTjajf rbv Kvpiop Koi
TTjv Kvpiav B. Sia rfjv tvytvrj iTp6(TKKr]rTlv t<ov, XvTretTat Se VTrfp^oKiKo.
SioTi vnefTxiGif va vndyi] els rfjv f^o^fjv Sta va Kwriyr^arj dno r^f
271JJ icTTajxevov /x«XP' ''^S 3»;s tow irpoae^ovs fJLrjvos,
nP02KAH2I2.
AyaTrrpy] /not Kvpta X.
Avnoipai ttoXv 8i6ti (vtKa iTfvQovs ipnohi^opun va aas 8ex0S> ios
fTTfBvpovv, aXX' ^TO aSvvarov va Sibmpev ytifiara drro tov Oavdrov
rrjs Bfias pov irpo SfKaoKTco prjv&v. Eav iv rovTois fvapfaTrjdrjTf va
(\6rjTf m iTirjTf TO Tf'iov pfff fjpatv to fcrnipas, 6a tixapicrrr]6a)p(v
va ads tSw/nei' /cat v aKovaapfv ttjv Sifjyrjaiv Ta)i» ets Meyapa
jr(pm(Tfi,oi>v aas.
"OXoJs npodvpos.
AnANTH2I2.
AyaTTijTTj poi Kvpia A,
'H 7rp6aK\r]ais aras oTTwy f\6a Trpbs xipds ptTa to Stlirvov eivai
\iav (}>iK6^tvos, koi Sei/ €)(<i} dvdyKi/v va f itto) Troaov fvj(dpi(rTOV 6d
pel TjTO va TTjv f^f^opTjv, aXX dTV)(ci)s (KpvoXoyrjcra x6fs fls ttjv oSok
Tci)v Uarrjcricov (JJtis tivai ^(fiaioas fj paXXov KoviopTutbrjs , npocTTjVfpos
Ka\ bva-dptaros (Is 'AOrivas) Koi 6 laTpos pov h(v pot f7rtTp(nei va
(^(k6a Tijs oiKias. O av^Dyos pov (ivai Xiav dnrjcrxoXTjpevos fls
Tas naXaioapxaioTrjrds tov, woTe vci pfj (TKcrrrrjTai irepl aWov tivos
pr} T(6appfVov Toi\dxia-Tov eVt lOOO (Trj. 'eXttI^<o va Xaj3a) t^v
€vxapi(TTr](nv va ads avvavTrjaa els tov peyav dvoKTopiKov xopbv ttjv
npaTTjv TOV veov erovs, els ov, po\ einov, ndvTes irpoaKoKovvrai,
"EipX fUTa iroXX^s dydinjs f/ (J)iXtj aas,
Y. X.
1/6 Letters.
(2) To TIIE DiEECTOB OF THE PoST OfFICK.
Sir,
I beg to inform you that I am now living in the house of
Mr. Coupa, near the palace, and request that you will have
all my letters sent there.
I am, sir, your obedient servant.
To THE Same.
Sir,
I beg to draw your attention to the following cases of
negligence on the part of the Post-office. On Thursday last
the mail came in at 1 1 a.m., but the postman did not bring
my letters until late in the afternoon. On Saturday the mail
came in at lo a.m., but I did not receive ray letters until
late at night. As the mail for Europe goes out on Thursday
and Saturday at 6 p.m., I was unable to answer the letters I
received, and iim forced to wait until next week. This is a
matter of the utmost importance, and I request that you
will enquire into it, and make every endeavour to have it
rectified. I am, etc.
To THE Same.
Sir,
I am leaving Athens on the 26th of this month, and
request that all letters for me may be re-directed to Poste
Restante, Trieste, until the 6th pros., and after that to
Hotel Continental, Paris. I am, etc.
(3) To A Greek Masteb.
Sir,
Wx. has recommended you to me as a teacher of
Modern Greek. I should like to know what your usual
charge is, and what time you have free. If you can come to
my hotel at 4 o'clock to-morrow afternoon, I shall be glad
of a personal interview. Yours faithfully.
To tJie Director of the Post-Office. 177
P (2) nPOS TON AIEYeVNTHN TON TAXYAPOMEION.
K Kvptc LitvQvvra,
Aafj^vo) T^i/ Tiixrjv pa yva>(TTOTroifj(r<o v^iiv on KaroiKO) rfSt] els rrjp
oiKiav Tov KVplov Kovrra, nXTjaiov tuv ovaKTOpav, koL eras napaKokci
va buiTa^rjTt va (rrfWuvrai cKfi 6\ai ai itnvTokai p.ov.
AtarcXd) /tera affiaa-fiov vfitrtpog Btpdnav,
ripOS TON AYTON.*A^l6Tlft( KvpK,
Aa/x^dcco TTiv Tip-ffv va eras TTapaKoKfato va (TriarrjCTTiTt t^v vfitrepav
irpo(ro)(fjv eVl tS>v e^rjs TrfpiTrraaecov d/icXctof tow raxvdpofifiov.
Tt]u 7rap(\6ov(ra» Uifiirnjv t6 Taxv8poix(iov €(f>6aafv ds rag fvSeKa
IT. p.., dXX' 6 ypap.p.aTOKopii<TTr]g bev fxoi f(f)(pe ras (irtaroXas tlp^
apya p,fTa p,«rqp3p'i.av, Th ^d^^arov to ra^vSpopdov fcfidaafv
fls ras 8«a Jr./*., dWa 8fv eXa^ov rds fnia'To\ds fiov et/xiy dpya rfjv
VVKxa. 'Endbi] rh Ta)(yhpopelov 8ia ttju 'EvpaTTTju dva-xapti ttjv
II(p.7rrrjv Ka\ to 2d^^aTov ds Tas f^ f^f^-t ^«'' rjdvvrjdrjv v diravrfjaa)
CIS ras eViOToXdf, ras onoias tXa^ov Ka\ dvayKd^opat v dvapevu> ttjv
irpoa(\T] i^bopdba. Tovto (ivai avTiKeip-tvov vy^icTTrjs cnrovdaioTTjTOs
Ka\ napaKoKco vpds va ((pfvvqarjTt icara/SdAXovres nda-av Trpocnrddfiav
irpbs 8i6p6a<Tiv, AtareXw k.t.X.
^ a > nP02 TON AYTON.Kvpcf AtfnaviTa,
UporWfpai V dvaj^apfjcra e^ 'Adrjvmv Tfjv tlKocTTTjv (kttjv tov ftTjvos
tovtov Ka\ napaKcikS) oXat al npos fie eniaroXaX va bievdvvavrai els
Tepyearrjv * Poste Restaute /i«xpt rrjs eKTtjs irpoaexpiis Koi KaT&iTiv
els t6 Hdtel Continental els Uapia-lovs. AtareXca (e.T.X.
(3) nPOS EAAHNA AIAA2KAA0N.Kvpie, ^ '
O K. (TVPeaTTjaev vfMS ms dibdtTKcAop ttjs veas eWrjviK^s
y\o>(r(rrjs. 'Enedvpovp pa pdOca noiap dpLOi^rjv Xap^dvere Ka\ noias
&pas exere f\ev6epas. 'Eav dvvrj&riTe va eXdrjre els to ^evo8oxe7ov
els Tas Teacrapas /x./t. t^s avpiop, 6d evxapi(TTt]6a vd Xd^a npoaaTrtic^v
Tiva (Tvvevrev^ip. , ,
i/xerepos.
178 Letters.
Answer.
Sir,
My terms are three francs an hour for Greek lessons, hut
if you were here for some time, I would naturally make a
reduction. I am employed at the Gymnasium (College) all
the morning, but could come to you either in the afternoon
or evening. I shall await your reply with impatience.
Yours obediently.
Sir,
I am going down to Phalerum to-morrow afternoon, so that
I shall be unable to take my lesson. If you are disengaged
in the evening, about 9 p.m., please come and see me.
Yours truly.
(4) To Engage Rooms.
Sir,
I shall arrive at your hotel by the steamboat from Marseilles
to the Piraeus next week. Be so good as to retain a sitting-
room and two bedrooms for me, and send a guide to meet the
steamer at the harbour.
Yours, etc.
(5) To A DOCTOB, DEMANDING InSTANT ATTENDANCE.
Sir,
Be so good as to come and see me at once, as I am in
great pain, and fear that it is the beginning of a severe
illness.
Yours faithfully.
To a Doctor. 179
ADANTHSIS.
*A^inTifie Kvpif,
'A/ioijSiji/ Xafi^dvco Tpia (f>pdyKa Tqv &pav iia (ladrjfiara rrjs iWrj-
viKrjs, aXX* (CIV 6a SiafidvrjTf tvravda eVt riva )(p6vov, da fXaTraxrw
<l)V(TiKa Tw Xd-yo) rfju Tiprjv. Eipai fvr](T)(oKripevos oKrjv ttju Trpcoiav fls
TO yvpvdcriov, aKKa dwap-ai va epxapai, npos vpas pera pearip^piav ^
TO tantpas, 'Avvnopoucos dvaptva Tfjv dnavrijaip <ras.
"ox (Of TTpoBvpos,
Kvpit,
0a KareXdo) (Is ^dikripov avpiov p(Ta p«Tr]p^ptav, Za-Te Ssv 6a
SvvT]6a> va Kapco to pddrjpd pov. 'Eav 8(V (XV^^ KooXvpd Ti to
iqiripas Kara ttjv evvdrTjv, (K6(t(, napaKaXS), vd pe 'i8t]t(.
YpfT(pos.
(4) nP02 EN0IKIA2IN AOMATIQN.
Kvpi(,
6a (f)6d(T(i) (Is t6 ^(yoBox(tov eras ^la tov (k Maatraklag ds
ridpata aTpoirXoiov Trjg irpoaexovs (^BopdSos. Ad^(Te Ttjv koKo-
(Tvvtjv va poi KpaTTioTjTe plav at6ov(Tav Ka\ 8vo KOiTcavas Ka\ irip'^aTf
(va oSrjyoi/f Kara t^v afpi^iv tqv aTponXoiov fls tov \ip(va.
i^iaT(\S> Ac.r.X.
(5) EHISTOAH nP02 lATPON, AI* H2 ZHTEITAI
KATEHEirOYSA Eni2KE*l2.
Kvpie,
Ad^(Te TT/v KaKo(Tvvr]v va (\6rjTt va p (ni(rK«j>6^Te apitras,
(TTdSrj vno(f)(pu> iroXi) Koi <f)o^ovfuu on tovto fivai dp^f) tro^apds
d(T6(V(ias.
'Yp(T(pOS,
N 3
i8o Letters.
(6) Requesting Letter of Introduction.
Sir,
I am about to make a journey to Corfu. As I know that
you are a native of that place, I venture to ask you to give
me a letter of introduction to your friends there. Before
leaving, I shall call to thank you for your extreme kindness
to me during my stay here.
Yours very sincerely.
(7) To THE Minister op the Interior.
Sir,
I have the honour to inform you that I propose to make
a tour through the interior of Greece, going from here to
Mycenae, and request that you will give me an assurance
as to whether there is any danger to be apprehended from
brigands. I was told in England by a friend, who is in the
Turkish service, that it was unsafe to visit the Acropolis
without a guard of soldiers. At first I did not venture to go
there, but, encouraged by the example of some fellow-travel-
lers, I sallied forth one day at i p.m., armed with a revolver,
a heavy geological hammer, and an umbrella. As no attack
was made upon me, I repeated the experiment, and, em-
boldened by success, now go there in the moonlight, unarmed
and unattended, to the consternation of my wife, who threatens
to come out from England and protect me from brigands.
Although, as you will perceive from the above account, I
am a man of great courage and no prejudices, my duty
towards my family would not allow me to start on my
journey to Mycense without an explicit assurance from you,
sir, that I shall incur no danger.
I have the honour to be, sir,
Your obedient servant.
Address
—
To the Minister of the Interioi', etc. etc.
To the Minister of the Interior. i8i
(6) Al' H2 ZHTEITAI EniSTOAH 2Y2TATIKH.
Kupte,
UpoTidffiai va Ta^(iB(V(r<o /i«XP* KtpKvpas, 'ETTftS^ Se yvapi^a
on Kardyfade tK tov tottov (Ktivov, ToiKfio) va ^rjrfjaa) iiap Vfxup
cTvcrraTtK^v €Tn<TTo\f]v npos tovs «« (f)tXovs aas. Uplp ^ avax<''>pW^
6(\a) aas (iTi(Tiif(f)6rj, tva aas fvxapi(TTf)(r(c Sia ttjv fityaXrjv irpbs f/xe
KcikoaCvrjv aas Kara ttjv ivraiiQa Siuiiovrjv fiov.
"OXas vnerepos,
(7) nP02 TON KYPION Em TON E2QTEPIKQN YnOYPrON.
Kvpif 'YTTovpye,
Aafi^dva Tr}v Tip.r]v va yvoDOTOirotrjcrci) vpLiv on irporidtfiai va
iTfpifXda) TO (aarepiKov t^s 'EXXdSos, 7n]yaiva>u fvTfv0ev fls MuKi/ray,
Koi TTapaKaXS) vd fie SiaQf^aioxrrjre nepl tov av imdpxr] kIvSwos tis
va avXXT}ff)da> dnb Xjja-Tds. ^tXos fi-ov tis (v 'AyyXi'a, StareXaJi/ ev
TovpKiKj} vnrjpfcria, fJ.61 tinev on t/to (ttikivSwov va emaKfcfid^ tis
Trjv 'AKpowoXtv avfv avvoBeias aTpanarrav. Kar' dp^as 8fv eToXfiav
va vndyo) eKcl, dXX' fv6appvv6f\s eV tov napabflyiunos a~vvo8oindpav
Tiva>v f^fjXdov fjnepav Tiva Trtpl rrjv Trpayrrjv p., p., (pepaiv noXvKpoTov,
ptydXrjv yfcaXoyiKriv a({>vpav, Ka\ p.iav ofinpeXav. Eirfitfj ov8fpia
7rpo(T/3oX^ eyivfTo kot (fiov, ircaveXa^ov to neipapa kii\ ivBappvvQiis
tK TTis (TTirvxtas Trrjyalvat rd>pa €/c«i, OTav rjvai atXrjvi], aoTrXos Kal
livfv (TvvoSfias irpos (po^ov ttjs trufuyou /xou, fJTis dndXfl va eXdrj
OTTO TT]v 'AyyXt'ai' orray p.e -rrporpvXd^n dno tovs XrjaTas.
MoXoi/ort, ws 6eX(Te naparrjprja'fc, €K ttjs avu tirjyTjafcas, eip.ai
dvBpamos p.eydXr)s yevvaioTrjTOS koi avfv irpoXfiylrewv, to wpos ttjv
oiKoyfi/fidv p.Qv KadrJKOv 8(v 6d p.01 iirtTptne va e7ri;^fipijo-a) ttjv irtpirj-
yrjaiv fiOv fls MvK^vas avtv prjTfjs 8ia3f^aiu>a€(t>s fK iMfpovs vpa>v.
Kvpu VTTovpye, on 8fv da Starpe^o) Kivbvvov Tivd.
'Enl TovTOis v7io(n}p,€iolfjuu dae^daTUS,
(^Aiddwais) Ev7T(i6eaTaTos.
T^ Kvpico (TTi Twv 'EaaTtpiKuv 'Ynovpyw or Ilpos to trrl tuv
'Eo'ojTfpiKwv 'Ynovpytlov,
1 82 Letters.
(8) Eeply.
Ministry of the Interior, Athens,
April I, 1879.Sir,
In reply to your communication to the Minister of the In-
terior, I am ordered to inform you that no case of brigandage
has occurred within the frontiers of the Greek kingdomduring the last eight years, and that you can travel anywhere
you please in Greece without the slightest danger. Anyreports you may have heard to the contrary are inspired by
ignorance, prejudice, or malevolence, and may be entirely
disregarded. I may further remark that Turkish officials
are not usually the best authorities on Greek affairs, and
that their views are too often discoloured- by interest or
by prejudice.
The earnest desire of the Greek Government is that
Englishmen should travel in Greece, and learn to know the
country and the people, and thus that knowledge of the
truth may expose the absurdity of these stories.
I am, sir, your obedient servant.
(9) Information about Athens.
Dear Mr.,
Should you like to become a member of the Club during
your stay at Athens ? Strangers are admitted for a month
without subscription, and I shall be most happy to put down
your name, if you desire it. You will find there the ' Times *
and ' Daily News,' with all the foreign and Greek newspapers
and reviews, among others the ' Nineteenth Century.' There
are billiard and card-rooms, but no restaurant. If you will
call there at 5 p.m. this afternoon, and ask for me, I will
introduce you to the principal members and show you the
rooms.
Yours very truly.
Reply from Mmister of hiterior. 183
(8) AHANTHSIS.
'Ev 'A^^vatf Tjf I17 *AirpiKlov l879.
TO Em TON E20TEPIKQN YnOYPrEION,
Kvpie,
Ely dndvTrjaiv r^ vfttrepas alrficfois irpos tov vnovpyov tcov
iaoDTepiKcov, t^ct eWoXiji/ va 7rXj/po(^opjj(rQ) v/zSy on 8e»» lirdpxf^
napdbiiyp.a XjjaTflas (vtos tS)v avvopav tov iWrjviKOV ^acriXeiov
irpb tS)v Tf\evTalci)v Skto) irmv Ka\ on biivaade va Ta^eibfvarjTe
OTTOvbrjnoTe elap€<TTTJ(rd€ eV EXXdSi, avcv tov €Xa;^toTOU Kivbvvov.
iJacra (p'ijfiTj, ttju onoiav fx^'''^ icras aKovati wept tov fvavriov, etvat
(fiTTVfvais dyvoias, TrpoXrjyj/'eas, rj KaKo^ov\ias, Koi Swarai TiS fVTf\a>s
m TrjV irepi(f)povf](rr], Avvapai npoaeTi va TrapaTrjpTjaca on v7raXX?;Xoi
ToypKoi 8(v (ivai crvvrjSai ol fjioXKov d^ioTTitXTOi TTpoKeifievov wepl tS)v
fXXr]viKa)v irpaypaTcov ai 8e yvStpai Ta>v 7n]yd^oviTi.v €< avfifpepovros
f] TrpoKrjyjrfais.
'H ^(orjporepa (niBvpia t^s eXXrjviKrjs Kv^epvrja-fOis elvai t6 vh
Ta^fiSfvaxTiv AyyXoi tv EXXaSt, Ka\ va (movSd^aai ttjv xo>pav koi
TOV \a6Vf oTTCos f] yvSxns t^s dXrjdeias fKBfcrr] to y(\6tov tS>v fivBaiv
TOVTOiV.
AtareXw (lerd njs irpoatjKovarjs ijroX^^ews npoOvfios.
(9) HAHPO^OPIAI HEPI AGHNQN.
*AyantjTe /loi Kvpie ,
'ETTiOvufiTe vd yelvrfre pfXos Trjs Aeax*]! Kara t^v iv 'Adfjvais
SiaiJLOvrjv aas', Ot ^evoi tivai 8tKTol iv aiiTfj em eva fii]va avev
avvSpofirji' 6d rjfxai 8e Xtar (VTVxr]S vd Koraypdv^o) to ovofid eras,
dv (iapear^adf. 0a fvprjre tKtl tovs ' Kaipoiis,' rd ''Ufiepfjo-ia
Nea, Ka\ o\as rds ^eas Ka\ iWrjviKas ecprjutpitas koi nepiodiKa, iv
ois KCLi TTjv ' AfKdTTjv 'EvvdTr]v 'EKaT0VTaeTT]pl8a.' 'Yirdpxovai acf)ai-
piaTTjpia Ka\ tcopdna xapTonaiyviov, dXX' ovx} Ka\ eanaropiov^ 'Eay
BiXrjre vd nfpdarjre air fVet ds rds nevTe p. p. t^s a-rjpfpov Ka\ pf
^T]Trjar]Tf, 6d Trapovaidaoi vp^s fls to Kvpiarepa peXr] Ka\ 6d ads
tel^o) TO bwpdria.
OXoH vpirepos.
1 84 Letters.
Dear Mr. R,
I have only just received your kind note, owing probably
to some mistake on the part of the messenger, and hasten to
answer it with all speed. The proposal you make I shall
accept most gladly, and will call at the Club, as you suggest,
at 5 p.m.
Yours sincerely.
Dear Mr. G ,
You told me the otlier day that you would like to come
and see us play lawn-tennis at Phalerum. If it is fine to-
morrow, I am going down by the 2.30 p.m. train, and expect
to meet the oflBcers of the English ship at the Piraeus there.
If you will meet me at the corner of the Rue Hermes and
the Place de la Constitution at 2.10 p.m. we can go in a
carriage or by omnibus to the station. It is only ten
minutes by rail to Phalerum, so that we can have a game
and take the 4 p.m. train back to Athens. I believe I amright in thinking that trains run every half-hour in the
afternoon both from Athens and the Piraeus. Please send an
answer by the bearer.
Yours very truly.
Dear Sir,
I should have been delighted to come to Phalerum with
you, but to-morrow afternoon am obliged to attend the funeral
of an old friend, who died this morning. It would be inter-
esting for you to come too, and I can promise you that it
will not be so lugubrious a ceremony as in England. The
procession will pass the Chamber of Deputies at 2.15 p.m.,
where I hope you will join me. We can go to Phalerum
some other day, but you must not count upon me as a player,
your English games are too violent and dangerous.
Yours very truly,
G
Miscellaneous. 185
'KyaTTryrt ftoi Kvpif P.
MoXtf jrpo fUKpov eXajSov ttjv fvfjifVTJ (t:i<tt6Kj)V eras, (vfKa \a6ovs
Tivhi itiOaPov Tov KOfuoTOVf Koi (TTTfida) V aTravrtjaa). Ttji/ Trporacriv,
rfjv oirolav poi Acd/xwre, a7ro8<xo/«zi Xiav aapfvcui Koi r^Xco eX^ei fis
TTiv Afo-xf]" S>S /*°* ypa(})tT€ fif ras TTfvre fitra fif(TT)p^piav.
2as daird^opai, 6 (})[\os aas.
' *AyaTrr)Tf pot Kvpie T.
Mot (tiTfTe irpo tivcov fjpepav on elxaplaras 6a Tk6i]Tf va ibrjTf
fjpas nai^ovras lawn-tennis els ^akrjpov. 'Eav ^uai kuXos Kaipos
avpiov TTpoTidepai va KareXdoi 8ia t^s ApM^ocTTOixias tS)v 8vo koi
Tjpiafias p. p., (KiriCtov va (rvvavrrja-a touj d^iapariKoiis tov ayy\iKov
nXoiov TOV aradpevovTOs els Uttpaid, 'Eav deXrirt va pe avvavrrjarjTe
tis Tijv ycovlav Trjs obov 'Eppov Koi nXardas ^vvrdypaTos tts Tas ovo p.
p. bwdptda va inrdyccpev e(f)' dpd^rjs rj 8ia tov Xetoc^opeiov fis tov
(TTadpov. MexP'' *aXijpou 8ia tov triSrjpobpopov (ivai povov 8eKa
XfTrrd, Stare 8vvdp(6a va Ttal^aipev mi va enavfXdapev fls Adfjvas
8ia TTJs &pa^o<TTOixlas t5)v Tfacrdpav p. p. No/xi'^o) on 8ev cr(f}dK\(0
(f)pova>v OTt al dpa^oaroixiai ds>ax<opovai icad rjpia-ftav Sipav pera
pfo-Tjp^piav Koi «| 'A6t]vS)v /cat ck Hfipaiios. 'AiroarfiXaTf poi,
napaKokS), Bid tov K0u.iarT0v dndvTrjcriv, „^^ , ,•^ ' '^ ' OAojj vptTfpos,
'Ayanrjri Kvpte,
Evxapi<TTa>s rj6f\ov ptra^rj fls ^dXrjpov ptff vpav, aXX' avpiov
ptrd p.((rT]p8piav fipai vnoxpfooptvos v aKoXovdfjaa t^v Ktjdfiav
iraXaiov <{>iKov diTo6av6vTos arpxtpov T^f rrpoatav, "H^eXei' (ladai
fvhia(f)epov Ka\ Bid ads fniayjs fdv eXdrjre Ka\ tras xmoa-xopai OTi dev
fivai Tocrov nevdipos TeXtrrj as iv 'AyyXia, 'H Krjbfia dtXei BieXdet
irpo TOV BovXfVTrjplov els rds bvo koi tv TtrapTOv p.p., onov cX;rt^tD
6d pe avvavrfjariTe. 'Hpnopovpev vd KOTa^apev els ^dXrjpov uXXrjv
Tivd fjpepaVj akXd 8ev irpenei vd pe decop^Te i>s iraiKTTjv' to dyyXiKC
rraiyvidid aas eivai noXv /3tata koi Kivdvvudr].
"OXas vpeTtpos, „
flTT] T(x>V
paftOVT)
^vyevva.
,rfj rov
-TICTTOV.
:' iopui.
PAET V.
ALPHABETICAL INDEX.
W
PAGE
Vames of . . . 271re 274ts of Human . . 275Public, etc. . . 266
274^atural Features . 276;les of . . . . 270enses, etc. . . 273
372263272268
rms . . . 377ays ... 258ling . . . 261
.... 267. Relations
.
275.... 258
PAGBNatural Features .... 376Newspaper, Words to Facili-
tate reading 260Painting 274Plants 272Political Terms 260Professions .265Qualities, Senses .... 273Relations, Ages of Man . . 275Sculpture 273Senses, Faculties, etc. . . 273Shooting 270Time ........ 259Trades 265Travelling 261Trees 272Weather 25QWeek, Days of 258
few exceptions, the English words in each subject areuilly, in order to facilitate reference.
Ic-
X.
VOCABULAEY.
The Days of the Week, At ^/x/pat r^f i^SofxaSos.
Sunday, 17 KvpioKfj.
Monday, ^ AtvTfpa.
Tuesday, 17 Tpirrf.
AVednesday, ^ TfTdpTtj.
Thursday, ij Utp-rvn}.
Friday, 17 napacKevf).
Saturday, to la^^arov.
The Months, Of prjvts.
January, 6 *lavovapios.
February, 6 ^(^povapios,
March, 6 Mapnos.
April, 6 'ATTpt'Xtof.
May, 6 Maioj.
June, 6 'lovwoj.
July, 6 'lovXios.
August, 6 Avyovaros.
September, 6 ^enTtp^pio^
October, 6 'OKTd)^pios.
November, 6 Nof/x/Spior.
December, 6 Ae/ce/x^pios.
^Ae Seasons, At Spat rov trovs.
Spring, ^ *Ai'oi^ts' (to "Eap).
Summer, to KaXo/catpt, Oepos.
Holidays,
New Year's day, ^ TrpwTj; toO
€T0V9, f] TtpOiTO-^pOVla TO »'«'oi'
?TOS.
Twelfth Night, ra Qeoipdveia.
Carnival, atd7rd(cpe<o (aTTo, Kpfai).
IjCnt, ^ vrjOTfia, fj aapaKocrTrj,
Good Friday, ^ MeydXr} llafia-
(TKfVT].
Easter, rb Ucia-xa, fj Aapirpd.
\\ hitsuntide, f] nevTrjKoarf],
Midsummer's Day, t6 depivbv
Autumn, TO ^divonapov. .
Winter, 6 Xeipwy.
At ioprai.
fjkioTpoTTiov, or ^ ioprii " ToC
Ayiov ladvvov.
Michaelmas Day, fj io .prfj tSiv
Ta^iapxo}v.
Christmas Eve, ^ ""c papovi)
Toov "KpKrTovyfvvcov.
Christmas, ra Xpia-n ' ^vyivva.
St. John's Day, 17 iop- ^rrj roi.
'Ay. '\<i>dvvov Toil Bctj -tkttou.
Birthday, tu ytvfffKia.
Annivex'sary, fi fniT(i'^<^ ^s iopTt}.
Vocabulary. 259
Time, 'O
A. year, t6 'tos.
A century, 17 iKaTovrafTrjpU,
6 alcov.
This year, e(/)eVof.
Last year, ntpvai, rb napeXdov
(TOS,
Next year, to fpxofifvov (tos,
TOV xP^^ov.
A month, 6 firjv. .
A fortnight, t6 btKantvOf]-
ptpov.
In a fortnight, pfTO. SeKanfvre
rjfiepas.
A fortnight ago, npo beKanivTe
fjpfpwu.
A week, f) e^So/Llas {i^8op,d8a).
Last week, t^v napeXBova-ap
(^8opd8a.
Next week, t^v npoa-fXTJ e/35o-
/xdda.
Yesterday, ;^(9f?.
The day before yesterday,
npoxBis,
The Weather
Weather, 6 Kaipos.
Cold, ri y^vxpa, to Kpvo, to ^v-
Xos.
Heat, f) C^CTTt], 6 Kaxxrav.
Frost, r) irayoivin, 6 irayiTos,
iDamp, 17 vypaaria.
Rain, rainbow, fj ^poxrj, to
ovpdviov To^ov(J]
"ipis).
Snow, TO x"'*'*} V X""''*
Dust, T] CTKnVT], 6 KOVlOpTOS,
Fog, f} 6p,ixXr]f T) Karaxvid.
Ice, o irdyos.
Xpovos,
To-day, this day week, o-ij/xf-
pov, afjptpov oKTO).
To-morrow, avpiov.
The day after to-morrow,peOavptov.
Morning, 17 npata.
Afternoon, t6 aTropeo-ripepo, t6
anoytvpxt (^p.fTa pfarjp^piup^.
Evening, f/ iairipa,
Day, 17 ij/xepo.
Night, 17 vv^.
Sunrise, f) dvarokri TOV fjKlov.
Sunset, t] 8vais tov ijXi'ov.
Midday, Noon, t6 fi€(n]pepi, f)
fi((rr]p^pia.
Midnight, Ta (xea-dwKTa.
Tlie hour, fj apa.
Half an hour, fjptaeia Stpa.
A quarter of an hour, ev
TerapTov (ttjs wpaj),
A minute, iv XenTov.
A second, Iv SevTepoXenrov,
'O Kaipos.
Storm, 17 TpiKviiiaK
Hail, ^ x°-^^C'^-
Thunder, f] ^pomf}.
Lightning, ^ dirrpaiiri.
Wind, 6 avfpos.
East wind, 6 avaToXiKos ave-
pos.
South wind, 6 votcos avtpos.
West wind, 6 Bvtikos avepos.
North wind, 6 ^optios avepos.
Sun, sunshine, 6 17X105,^ Xdpy^ris
TOV fjXiov.
' An interesting word. Originally ' the third wave,' supposed to bethe biggest (cf. Latin, fluctus decumanus). Used metaphorically, Tpi-icvpia KaKwv, Aesch.
8 2
160 Modern Greek.
Moon, moonlight, r] <Tt\r\vr\, to
fpeyyapi, to (f)5)t ttjs (TfXrjvrjs.
Full moon, rj TravaeXrjvos.
New moon, f] vea crf\rji/r].
Star, TO a(TTpov, 6 dcTTrjp,
Sky (clear), S oiipavhs (Kadapos).
Cloud (cloudy, cloudless), t6
v((f)os ((TVVP€(f}a>8r]s, dve(f)f\os^.
Sea (rough, smooth), 17 daXaaa-a
(jpiKVfiioi>8r]s, yoKrjvuiia).
Phrases to facilitate reading
iTpoi iVKokwcriv T^s avayvaaidis
Advance, to, Trpoxoopco.
Advertisement, tj dyytXla.
Agency (Havas, Reuter), to
UpaKTopelov {Xa^ds, 'PfouTfp).
Ambassador has been ap-
pointed, 6 npea-^vs biapla-dr].
Archbishop has resigned, 6
dpxifTTiaKOTTos iraprjTTjdrj.
Army (of occupation), 6 arpa-
Tos {ttjs KaTO)(fls),
Arrange, to, Stev^eToj.
Article, leading, to Kvpiov ap-
6pov.
Attach^, 6 uKoKovBos.
Bill was voted, to vofioaxe^iov
i\j/r](f)iadi].
Bishop was insulted, 6 tm-
aKOTTos v^piadrf.
Boundary, to avvopov.
Budget, 6 TTpOVTTo'koyKTpOS.
Chamber of Deputies, 17 BovKr).
Circular note, 17 iyKVKkios bia-
Koivatais.
Commission, the commis-sioner, rj iniTponr], 6 eiri-
TpOTTOS.
Concession, fj Trapaxi>prj(ns.
Conference, 17 vvvBidaKfyJMi.
Conservative party, r6 (rvvT-q-
prjTiKov KopLfxa.
Constitution, to a-vvrayfia.
Greek News]pa2)ers, *pao-fif
Twp EXkrjviKav 'E(f)t]pfpi8(0V,
Consul, o irpo^evos.
Correspondent, 6 dirranoKpiTTis.
Debate was adjourned, ij a-vCr)-
TTjaiv dv(^\i]6rj.
Embassy, ^ npfa-^fia.
Empire, rj avroKpaTopla,
Evacuation, ^ eWi/oxrtf.
Excitement, 6 ipedia-pos.
Frontier, to a-ivopov.
Government, fj Kv^fpvrja-is, to
xmovpydov.
House of deputies was dis-
solved, ^ jSovXi) 8t fXvdi].
Interview, rj awevTcv^is.
Judge, 6 diKaaTTjs.
King, constitutional, 6 jSao-i-
\evs, 6 avvTaypLariKos.
Leader of the Opposition, 6
dpxriyoi ttjs dvTindXiTcucrfws.
Liberal party, to ^Ck{k(v6epov
Koppia.
Majority, fj nKeiovo^t]<pia.
Mayor, 6 8r)papxos.
Meeting, t6 avWaXrjTfjpiov.
Minister of Foreign Affairs,
6 'Ynovpyoi t&v E^ooTfpiK&v,
Minister of Home Affairs, 6
'Yirovpyos tSdu ^Ea-<i)TepiKa)v.
Ministerof Public Instruction,
6 Yrrovpyos tjjs Ar]po(Tiai
'EKTTMdeiKTfWS.
Vocabulary. 261
Minister of Religion, 6 'Yirovp-
ybs tSuv ^ EKK\T]cria(TTiK(ov.
Minister of Justice, 6 'YTroup-
•yos Trjs AiKaioavvrjs.
Minister of War, 6 'Yirovpybs
Tuv SrpaTtojTtKWj'.
Minister of Navy, 6 'Ynovpybs
tS)v NaiTtKwi'.
Minority, 17 fido-^p^rjipia.
Monarchy, limited, fj Trepiapia--
fievT] p,ovap)(i.a.
Newspaper, press, fj e^r^pLtpis,
6 Tviros.
Standard, ^ 2r]fxala.
Daily News, ra 'Hfifpfjo-in Ne'a.
Morning Post, 6 ^Ew6w6s Ta^v-
8p6fios.
Times, ol Kaipol.
Daily Telegraph, 6 'H/ifp^crtos
Tr]X(ypa<pos.
Opposition, ^ duTino\'LT€V(ris.
Orator, 6 pfjTap,
Organisation, 6 opyavia-fios.
Peace, fj upT]vri,
People, 6 Xaof.
Population, 6 ttXjj^uo-juoj,
Powers, Great, at bwdiins, al
p.fya\ai,
Piefet, 6 (Ttapxos.
Prime Minister and President
of the Council, 6 UptaBv-
TTOvpyos Koi npofSpos TOV
'YrrovpyiKov 2u/xj3oi;Xi'ou.
Prince, princess, 6 rjytpau, ^
fjyefiovis.
Progress, 17 rrpooSos.
Provisional scheme, t6 irpoa-'
Published daily, is, f/cSi'Sfrai
Kadrjfjifpivcos (Kaff fKd(TT)]vj,
Queen, 17 ^aaiXia-a-a.
Question, Eastern, to (fjrrjpa,
TO dvaroXiKop.
Radical party, r6 'Pi^oa-naa-Ti-
Kov Koppa,
Republic, 17 AijpoKpaTia.
Republican press, 6 Ar^poKpa-
TIKOS Tvnos.
Resigned, has, Traprjrfjffr).
Retreat, f] vTro^aprja-is.
Revolution, fj eTravda-Taaitt
Riot, fj ox^ayayia.
Rumour, f] (}>f]pr].
Secretary, private, 6 Tpappa-
Tfvs, 6 l8iaiT(pos.
Special correspondent, 6 et8i*c6s
dvranoKpiTfjS.
State, TO KpaTof.
Stated, it is, Xfyfrai.
Successor (to throne), 6 8id-
?!oxoi.
Treaty, 17 a-wdfjKTj.
Vice-president, 6 avTinpofSpoi.
Viceroy, 6 avriBaariXfis.
"Want of confidence, ^ eXXaylfis
ipniCTToavvijs.
War, 6 TTokepos.
Archbishop of Canterbury, 6
'ApxifTriaKonos TrjS Kuvra-
^piyias.
Marquis of Salisbury, 6 Map-
Kiwv 2uKia^ovpfjt.
Travelling, Th Ta^tlbiov,
Arrival, ^ a^i^if. I Baggage, ^ dno(TK(v^.
Bag, 6 auKKos,\Berth, 17 ^t'o-w (place).
262 Modern Gi-eek.
Blacksmith, 6 aidrjpovpyos.
Box, TO Kl^dnTlOV,
Bridge, f) yf(j)vpa.
Bridle, 6 ;caXn/dr,
Cabin, 6 6d\ap.iaKos.
Change, to, horses, aXXa'fw
iTrnovs.
Clothes, TO fvBviiara.
Cross, to, diepxofJiai.
Custom, T) (TvvT)6eia.
Custom-house, to Tt'kcovflov.
Custom-house-officer, 6 reXavo-
Dangerous, firiKlvbwos.
Deep, ^a6vs.
Departure, ^ dvax^prja-is.
Doctor, 6 larpos.
Dragoman, 6 biepurjvds.
Duty, 6 (f)6pos.
Foot (on), TTf^as.
Gallop, to, KoXmi^oi.
Girth, 17 vyyXa, t] (a>vr] toC
f(f)imriov.
Guide, 6 oBrjyos.
Hatbox, f] niKod^KT], f) Kairne-
Xitpo.
Head of the horse, ro Ke(fid\i
Tov o^dyov.
Hold (Imji.), Kparrjaov.
Hole, f] onfj, r] rpvTva.
Horse, TO aXoyov, 6 OTTroc.
Horseback (on), e(^i7r7ros.
Hotel, TO ^(vo8ox('iov.
How deep, nSaov ^advs.
How far, nocrov paxpdv.
How long will it last, noaop
6a tiapKearj,
Key, fj k\€is, to xXetSi.
Land, by land, 17 ^rjpd, dia irjpai.
Lengthen (Imp.), fidxpyve.
Let go, n^ff.
Lock, lock (Imp.), ro K\f'i6pov,
t] KKfidapid, (cXftSoxTf.
Lodging, TO KaToKvpa.
Loosen (Imp.), Xva-e, ^eacfiL^e.
Luggiige, ^ dnoaKevfjj to irpdy-
paTa.
Mare, 17 <})opd8a, fj 'nnos.
Mayor, 6 drjpapxos.
Mud, 17 Xdanr).
Mule, TO povKdpi, fj fiplovos.
Ostler, 6 'nrnoKopoi,
Passage, passable, f] hiobos,
bia^oTos.
Path, ro povoiraTi, fj aTpmros.
Pocket-book,To a-rjpeiapaTapiov.
Porter, 6 Bvpmpos.
Priest, d ifpfvi.
Prohibited, diirjynpevpivov.
Road, 6 bpdpos, fj 6b6s.
Rocky, ^paxdibrjs.
Rope, rd (rx"ivlov, to anapTov.
Saddle (Imp.), aapdpoaov {inl-
aa^ovf.
Sea (by sea), ddXaacra (Sta da-
Xao-ffj;y).
Shoe (horse), rd tt/toXov.
Shore, rd jrapoKiov.
Shorten, (rvvrtpvco.
Stay (to make a), araBpdoy,
Starpi.Sa),
Steep, KprjpvaiSTjs, dvo)(f)€pf]s.
Stirrup, 17 (T/cdXa, 6 dva/3oXeis,
Strap, rd Xcopiop.
Stream, d pva^.
String, d andyos.
Summit, f] Kopvcpfj.
Tighten (Imp.), rrfjly^e.
Trot, to, TpiTTobi^w.
Walk, d nepiTTaTOs.
Way (shortest), bpopos, 6 ^pa-
XVTOTOS.
Vocabulary^ 263
Food, 'H
Almonds, to. afivyhaka.
Apple, unripe, iir\Kov, ao3pov.
Apricots, ripe, ra ^epvKOKKa,
iopifia.
Artichokes, gi'een, at dyyivapet,
)(\a>pai.
Asparagus, ra a-Trapdyyia, 01
dcTTidpayoi,
Bacon, fried, t6 x^^poH-^Ph "?"
yaviapievo.
Bake, to, "^tjvo.
Beans, French, to kovkio, to
(})a(Tov\ia x^apd.
Beans, Haricot, ra (f)a<rovXta,
Beef, TO 0(o8iv6v.
Beef, boiled,TO ^aSivop ^paarov.
Beef, roast, t6 ^abivov yl^ijrov.
Beer, bottled, fj finipa, 6 (iOoi
(Is (f)id\as.
Biscuit, TO Tra^ifJidBi, to biirvpov.
Boil, to, ^pdCo.
Bottle, fj cf)idXr], TO ^ovKoXiop,
Brandy, to olvonvevfia (^fiTrpdvTi).
Bread, toast, t6 ^//•co/Lit, Ka\//aXt-
acTTo.
Butter, TO ^ovTvpov.
Cabbage, t6 Xdxavov,
Cake, New Year's Cake, 17
nrjTa, ^aaiXoirrjTa.
Caper, 17 #c(i7r77aptr.
Cauliflower, to Kowovnidi, f}
dvBoKpdfx^T].
Celery, t6 atXtvov.
Cream Cheese, 17 nv(i6pa.
Cheese, to rvpi, 6 Tvpos.
Cherry, to Kfpda-i.
Chestnuts, roasted, to KdoTava,
\l/r]fjLfva,
Chicken, t6 novKi, kotottovXo,
Tpocf)^.
Chocolate, ^ TaoKoXdra,
Claret, red Wine, to k6kkivo
Kpacrl.
Coffee, Turkish, 6 Ka(pfs, Tovp-
KIKOS.
Cover, TO aKfrraapxi.
Cream, to KdipaKi,
Crumb, ij ^i-x^} "^^ ^ixovKov.
Crust, 17 Kpovara, 6 (pAoiof.
Cucumber, to dyyoipi.
Cup, TO (piXT^dvi, TO KVTTfWov.
Currant, 17 Kopivdiaicrj <jTa(pls.
Cutlet, 17 KOToXfTTa.
Date, 6 Kovpfids, (f)oivi.^.
Dessert, to emdopniov.
Dine, to, yevixaTiCo).
Dinner, to ytvfia.
Dish, 17 TTiarfXa, napo^is.
Duck, 17 Trdnia.
Egg, TO aov, avyou.
Egg, boiled, t6 adv, alyov,
^paCTTOV.
Egg, poached, to mSv, avyov,
jidTi.
Fat, TO XiTTOSf Tvdxos, Xmapos,
naxvi.
Fish, TO ^dpi, 6 Ixdvs.
Fork, TO TTflpOVVt.
Fowl, 17 opvlS, TO TTOvXl.
Fruit, TCI onoipiKd, Ta cPpovTa,
Game, to Kvvrjyiov.
Glass, TO TTOTTJplOV.
Goose, T] xh^^-
Grapes, to aTa^lXia,
Gravy, 6 C^^pos, fj (raXTO-a,
Ham, TO xoipopepi.
Hare, 6 Xayois.
Honey, to peXi.
Ice, TO nayaTov.
254 Modern Greek.
Ice-lemon, rh Traywroiz-Xe/xow.
Jam, TO ykvKo,
Jug, r] Xayj^wy.
Knife, rh fiaxalpiov.
Lamb, t6 dpvlov.
Lean to yj^axvov.
Leg of mutton, to fnrovTt, to
fjLTjpov irpo^drov.
Lemon, t6 Xepoviov.
Lemonade, fj Xf/xomSa.
Lettuce, t6 papovXi.
Lobster, 6 da-raKos,
Meat, TO Kpias.
Meat, fat, lean, to Kpeas, traxv,
yl/a)(v6v.
Medlar, t6 fiicTrCKov,
Melon, TO TffTTOVl,
Milk, TO yaXa,
Mulberry, to p.ovpov.
Mustard, 17 /xouo-Ta/jSa.
Mutton, to irpo^dov Kpeas.
Napkin, 17 TrcTceTu, to x^'P°"piiKTpov.
Oil, TO fXaiov, XaSt.
Omelette, 17 op.f'hiTa, t6 <r(j)oy-
ydrov.
Onion, rb KpopvSi {leponvov),
KpofivhaKi.
Orange, to iropTOKoKiov.
Oyster, to a-rpdbiov.
Partridge, ^ irepSiKa.
Peach, TO pobaKivov.
Pepper, to TrtTrept.
Pie, TO ^vfiapiKov, t] TrfjTo.
Pig, TO yovpovvi.
Plate, TO TTtaro.
Pork, TO )(oipivbv Kpias.
Potato, T) iraTaTa, to y(u>iX7J\ov,
Pudding, T) novbiyya.
Kadish, t6 pandvi.
Rice, TO pv^i.
Roll, fj (ppavT^oXa,
Salad, 17 craXaTa.
Salmon, 6 a-oXofios.
Salt, salt-cellar, to SKat, 6 SKa-
Tobox^os.
Sandwich, to a-dvboviTs.
Sauce, t; crdXro-a.
Saucer, to VTroKweXXoi' (Trta-
TUKl.
Smpe, TO ftireKaTcrivi,
Sole, fj y\co<T<Ta,
Spice, Ta pvpoibiKa, dpafiara.
Spinach, t6 (rnavaKi.
Spirits, Ta olvonvevfiaTo.
Spoon, TO KOxXidpiov, xovXidpi,
Sugar, fi Cdxap^s.
Sweetmeats, to. ^axapa>Td.
Table, fj Tpdire^a.
Table-cloth, to Tpane^oiidvbvXov.
Tart, TO yXvKicrpa,
Tea, TO Tfiov (^Tcrdi).
Tender, Tpv(f>€p6s.
Toast, TO l/^w/il yf/r)p€VOV,
Tongue,»J
yXdio-o-a.
Tough, (TKXripoi.
Tumbler, tu noTfjpiov.
Turkey, 6 Ivbidvos, ydXXos.
Veal, TO ^iSe'Xo.
Vegetable, t6 XaxaviKov.
Vinegar, to ^flSi.
Walnut, TO Kapvbi.
Water, t6 v€p6v.
Wine, red, white, resinated,
TO Kpacri (olvos), kokkivo, aa-
irpo, piTaivdro.
Wine-glass, t6 iroTtipiov toC
Kpacriov.
Woodcock, 17 ^vXoKOTTa,
Vocabulary. 265
Trades and Professions, Texvat koI 'EnayyeXnara.
Archaeologist, dpxato\6yos\
Architect, apxireKTav,
Attorney, dvTiKKrjTos, SiKTjyopos.
Auctioneer, SrjfioTrpdTrjs.
Author, avyypa<pevs.
Banker, Tpanf^irrjs,
Barber, Kovpevs.
Barrister, 8iKrjy6pos.
Blacksmith, aiBripovpyos.
Bookseller, ^i^XiottoKtjs.
Bootblack, XoOaTpoy, inoSripa-
T0Ka6npUTTr]S,
Bootmaker, vnoSTjpaTonotos,
Butcher, KpeomciiXrjs.
Cabman, dfia^tjX'iTrjs.
Carpenter, fiapnyKos, ^vXovpyos,
Chemist, xvi^'^'^os.
Confectioner, ^axapoTrXdarrji,
Clergyman, kXtjpikos.
Clerk, ypa(f)evs, VTrdXXrfKos.
Cutler, paxaipoTToios,
Dentist, oSovroiaTpos,
Editor, eKdorrjs.
Engineer, p-rixaviKos.
Fruiterer, onwpoTrcoXrjs.
Gardener, Kx^novpos.
G^rocer, pnaKoKris, navTonitXrjs.
Hairdresser, Kovpds.
Historian, laropiKos,
Interpreter, diepfirjvfvs.
Journalist, i(^r)pi€ptboypd<^os.
Judge, biKa<TTris.
Lawyer, Siicrjydpos.
Librarian, ^i^XiodrjKdpios, /Si^-
Xio(pvXa^.
Merchant, ipnopos.
Money-clianger, dpyvpafioi^os.
Officer, d^ianaTiKos.
Paper-seller, stationer, x^P'^o-
nwXrfs.
Pedlar, 68fp.7ropos, irpayparev-
TJJf.
Photographer, (j>a)Toypd({)os.
Poet, TrOlTjTTlS.
Policeman, KX-qTrip.
Politician, ttoXitikos.
Priest, Upevs.
Professor, Ka6r]yT]TTjS.
Schoolmaster, 8i8daK(i\os.
Shoemaker, TraTrourf^s, vttoSt]-
HaroTTOios.
Student, (})oiTrjTr]s, anovbaaTrjs,
Tailor, pdnri^s.
Tobacconist, KanvondiXT]s.
Tradesman, pLeTairpdrris, rex^l-
Tr]S.
Undertaker, (jiepfrpoiroios.
Upholsterer, TaTniTonaXrjs, eVi-
ttXottcdXtjs.
Waiter, vnrjpeTrjs.
Washerwoman, irXvarpa.
Watchmaker, copoXoyonoio^.
Wine-merchant, olvip-Tiopos.
Writer, ypa(fifvs, avyypacpeis.
* All Greek words in this Vocabulary are masculine except -nXvaTpa.
266 Modern Greek.
Public Buildings; j^arts of a town, /iiT]fi6(rta mlpia' Ta (xepr)
Trjs iToXfais.
Academy, ^ uKabrjiila.
Arsenal, 6 vavcrTudfios' ^ ott-
XodrjKT].
Asylum (for idiots), to aarvXov
fKOpS)!',
Asylum (for orphans), to 6p-
(pavoTpo(f)flov.
Bank, National, Ionian, 'H
Tpdne^a, f] 'EdfiKfj, fj 'Iopiktj.
Barracks, oi (TTpuTwvis.
Cabstand, 6 aTaOyios rSiv &pa^a>v.
Coffee-house, caf6, to Kacfxiov,
TO Kacpeve'iov.
Capital (of a country), f) irpa-
Tfvov(ra.
Carriage, open, shut, fj cifia^a,
avoiKTT], Khfiartj,
Cathedral, 17 p.r}Tp6Tro\is.
Cemetry, to veKpoTacftuov,
Chapel, TO Trap€KK\f](Tiov,
Chemist s shop, to cfyappaKflov.
Church, fi eKKkrjaia,
Clock, TO fopo\6yiov.
Club, 17 y^eaxV-
Columns of Olympian Zeus,
nl arvXoi tov OXvpniov Aios.
Court of Justice, t6 AiKaa-Trj-
piov.
Custom-house, t6 TeXavnov,
Custom-house officer, o TeAw-
vo(pvXa§.
Factory, Steam, t6 'EpyoaTa-
aiov, 81 aTpov,
Fountain, f/ ^pvcris.
Gutter, 6 oxfTos.
Hospital, TO voaoKopfiov.
Hotel, dear, cheap, t6 ^fvoSo-
X^'^o"} aKpi^ov, tv6vv6v.
Lane, f) aTpanoi.
Library, to read, v ^ilSXioBfjKtj^
avayivaxTKa.
Manufactory (of gunpowder),TO 'Epyoa-Tciaiov {to nvpirtdo-
irf2oi>\
Market-place, f] dyopd.
Metropolis, fj MrjrpowoXis.
Mint (to coin), t6 vopiaparoKo-
TTflov {vofiifTfiaTOKOTrca),
Monastery, to povaarfipiov.
Monument, t6 fivrjixe'iov.
Museum, closed, open, t6
pOVVeioV, KXfKTTOV, dpoiKTov,
Palace, to. dvuKTopa, TO naXdri-
ov.
Parish, fj iuopla, fj KoivoTrjs.
Pavement \ ^ ^'^/^Z^'"^'"''
[ TO TTfQobpOpiOV,
Picture gallery, 17 ntvaKodfjKrj.
Post office (a stamp), to tu^v-
Spopdov (ypappaToarjpov).
Prison (to be condemned), fj
(f>vXaKfj {KaTaSiKd^opau.
Promenade (to walk), 6 nepl-
noTos (jrepnraTco).
Public-house (to drink), to
KanrjXflov (ttiVq)),
Quay (to sail), ij npoKvpala
(TrXeco).
Quarter of the town, fj awoiKia
TYjs TrdXfoJs.
Reading-room, t6 dvayvaxTTj]-
piov.
Shop (to sell), TO paya^fiov, t6
ipyacTTrjpiov (jvaiXSi^.
Shore, TO TvapdXiov, fj dKTfj,
Square, fj TrXareta.
Vocabulary. 267
Statue, TO aydkiia.
Street, winding, ij 686s, iXiKo-
fibrjs.
Suburb, distant, t6 npodartiov,
aTTOjxtiiaKpvcrp.(vov.
Tlie TeiTEce, ^ raparaa, rh
dafia.
Tower, Venetian, 6 irvpyos,
'¥.v(tik6s.
Town, sea-, commercial-, 7
TToXtf, napa6dKa.<T<nos-, tp-
ITOplKTj-.
Town-hall, to br]pap)^(1ov.
University, student, to Uave-
marrjpiov, 6 (fjoiTrjrrjs.
Walls of the town, to relxr]
T^y TrdXfwf.
Zetter-ionting, 'H ^Eniaro\oypa(pia,
Address, 17 tuiSwais, 17 eVi-
ypacplj.
A. B., Esq., Athens, London,T&i Kvpla A. B., tts ^AdrjvaSy
Aovdlvou.
Blotting paper, to arovnoxap-
TOV,
Care of (to the), rg (f)povTi8i.
Direction, f} 8ifv6vva-is.
Envelope, 6 (j)uKe\\oi.
Expression, fj fK(f)paais.
Gum, T] youpa, TO Koppt,
Ink, ff peXdvT].
Inkstand, to /ifXavoSoxflov.
Letter, t6 ypdppa, ij (ttkttoX^.
Letter-box, t6 ypapparoKi^oi-
TtOV.
Letter-paper, 6 Ta^vSpopiKos
XdpTfjs.
Do I post the letter in time 1
pmrco (yKaipais ttjv (iricrToXrju]
Newspaper-wrapper, t6 irepi-
KoXvfjpa Tijy ((f)r}pfpi8os.
Paper, to x"P'"«''— blue, white, ruled, pa^v,
aanpov, xapni^opevov,
Pen-nibs, to Kop8vXia, ai irtwai.
Peu-holder, 6 Kov8v\o;p6pos.
Pen-wiper, 6 KoKapopAicrrjs.
Pencil, TO poXv^doKovdvXov.
Pencil-leads, tu poXv^aKia.
Penknife, to kovSvXopdxaipov.
Postman, 6 Taxv8p6pos.
Post-office, TO Taxv8popt2nv.
Post, arrives, leaves, to tuxv-
bpopelov, (jiddvfi, dvaxdopf'i-
Postage, TO. TaxvbpopiKO, TeXrj.
Return of Post (by), dTrdvTrjaiv
dvapivui 81a. Tov (noptvov.
Registered letter, crvaTrjpfvrj
(TTtCTToXr).
Ruler, 6 xapa|.
Sand, T) appoi.
Seal, 17 (Ttppayls.
Sealing-wax, t6 fiovXoKepi, 6
'WnauiKos KTjpos.
Sheet of paper, t6 (j)vXXou
XnpTov.
Signature, ^ wroypa^^.
Stamps, Ta ypappaToarpia.
Is that enough 1 tlvai
dpKerdJ
How many stamps does this
letter require ] noa-a ypap-
paT6aT]pa xpfidC^TOi ff (itktto-
Xrj avTT)^
268 Modern Greek.
Two stamps of thirty lepta,
Svo ypanfiaTocrrjfia Tav rpi-
avra XfiTTciv.
Telegram, t6 rrjkfypdcfirifia.
To be left till called for, va
Wait for an answer, nepiftept
dTrdvTTjcriv,
Wafer, f] ocrna.
Writing materials, ^ ypa^iKri
vXrj.
The writing, to ypcu^ijiov.
Parts of a House, names of pieces of furniture etc., etc., Ta
p.ept] TJ]S olKias, ovopLaaiai. twv iir'niKav, k.t.\.
Candle, to light, to lajpl, dvdir-Apartment, to 8a>fidTiov,
Arm-chair, ij TroXvdpofa, to
6pnvlov,
Arrange (Imp.), raKronoiricTov.
Back room, to onia-dev dcopd-
TiOV,
Balcony, 6 e^aaTris.
Barrel, to ^apeXi, 6 Kd^os.
Basement, t6 Karcayaiov.
Bason, to wash, f] \eKdvT],
Tr\vvop.ai, Xovofiai,
Beam, f] boKos.
Bed, to lie down, to Kpe^^aTi,
fj KXivrj, KaraKKivofiai.
Bedding, to sleep, to. a-TpaalSia,
KOlfJLwpMl.
Bedroom, fj Kp(^i3aroKdfiapa, 6
Koirav,
Bell, to ring, 6 kwSwi', kcoSw-
Blanket, ^ naTavia, to icpdnXui-
Blind, TO nwT^ovpi.
Bolt, lock, (Imp.), 6 (rvpTT]s,
xXftcroi'.
Box, TO Kl^d>Tl0V,
Brick, TO Tov^Xov, f) nXlvdos.
Broom, to sweep, 17 vKoima,
TO crdpadpov, aapopco.
Brush, fj jSoC^To-n, 17 -i^riKTpa.
Carpet, to xaXt, 6 Tdnris.
Castle, 17 firavXis, to (ppovpiov.
Ceiling, to Ta^dvi, t) opocprj.
Cellar, 17 djrodfjKt],
Chair, to sit down, ^ /cap/fcXa,
TO KdSicrpa, KaQ-qpai,
Chest of drawers, t6 K0fi6.
Chimney, 6 Kairvobox^oi.
Clock, TO (opoXoyiov, TO (KKptptS,
Counterpane, 17 Kov^ipra, to
fCpdnXana,
Cupboard, to open, r6 vTovXdm,
f) aKfvodfjKT}, dvoiyo).
Curtain, to draw, to irapanf-
Tacrpa, dvtydpdv.
Cushion, TO irpoaKfCpaXaiov.
Desk, TO ypd<p(iov.
Dining-room, f) Tpnirf^npia.
Door, Come in (Imp.), ^ 6vpa,
eiaeXdf, ipnpos.
Drawer, to avprdpiov.
Drawing-room, rj aWowa,Footstool, TO (TKap.vi, TO vnoTTo-
810V.
Flame, fj ^X6§.
Floor, TO Trarco/xa, t6 eSo0or.
Front room, t6 eixirpoadtv dw-
fldTlOV.
Vocahilary. 26g
Fuel, TO evavcTfio.
Furnished, iniirKanitvos.
Furniture, to. eniirXa.
Garden, 6 Krjnos.
Gate, fj ttiXt].
Ground floor, to Korayaiov.
First floor, r6 7rpS>T0v "narafia.
Hire, to, eVotKidfo).
House, T] oiKia,
Jug, fj 'Sdyrjvos,
Key, to unlock, to ickdbiov,
avniyo) (^sKXeiSwo)).
Kitchen, to cook, to jxayftpelop,
fxaytipcvat.
Kitchen utensils, to. fiaynpiKa
CTKfVTJ.
Knocker, to poVrpoc,
Ladder, staircase, tj o-/caXa, 17
Lamp, to trim, 17 Xdfxna, 6 \vx-
vos, tTOLfxa^d) TOP Xvxvov.
Lock, 17 KkfiSoovid, TO KkelQpov.
Looking-glass, 6 KadpfTTTTjs.
Marble, t6 pdppapov.
Mat, 17 ylrdOa, 17 ^Lados.
Matches, to light, ra airlpra,
dvanTco,
Mattress, to crTpapa,
Nail, TO Kopc^i, 6 ^Xoy.
Padlock, TO \0VK€TT0V.
Pane of glass, t6 ve\oTT\ata-iov.
Pavement, to iT(Co8p6piou.
Peg, to hang up, t6 Kpfpaa-Topi,
KpefiS).
Pianoforte, to KktiboKvp^aXov,
TO nidvo.
Picture, to paint, ^ cIkwv, (oj-
ypa(pi^co.
Pillar, Tj (tttjXt].
Pillow, tA pa^iXdpt.
Plank, plaster, 17 aavU, 6 yv^^os.
Portrait, 17 dKitv,
Eoof, t] UTiyt].
Room, TO dccpdriov.
Saucepan, 17 KaraapoXa.
Sheets, clean, dry, to a-iv86via,
Kadnpdj (TTfyvd.
Shelf, TO pd<pi, Tj aaPis,
Shutters, open, shut (Imp.),
TO irapaOvpo^vKXa, avoi^t,
KXei(T€.
Smoke, 6 koitvos.
Soap, TO cranovvi, 6 crdrrfov.
Sofa, 6 aoipds, TO dvdKXivrpov,
Stable, o araiXos.
Staircase, to go up, fj o-jcaXa,
dva^aiva.
Steps, to go down, al fiadpides,
Kara^aiva).
Stone, 6 Xidos,
Stove, f) deppdarpa.
Sweep (Imp)., (TKOvmcre, (rdpa-
<rop.
Table, to write, ^ rpdnfCa,
ypd<f)a>.
Tablecloth, t6 TpantCopdp'
Xop.
Towel, ^ TTfTO-fTa.
Tmnk, to crevrovKi, to Ki^ariop.
Tumbler, to drink, to norrjpiop,
TTIPCO.
Wall, 6 Tot;^;or, rb Tt'ixof,
Washhand stand, 6 pinTrip.
Well, TO irrjyddi, to (f)peap.
Window, TO napdBvpop.
Wood, yard, court, to ^vXop,
Tj avXrjt
270 Modern Greek.
Articles of Dress, Ta
Boots, thick, thin, ra vnobfj-
fiara, xov^pd, XfTrrd.
Boot-jack, 6 v7ro8Tjfj.aToavpTr]t.
Braces, a pair of, ai ripavrais,
Brush, clothes, hair, ^ ^ovpra-a,
fj ^r]KTpa Tap ivbvpArav, rmv
paK\iS)v.
Brush my clothes, ^ovpraurf
ra povxa. p.ov.
Button, button (Imp.), t6
Kop^iov, Kop^cocre.
Cap, put on, take off (Imp.),
TO KoXvppa, /3d\e to aKov(f>o,
^€aKov(f)a>(Tov.
Coat, fashionable, t6 evSvpa,
TOV (TVppOV,
Coat, gieat, 6 enfvbvrqi.
Collar, 6 KoKapos, t6 nepnpa-
Xr]Kiov.
Comb, TO ktIvi.
Cuff, TO paviKfTTt, ^ Ufpixfipis.
Drawers, t6 ta-ci^paKoy.
Fit, to, raiptdCa,
Gloves, TO. yavTia, Ta xfi-pdicTia.
Handkerchief, silk, t6 ^ai/Sij-
Xtofj TO piv6p,aKTpov, p,(Ta^a>-
TOP,
Hat, TO KaneXov, 6 TrTXor,
Necktie, 6 XaipobeTrji.
Pistol, TO TTlCTTuXlOP.
Pocket, Tj Tcrenr), to dvkaKiop,
Purse, TO ^uXdpTiop.
pfprj T^y ipdvpaviat,
Eazor, TO ^vpdifnov.
Ring, TO SaKTvXidiov,
Seal, f/ (Tcfipayis.
Shirt, TO VTTOKdpKTOP, 6 ;^lT(il».
Shirt-collar, 6 KoXdpos.
Shoe, TO (TavddXiov.
Slippers, al naPT6<p\au
Socks, at KokTaai,
Sponge, 6 (TTrdyyof.
Spur, TO crrripovvi, 6 irrtpvuTrrip.
Stick, TO pa^5lop.
Stockings, at icaXTaai, a'l ntpf
KvrjpiSes.
Tooth-brush, 17 ^ovpTaa tup
odoVTCOV.
Tooth-powder, ^ oSoptokSvis.
Trousers, to ituvtoXopi, al
TTepiaiceXlSes.
Umbrella, ^ opirptXa.
Waistcoat, to yeXe/ct, 6 vTTtp-
8vTTJS.
Walking-stick, rb pnaaTovn,
fj ^aKT7)pia, TO pa^hiov.
Watch is slow, to mpoXoyiop
jrrjyaivfi onlcra).
Watch is fast, rh apoXoyiop
iTTjyaivei ypfjyopa.
Watch-chain, 17 aXva-is tov wpo-
Xoyiov.
Watch-key, to wind up, rb
/cXtibiov TOV apoXoylov, Kovp-
Barrel of a gun, ^ Kdvprj.
Boar, 6 Karrpos, 6 dypioxoipos
Covey, TO Konddi.
Shooting, To Kvfijyiov.
Double-barrelled gun, hUawovoivXov.
Fire (Imp.), irvpX
Vocabulary. 271
Foxhunting, rh levvriyiov aXco-
ITfKOS,
Game, t6 Kvvfiyiov, ff aypa.
Gun, TO TOV(p(Kl, TO OTrXoV.
Hare, 6 Xa-ywy.
I have hit, (KTimqaa.
Load (Imp.), ytnia-f.
Partridge, f) nipbi^.
Point, to, of a dog, 6 ctkvKos
ipeplidpfi.
Powder, ro finapovri, 6 TrvpiTn.
Powder-flask, f) rrvpiToboxos.
Quail, f] oprv^.
Rabbit, to Kovvf\i, 6 kovikXos.
Hamrod, 6 oj3eXos.
Rifle, Tj KapapTTiva, to pa^hatTov
TOVCfifKl.
Scent, fj oapiT].
Season, the right, ^ f'lroxn, V
KaTaWrjXos eno^r].
Setter dog, Kvvr]y(TiKus kvcov.
Shoot, to, TTvpo^oka,
Shot, large, small, f) ^o\t].
Snipe, TO li1TfKaT(riVl, T] CTKoXo-
naKis,
Spaniel, kikov IxvrjXdTrjs.
Trigger, fj (T(f>vpa.
Wolf, 6 \VK0S.
Woodcock, fj ^vKoKorra.
Animals, Birds, etc.,
Animal, to (a>ov.
Bear, 17 apKTos.
Bee, f] peXia-aa.
Bird, TO TTTrjVOV.
Boar, TO yovpoijvi, 6 \o7pos.
Butterfly, f] TrfToXovSof ^ ^vx^'Camel, f] KaprjXos.
Cat, fj yara, fj yaXfj.
Chicken, to opvidoTvnvKi.
Cock, 6 KOKopas, 6 ir€Tfiv6s, 6
oKeKTap.
Cow, beef, fj dyeXds, TO ^a)8iv6v.
Cuckoo, 6 KOl'KKOS, 6 KOKKV^.
Dog, 6 <TKv\0S, 6 KIXOV,
Dolphin, 6 SeXc^iV.
Donkey, to yaibovpi, 6 ovos.
Duck, wild duck, fj ndma, fj
V7i(Ta-a, fj dypiondnia.
Eagle, 6 deTos,
iigg, TO avyov, to o)6v.
Elephant, 6 iXecfjas.
Fish, TO ^dpi, 6 lx6vs.
Flea, 6 yjrvXXos.
Ta ZS>a, to TlTtjvd, kt\.
Fly, n M^'«'
Fox, f] dXtnov, 6 dKoiTrr]^.
Gnat, to Kovvoimi, 6 Koovcoyj/,
Goat, she-goat, ^ yiSa, fj kut-
aiKa, Tj ai^.
Hen, ^ »c()rTa, fj opvis.
Honey, to peXi.
Horse, t6 aXoyov, 6 tmros.
Insect, TO ^(oitpiov, TO evTopov.
Lamb, to dpvlov.
Lark, to sing, o Kopvhakos,
Lion, 6 Xecov.
Lobster, 6 daTOKos.
Magpie, fj KapaKa^a,
Monkey, fj paifiov, 6 ividrj^.
Mosquito, TO KOVVOIITTI, 6 KOiVOif^.
Mouse, 6 ITOVTIKOS, 6 jlVS.
Mule, TO povXdpi, fj fjp,lOVOS,
Nest, fj (jxokfd.
Nightingale, fj drjbmv.
Ox, o jSoCs.
Oyster, t6 daTptldiov,
273 Modern Greek,
Partridge, ^ irepbiKa, ^ Trtpbi^.
Peacock, to naycjvt, 6 raois.
Pheasant, 6 (j>aa-iav6s.
Pig, TO yovpovvt, 6 ^oipos.
Pigeon, fj Trfpiarepci.
Quadruped, t6 Tfrpdirovv.
Quail, TO opTVKi., f] oprv^.
Rat, 6 ptyaXos novTiKos, 6 p,vs.
Raven, 6 Kopa^.
Sheep, mutton, to npo^arov,
TO 7r/)o/3toj».
Spider, f) apaxvr}.
Stork, TO XeXe(ct, 6 nf\apy6s.
Swallow, 17 ;(eXi8coj/.
Swan, 6 KVKvot,
Tiger, fj Tiypis.
Toad, 6 (ppvuos, 6 (iaTpaxos.
Turkey, 6 IvBidvos, 6 ydXXos,
Vermin, to fmopav.
Wasp, T] (T(f}^Ka, T] a-(})rj^.
Worm, TO aKcoXTJKi,, 6 aKoiKr}^,
Wolf, 6 XvKoy.
Trees, Mowers, Fruits, Ta
Almond, t6 dpvyBdkov,
Apple, TO priXov.
Apricot, TO ^(pVKOKKOV.
Ash-tree, 17 peXla.
Bark, 6 cf)Xoi6s.
Branch, 6 kXoSos.
Bush, 6 Bdpvoi.
Cedar, 6 nibpos.
Chestnut-tree, 17 Kaa-Tavea.
Currant, ij KopivdiaKrj ora^tV.
Cotton-tree, 17 ^ap^aKis.
Cypress, tj Kirndpiavos,
Fern, 17 nrepis.
Fig-tree, 17 <tvk^.
Fig, TO (TVKOV.
Fir, f) iXaTrj,
Flax, TO Xivdpcov.
Flowers, to avdrj.
Forget - me - not, to "pff pe
Xr](Tp6v(i, Tj pvcraatTis.
Fruit, oi KapTToi, al onapai.
Garden, 6 Krjnos.
Grape, fj a-Ta(f>vXTi.
Bunch of grapes, t6 Tcrapiri,
6 ^orpvs.
Hothouse, TO BeppoKTjniov {(jiv-
TOKopelovj.
Afv8pa, Ta "Avdrj, al 'On-wpot.
Hyacinth, 6 laKivdos.
Larch, 17 irfvKr].
Laurel, 17 ddcf)vr}.
Leaf, TO (pvXXov,
Lilly, TO Kplvov.
Lime-tree, ^ (piXvpa,
Medlar, to pfcrniXov.
Melon, TO TTfTTopi, 6 nencov.
Mulberry, to povpov.
Mushrooms, to. pavirdpia, ol
pVKTjVfi,
Oak, 17 8pvs.
Orange, t6 nopTOKdXiov,
Peach, TO poSdKivov.
Pear, r6 u;(Xa8t, t6 dniSi,
Pear-tree, 17 dn-tSfa, 77 dxXaSia.
Pine, 17 TTtvKrj, ^ iriTvs.
Pomegranate, to pdiSi, tj puid.
Poplar, fj XfvKtj.
Poppy, fj Trarrapovucu
Root, fj p'i(a.
Rose, TO p68ov.
Seeds, oi (Tiropoi.
Shrubs, Ta x^pdiiXaba,
Sow, to, o-TTeipQ).
Stem, TO KOTO-dvi., TO aTtXtxos,
Tulip, TO Xdpiov.
Vocabulary. 273
Vine, ^ afi7r(\os.
Violet, 6 ixfve^fs, TO lov.
Walnut-tree, 17 KapvBid, fj Kapva.
Wlieat, TO (TiTapiy 6 aiTos.
Willow- tree, 17 Irta,
Yew, 6 (T/xtXa^.
Facultiea, Qualities, and Senses of man, Th UpoTtpfifucra^
ai ^IbiOTTfTiS KoL ai Aladrjcrfis tov dvdpamov.
Admiration, 6 davpaa-pos.
Ambition, ambitious, fj (piKo-
So^ia, (f)ih68o^os.
Astonishment, fj fKiT\r]^is.
Badness, wicked, fj KUKia, kokos.
Character, upright, 6 xopaKTTjp,
Conscience, ^ awddrjais.
Despair, rj djrfXTricrta, 6 dntX-
niapos.
Diligence, diligent, ff impi-
Xfta, (TripeXrjs.
Eagerness, eager, ^ rrpodvpla,
npodvpos.
Falsehood, a liar, t6 -^evbos, 6
'i\ff\J(TTJ)S.
Fear, timid, 6 (f>6^os, avavbpos.
Folly, a fool, fj papiay 6 ptopos.
Frugality, ij Xitottis.
Hearing, a sound, ^ oko^, 6
Idea, f) tSe'a.
Imagination, imaginative, fj
(f)avTa(Tia, (f)avraaia>8rjv.
Impatience, impatient, fj dv-
VTTopovTjaia, dinmopovos.
Incivility, uncivil, ^ dytveia,
dyfvfjs.
Intellect, 6 vovs, 17 Sidvoia,
Jealousy, jealous, 17 Ci^orvnlof
^rjXoTvnos.
Joy, happy, fj x^pa, fvTvx^s.
Knowledge, fj yvSxris.
Life, to live, fj Cojfj, (S>.
Memory, to remember, ^
Hufjprj, fvdvpovpai.
Passion, passionate, t6 itdBos,
nfpnradfjs.
Pleasure, f] (vxaptarrja-is.
Politeness, lit. good-breeding,
polite, 17 (vytvfia, eiiyfvfjs.
Reason, r6 XoyiKov.
Remembrance, 17 dvdpvrjoris.
Shame, to ataxos.
Sight, eye, 17 opaais, 6 6(f)da\-
p6s.
Smell, nose, fj oacftpTjais, fj pis.
Soul, fj yj/vxi']'
Talent, brain, t6 Trporeprjpa,
6 vovs, TO. pvakd.
Taste, fj yfvais.
Touch, finger, ^ d(j)fj, 6 doKTv-
\os.
Will, 17 OeKrjais.
Wisdom, fj (ppovrjais.
Wit, TO TTVfiipa, f] ficpvui.
Fine Arts, At apaiai Tf'xixu.
Sculpture, 'H TXvnTtK^.
Statue, ri aydkpa.
Bust, 17 npoTopfj.
Monument, t6 pvrjpt'iov.
Model, TO nponXaapa,
274 Modern Greek.
Cast, rh ax^fio.
Form, 6 rx/iros.
Marble, ri fidpfiapow.
Plaster, ^ yi-^os.
Painting,
Water-color, ^ vbpoypa(f)ia.
Oil-painting, f] tXaioypacjiia.
Landscape, t6 Tonflov,
Portrait, fj elK(i>v.
Fresco, T) Toi)(oypacf)iiu
Mosaic, t6 pacraiKov,
Colouring, 6 xptopaTia-pos.
Shading, rj a-Kiaais.
Canvas, to Kawa^mravov,
Brush, ri ypa<f>is.
'H Zaypa^iKT).
Fasel, 6 oKpl^at.
Engraving, 17 iyy\v^fi.
Engraving upon wood, r,
^vKoypa(^ia,
Engraving upon steel, 17 xoXw-
^oypa(f>ia.
Engraving upon copper, t)
Xci^noypaipia.
Lithograph, 7 Kidoypacpia.
Colours, Ta
Black, rather black, pavpos,
peXas, pfXavcoTTOs.
Blue, light-, dark-, pafivs,
Kvavovs, dvoiKTOs-, ^aOvs-.
Sky-blue, ovpav6\povs.
Brown, Kaaravos.
Crimson, ^va-crivos.
Dark, dpavpos, oKovpos.
Gray, c})ai6s.
Green, greenish, Trpdaivot,
npaaivMTTOs.
Lilac, TO xpoipa TTjs Traa^ai^aias.
Peach, pobauvoxpovs.
Xpapara.
Purple, Trop(f)vpo>9r}s,
Red, fpv6p6s.
Rose, po86)(povs.
Scarlet, (l>\oy6xpovs, a\iKos.
Shaded, a-Kiep6s.
Striped, t6 dpadarov.
Swarthy, ^fXai^dj.
Violet, (wSt;?.
White, XevKos,
Yellow, Kirpivos.
Rather white, viroXevKog.
Rather black, viroptKas.
Architecture, 'H 'ApxiTfKToviKfj.
Doric style, 6 AmpiKos pvO-
pos.
Ionic style, 6 'ItowKoy pvdpos.
Corinthian style, 6 KopivOiaKos
pvdpos,
Tuscan style, 6 Toa-KaviKos
ftvdpos.
Byzantine style, 6 IBv^am-ivo',
pvdpos.
Composite style, o avvOiTos
pvdpos.
Structure, 17 oiKobopiK^.
Front, ^ irpoaoi^is.
Sides, al nXfvpai,
Vocabulary. -/O
Columns, 01 o-Ti'Xot.
Fluted pillars, pajSScorot Kiova.
Capital, TO KlOVOKpaVOV.
Metope, f] fifTOTTT].
Base, fj ^dcris, TO ^ddpou.
Colonnade, rj KiovoaToi^^la, f]
(TTod.
Caryatides, at Kapvanda.
Arch, fj d'^is.
Gate (of city), 17 ttvX?;.
Temple, 6 vaos.
Altar, TO BvaiaaTTjpiov, 6 ^afiui.
Statue, 6 dvbpids, to ayoKpa.
Cathedral, fj pT]Tp6no\is.
Church, f] fKKXrjaia, 6 vaos.
Harmony, 17 appovia.
Proportion, 17 dvakoyia.
Ruins, TO. fptinia.
Vandals, ot BdvSaXoi.
Barbarians, ol ^dp,3apot.
Venetian Tower, 6 ^EveriKos
TTvpyos.
Broken, destroyed^ reOpava-fii-
vov, <Tna<Tpivov.
Man, 'O avSpaiTos.
Ancestors, oI jrpoyopoi.
Parents, ot yovfls.
Father, 6 narijp.
Mother, fj pfjTrjp.
Brother, 6 dtf'K(l>6s.
Sister, fj (Idf'S.cfifj.
Grandfather, 6 Tran-Tro?.
Child, TO TiKVOV.
Son, 6 v'los.
Daughter, fj Ovydrrip.
Grandson, 6 eyyovos.
Descendants, ot dnoyovoi.
Uncle, 6 6f'ios.
Aunt, 17 6fia.
Cousin, 6 (^d8f\(f)os.
Bridegroom, 6 yap^pos.
Bride, fj inip(pri, f) pv^arfj.
Marriage, 6 ydpos.
Husband, 6 av^vyos.
Wife, fj uv^vyos.
Widower, 6 xw°^-Widow, fj xhp^'
Orphan, to 6p<pav6s.
Christening, baptism, to ^utt-
Tiapa.
He was born, iyewfjBrj,
He is dead, drrf6ave.
Woman, 17 ywfj.
Girl, TO Kopdaiov.
Boy, TO 7rai8iov, to dyopi.
Youth, 6 veos.
Bachelor, 6 ayauos.
A married man, 6 wpcfxyptvoi.
Old man, 6 yepav.
Old woman, fj ypaia.
His age, fj fjXiKia tov.
The Human Body, To dvOpairivop capo.
Eyes, eyebrows, ot 6(f)da\poi,
al 6(f)pvs,
Nose, f] pis (fj pvTTj).
Ears, TO aiTa.
T 2
Head, fj Ke(f)aXfj.
Hair, TCI paWia, fj Koprj,
Forehead, to peTumov.
Face, TO npoaanov.
Modern Greek.
Teeth, m ohovra.
Mouth, TO arofia.
Tongue, fj yAaxra-a.
Cheeks, ra ^idyovKa, al irapfiai.
Beard, to yivtiov.
Moustache, 6 fiia-ra^.
Neck, 6 Xai/iOf, 6 Tpa)(r]\os,
Throat, 6 Xdpvy^.
Chest, TO (TTTldoS.
Bosom, 6 KoKiToi.
Shoulder, 6 Zipos.
Back, 17 po-xi-s, T] jrXarj;.
Arm, 6 ^paxiav.
Hand, to x^P'"
Finger or toe, 6 8dKTv\os.
Thumb, 6 dvT'L\fip,
Nails, oi ovvxfs.
Side, f) nXtvpa.
Lungs, 6 ivveifimv.
Stomach, 6 arofiaxos.
Hips, TO lax^ci.
Thigh, 6 prjpos.
Leg, ^ ki/ij/xt;.
Calf of the leg, ^ yaaTpoKvfjpr).
Knee, to yow.
Foot, 6 irovs.
Skin, TO bfppa, T] fTTibepiiis,
Bones, to. oara.
Flesh, TO Kptas,
Muscles, ol p.va)Vfs.
Heart, fj Kaphla,
Tears, ra haKpva.
Nature, the Country, 'H *vo-ts, 17 'E|ox^.
Ail', 6 dr]p.
Bank (of a river), f} oxSrj.
Bay, 6 KoXTToy.
Beach, TO napaXiov, fj uKpo-
daXacra-cd.
Brook, 6 pva$.
Bush, 6 6dp.vos.
Cape, TO aKpcoTTjpiov,
Coast, f) duTT].
Continent, ff ^nfipos.
Corn, 6 (tItos,
Cotton, 6 ^dfi^a^.
Dust, blinding, 6 KoviopTSs,
TvcpiXavav,
Earth, fj yrj.
Earthquake, 6 o-fto-yoy.
Estate, TO virciaTOTiK ')V, TO Krij/ia.
Field, fertile, to x'^/jd^toi',
yovipov.
Fire, fj (})(orid, TO nip.
Forest, t6 Bda-os.
Hai-bour, deep, o Xip.fjv, ^adm.
Heavens, ol ovpavoi.
Hill, barren, 6 \6(pos, ayovos.
Island, f] vrjaos.
Lake, 17 Xt/x»"7.
Moon, f] aikffvrj, TO ^eyydpi.
Mountain, rocky, t6 opos,
^paxciSfs.
Mud, 17 'kda-mj, 6 ^op^opog.
Ocean, 6 uKeavos.
Olive trees, tq fXaiodevBpa.
Peasant, 6 ^wptfos.
Peninsula, fj x^po'ovTjaos.
Plain, fj TreSids,
Plough, TO apOTpov.
Points of the compass, ra
(TTjp.fia TTjs irv^idos.
North, 6 ^oppai.
East, f) dvaTo\fj.
South, 17 pta-ijp^pla.
West, ^ 8v<Tit.
Vocabulary. 2/7
Rock, 6 Ppaxos.
Sea, 17 0d\u(T(Ta.
Shepherd, hardy, 6 noififiv,
€Vpai(TTOi.
Shore, sandy, fj oktI], afi/iadris.
Sky, blue, o ovpavot, Kvavovs.
Stars, ra aarpa.
Sun, 6 tjXios.
Swamp, feverish, to eXor, 6
^dXrof, 7rvp(Ta)8t]s.
Tide, TO pfvpa.
Tree, t6 btvbpov.
Valley, green, f] *cotXaf, irpa-
Water, good to drink, to v8a>p,
iToaifiov,
Wave, sounding, to Kvp-a,
Tixipov.
Wind, east, 6 avtpos dvaTO-
\ik6s.
World, 6 Koa-fjLos.
The Lesson, To Mddrjpa,
Accent, o t6vo!.
Acute, 17 o^ua.
Grave, 17 ^apf'ta.
Circumflex, t] Trfpicrnaitfvr].
Accusative, ij amart/cij.
Adjective, t6 itridfTov.
Positive, BtTLKov.
Comparative, ovyKpiTiKov.
Superlative, virepBeTiKov.
Adverb, to fnipprjpa.
Article, TO apdpov.
Aorist, 6 d6pi<TTos,
Author, 6 avyypa(f)fvs.
Book, amusing, to Smo-KtSa-
ariKov /3i/3Xtoi'.
Breathing, hard, soft, t6
TTVfvpa, Tf daada, fj \JAi\rj.
Case, fj iTTaxTis.
Class or declension, 17 /cXtVir.
Colon, ff avco T(\fia.
Comedy, ij Kcopabia.
Comparative, t6 ovyKpiTiKov,
Conditional mood, ij vnodfTiKT)
fyKXiais.
Conjugation, ij avCvyia.
Conjunction, 6 a-CvBtarpos,
Consonant, t6 a-vpcf^oivov.
Contracted, awrjpripivos.
Conversation, r) (nvbiakf^it.
Copy out, to, avTiypdcfxa.
Dative, ^ Sotikij,
Declension, 17 kX/o-w.
Defective, (XXdirTiKos
Dialogue, 6 dtdXoyos.
Dictation, 17 vnaydpfvais.
Difficult, 8va-Ko\os.
Diphthong, 6 8t(p6oyyos,
Dual, 6 8v'U6s.
Educated man, 6 nenaibfvpevos
(ivdpoonos.
Exclamation (note of), to
(ITKpfiiVrjpaTlKOV.
Exercise, to yvpvaa-pa, TO 6(pa.
Expression, fj fKcppaais.
Fault, TO 'kudos.
Feminine gender, to 6tj\vkov
yivos.
Full stop, 17 TcKua.
Future, ist, 2nd, 6 piWoiv,
npCoTOS, bfVTipOS.
Modern Greek.
Gender, to yivos.
Genitive, 17 ytviKt}.
High style, to v'^rfkhv vcfios.
Imperative, 17 npoa-TaKTiKij.
Imperfect, 6 TrapaTaTtKos.
Impersonal, aTr/joo-coTroj.
Indicative, f} Spia-TiKT].
Infinitive, ro dirapepcpaTov.
Interjection, to emcfxijvrjpa.
Irregular, av<i>fidkos.
Leaf, Tc (fjvWov.
Learn, to (by heart), navddvu)
(« cTTrjdovs, drr e$a>).
Lesson, t6 fiddrjpa.
Library, fj ^i^XiodfjKT}.
Long vowel, ro paKpov (fxcviifv.
Margin, ro nepidapiov.
Mark, t6 a~qpa.ov.
Masculine, t6 dpa-fPiKov.
Master, 6 didda-Kokos.
Mean, to, evvocb, arTjpaivo).
Meaning, fj ewoia, f) a-rjpaeria.
Middle voice, fj peaij (pavrj.
Mistake, t6 a-cpdXfui,
Mode, fj eyicKKTis.
Neuter, ro olberepov.
Next, dK6\ov6o%.
Nominative, 17 ovopaariKf].
Note, make a, (Imp.), arjpdu-
<TOV.
Notebook, t6 (rqpcuopaTdpiov,
Noun, ro ovopa.
Numerals, Cardinal, Ordinal,
01 dpidpoi, dnoXvToi, tok-
riKoi.
Ordinary, koivos.
Page, 17 o-eXi's.
Paragraph, 6 napdypa(f>os.
Participle, fj peroxfj.
Passive, 17 nadrjTiKrj.
Perfect, 6 napaKflpevos.
Person, ri irpoaamov.
Pluperfect, 6 uTrepo-vi'reXtico'f.
Plural, 6 Tv\rj6vvTix6s,
Poetry, 17 noirja-is.
Point of interrogation, ro
(pcoTrjpaTiKov.
Preposition, 17 npddea-is.
Professor, 6 Ka6r)yr)Tr}V.
Pronoun, fj dvTwvvpia,
Prose, 6 ne^os Xdyoy.
Pupil, 6 padqrfjs.
Quickly, Tax((os.
Read (Imp.), dvdyvci)(rov.
Repeat (Imp.), inavaka^ov.
Rule, 6 Kavau.
Ruler, 6 Kdvatv,
Say, to, Xc'yo).
School, ro axoXuov,
Semicolon, 17 ava reXeta, fj pearj
OTiypf],
Short, ^paxvs.
Singular, 6 iviKos.
Slowly, ^paBecos.
Spelling, 17 opdoypacfy'ia.
Spell (Imp.), 6p66ypay^ov, avK-
Xd^iaov.
Stop, 17 reXft'a.
Study, to, (TTrouSdfco, piKirm,
Subjunctive, rj inroTaKTtK^.
Substantive, ro oiKnaamKov.
Superlative, t6 vnepSfTiKov,
Syllable, 17 <rvWa^fi.
Syntax, fj avm-a^is.
Teacher, 6 8i8d<TKaXos,
Tell, to, XeV<a.
Tense, 6 xp^vos.
Termination, j] Karakr]^!.!.
Title, 6 rt'rXop.
Tragedy, fj rpaywha.
Translation, ^ i^fiyrjai^.
University, ro TravcjniTTrjpiov.
Vocabulary. 279
Used in conversation, eV xph-
a(i iv StaXd-yo).
Used commonly, Koivris xph'
Used in writing, iv xprtara fh
ypoTTTOV \6yov.
Usual, <rvinjdT]S,
Verb, TO prjfia.
Verbally, irpo^opiKms.
Vocabulary, to \e^iX6yiov.
Vocative, 17 *cXf;Tuc^.
Vowel, TO (pavrjfu.
Vulgar, Koivdi, x»^^OiOS.
THE WEITTEN CHAEACTERGreek handwriting varies as much as English, and is just as
difficult, for a foreigner who has not a thorough knowledge ol
the language, to decipher. The forms given below are those in
ordinary use, written in a clear, bold hand, to aid the beginner.
The abbreviations must be learned by practice.
The Written Character. a8i
PRINTED. WRITTEN.CAPITAL. SMALL.
J^ J^ —o ...
. ... Of^^ i ^.
. - ^^ ^ f
^ ... -^ Xt ... ^ ^y
t "
283
'Ev 'A^^rais, rf} 30rj ^AirpiXCov, 1879.
4>iXTar< Kvpte,
rioXv XvTTOVfiai. OTL €V€K€V UTTpOahoKriTOV KCoAlJ-
[inTos avayKaCofiai, va fxr] Se^^ci) ttjv cvixevrj vn&v i:p6(TKKi]<nv
eis Ti)v CKbpofxriv rrji avpiov. 'EirK^uAao-aojixfi'os va iK^paaut
vpXv KoX iTpo(f)opiK(as Tas ivyapi(rrLas p.ov. (ray "napaKoKla va
p.1) irape^riyriariTe rrjv a-novaCav {xov, Koi SiareXw p.6T^ iSiai-
*OAa)? ^Tfxhepoi,
A. T/). K . . . .
Tai 'A^iorijito) Kupfo),
APPEXDIX.
CONTENTS OF THE APPENDIX
sect. pagb
1-14. Inteoduction 287
15-18. I. The Definite Article 295
19-26. II. Pbonodnp . . . : .... 297
27-38. III. The Noon . , 304
39-47. IV. Prepositions 310
48-75. V. The Verb 314
76 84. VI. Faeticles .....*•. 335
APPENDIX.
On the Relation of Modekn to Classical Gbeek,
ESPECIALLY IN BEGAKD TO SyNTAX ^
§ 1. The relation of ancient to modern Greek differs not
only in nearness but in kind from the relation of ancient
Latin to any language of Latin origin. After the fall of
the "Western Empire in the fifth century, popular Latin
finally superseded the Latin of elegant literature. It was the
'lingua romana rustica,'—representing Ennius and Naevius
rather than Cicero and Virgil,—that mainly furnished those
elements which successive phases of alloy at last transmuted
into French and Italian, Spanish and Portuguese. Mean-
while the Eastern Empire, surviving the Western by a thou-
sand years, protected the framework of the Greek language,
and carried it safely into the fifteenth century. Details of
syntax and vocabulary were modified, but the organism was
never dislocated.
§ 2. In ancient Greek, as in ancient Latin, the literary
and the popular idiom had necessarily tended to diverge.
But the literary prose of the Greek classical age had re-
mained in a comparatively close relation with living speech.
It was, in fact, essentially the higher or more cultivated form
' My thanks are due to Professor Michael Constantinides, of the
Hellenic College, London, and to the Rev. H. F. Tozer, Fellow of
Exeter College, Oxford, for their kindness in reading the proof-sheets of
this Appendix, and for some valuable suggestions.
288 Appendix.
of a natural and spontaneous utterance ; it was never arti-
ficial in the same sense as the literary Latin of the later
Eepublic and of the Empire. Thus from the first it was
fitted to exercise a vital influence over the spoken, no less
than the written, Greek of after-times. Two special causes
have contributed to maintain that influence.
(i) From the time when the political liberties of ancient
Greece were extinguished, the sentiment of Hellenic nation-
ality and the pride of Hellenic descent have always recog-
nised their most generally effective symbol in the classical
Greek literature. Hence the power of that literature in
Greek-speaking countries, much as it has fluctuated, has
always been, on the whole, superior to any power which
classical Latin literature could exert over men who felt
that the true distinction of Rome was derived less from
arts or letters than from arms and laws. (2) The Greek
Church, partly through the patristic writings and the liturgic
formularies, partly through the intimate i*elations of the
parochial priesthood with the people, has supplied a per-
petual link between the language of daily life and the
comparatively pure idiom of B^antine prose.
§ 3. That Greek, as distinguished from Latin, has never
been ' dead,' is therefore a correct statement when it is pro-
perly defined.
The tradition of the Greek language, as usually written
by the educated, has been substantially continuous. Sup-
pose a person acquainted with classical Greek, but not
acquainted with post-classical Greek of any period. Place
before him a passage of Greek prose, such as would have
been ordinarily written by a person of fair education at any
period from 300 B, C. to the present day. * Several details
will be new to him, and he may be unable to give a version
exact in every particular; but he will easily follow the
general sense. Take, on the other hand, a person who
knows ancient Latin alone, and try the same experiment
Classical and Modern Greek. 289
in any Romance language : even the general sense will, as
a rule, completely baffle him.
The divergence of colloquial Greek from the classical type
has often been, and in some cases still is, considerably
wider,—the interval varying much, according as the gauge
is a peasant patois or the familiar speech of the educated.
Similarly a knowledge of Italian, available for the literature
from Dante onwards, is not in itself a perfect key to the
dialect of Venice. Yet even the most debased form of
Romaic has still been ancient Greek in another sense from
that in which any Romance dialect is ancient Latin. That
which ancient Greek has in common with a Romaic patois
is not merely a number of reconstituted elements, but a
coherent and organic basis, which has been more or less
thickly overlaid, but never broken up.
§ 4. The classical student is apt to compare modern Greek
directly with such Greek as was written until about 300 b. c.
Departui'es from classical syntax, dilutions of terse classical
phrases, assume in this view the aspect of modern corruptions.
Further inquiry shows, however, that many particular * mo-
dernisms ' can be traced back at least two thousand years.
In many more instances the tendencies which the * modern
'
traits express are discoverable in the earliest records of the
language. Modern Greek has inherited, not only the ancient
literature, but also an oral tradition which preceded that
literature, which co-existed with it, and which has survived
it. If, then, the character of modern Greek is to be esti-
mated aright, it is necessary to take some account of that
historical development which separates the close of the * clas-
sical ' age from the present century.
§ 5. Alexander's conquests made Greek the language of
government and business, as well as of literature and society,
among the populations of Egypt, Syria, and north-western
Asia. Then in the course of the third century B.C. arose the
literary Common Dialect. This meant ' the dialect in general
u
290 Appendix.
use,' as distinguished from the irare Atlic dialect of the stand-
ard Attic classics. The beginning? of a transition can already
be seen in the prose of the non-Athenian Aristotle. The'Common Dialect' was based on the Attic, but admitted
forms, words, and phrases which were not Attic. It is
used, with various modifications, by the later prose-writers
generally, as Polybius (145 b. c), Diodorus Siculus (40 b. c),
Strabo (18 A. D.), Plutarch (90 A. D.), Pausauias (160 A. D.).
In the Augustan age some literary critics, among whomDiouysiuB of Halicarnassus (25 b. c.) was eminent, made an
attempt to revive the feeling for a purer Attic style. Theaim of the ' Atticists ' is best represented by the prose of
Lucian (160 A. r.), which, though artificial and not always
minutely correct, approached the Attic standard morenearly than any that had been written siuce the age of
Demosthenes.
§ 6. Meanwhile a new type of colloquial Greek arose amongthe mixed populations of Asia, Syria, and Egypt. This was
tinged with different colours by different nationalities, but
was always far less pure than the literary 'Common Dia-
lect.' One form of it, that which prevailed in Egypt, was
known as the Dialect of Alexandria. This was used by the
Alexandrian Jews who made the Greek version of the Old
Testament {circ. 283-135 B.C.) It was also the parent of
the dialect used in the New Testament, and (since Scaliger'a
time) usually called Hellenistic, because hellenistes was the
recognized term for a Greek-speaking Jew (Acts vi. i).
The * Hellenistic' Greek of the New Testament is of capital
importance for the Modern language. The diction of the
New Testament had a direct influence in moulding the Greek
ordinarily used by Christians in the succeeding centuries.
Further, this Hellenistic supplies a measure of the Greek
language as then commonly spoken, while the contemporary
profane literature only shows how, in the higher style, it
was written.
Classical and Modern Greek. 291
§7. The foreign element which is present in the New-
Testament Hellenistic may first be defined and separated. It
is due partly to the ancient Hebrew in which the books of
the Old Testament are written, partly to the ' Aramaic ' or
Syro-Chaldaic form of Hebrew which, at the beginning of
the Christian era, was commonly spoken by the Jews of
Palestine. This Hebraic tinge is seen in many particular
words or phrases, as when o<^6i'X»;/Lta= 'a transgression,* uprov
(^tryfifrr' to take food,* Trpoaamov Xa/x/3di/€H'=' to be a re-
specter of persons;
' and in such constructions as iaOUiv
ano yj/ixio)v (iiistead of the simple genitive), dptaKeiv ivamiov
rivos (instead of the simple rivi), or 8vo dvo (an idiom which
has survived) instead of dva 8vo, 'by twos.' In many
other instances the Hebrew colouring is due to the fact
that the expression of the new spiritual life demanded terms
which the Greek vocabulary of the day could not furnish.
More generally, it may be said that the Hebraic stamp is
seen in two broad traits: (i.) graphic circumstantiality, as
iypa(prj 8ia x*'poy Tivoi instead of vno Tivos : (ii.) simple and
monotonous connection of clauses, without any attempt at
terse and varied peiiods. In this respect the style is to that
of Plutarch much what the dpofifvr] \iiis of Herodotus is
to the KarearTpafxpevr) Xt^is of mature Attic prose. Modern
Greek says ^X^e koI fine rather than e\6a)v fme. This tendency
to forego the use of the participle is already apparent in the
New Testament. Latin influence touches the syntax of the
New Testament only in so far as it had already affected the
* Common Dialect:
' it may be traced in a few uses such as
irapaKokSi tva eX% {praccipio ut veniat), rrpo <| f}p.fpci)p {ante
sex dies), but gives no pervading colour.
§ 8. Apart from these traits, the language of the NewTestament is essentially the later Greek of Alexandria. As
regards diction, the Common Dialect is seen in such Attic
forms as deTo's side by side with un-Attic forms such as
pi)(rau. "Words which in classical Greek were only poetical
u 2
29 3 Appendix.
are now current, as aXaXjjros, Qioarvyr]^, okeKToip. Familiar
words take new forms, as vovdeaia (for vovStrrjais), avdOt^ia (for
dvddrjiia); or they have new meanings, as (f)6dveiv='tn arrive,'
7rcpaKaXf'ip=^' to entreat,' senses which Modern Greek retains.
A distinct feature consists in the Christian sense now given
once for all to such terms as nla-Tis, SiKaiova-dai, f/ trdp^, 6 KOfTfioi,
KXrjros, dnoaroXos. New compounds, often clumsy, arise where
the need is felt: thus the Modern liK-qpot^opla ('information')
already occurs, though only as='full assurance,' ' certainty \'
Neuter nouns like ^dnTia-iJia, adjectives like npwivos, and such
verbs as f^ovbtvow, opffpl^co, a-ivid^a, are formed with especial
facility. The vocabulary of classical Greek is, in this Hel-
lenistic phase, going through a furnace, and being re-cast
by the moulding power of oral use.
§ 9. In syntax, more strikingly than in diction, the ten-
dencies of Hellenistic are those of Modern Greek. For
example : i . The Active Voice of the verb, with the re-
flexive pronoun, is often used instead of the Middle Voice.
2. The Optative Mood is becoming rare, especially in oratio
obliqua. 3. The loss of a correct instinct for the use of the
Moods is seen (e. g.) in the junction of orav and edv with the
Indicative. 4. The Cases of nouns are unclassically used,
as when TrpocrKwelv takes a dative, or ydfo-dai an accusative.
5. Tiie Dual number is disused. 6. Iva with the Subjunc-
tive replaces the classical Infinitive in various contexts.
§ 10. But, while the Greek of the New Testament is
colloquial, it is still the spoken language of the educated, and
is not divided by any impassable gulf from the literary
Common Dialect. It is less pure, less elegant, less various
;
but those who knew only the one could be at no loss to
understand the other. A wider breach between literary
Greek and the spoken language of the people dates from
about 300 A. D. Between 750 and 900 A. d. the ancient
* In such a context as Rom. iv. 21, ir\T]po<popi]6ils oTt , . . Swaros
tan, there is some approximatiou to the Modern use.
Classical and Modern Greek. 293
Greek traditions were in great measure effaced, chiefly by the
Slavonian immigrations. In the satirical verses of the monk
Theodorus Prodromus (1143-1180 A. D.)— called nokiTiKoX
arixoi because written in the people's dialect— the spoken
idiom has now taken a definite shape, fr.r removed from
that of the literary language. Prodromus, addressing the
Emperor Manuel Comnenus, bewails the depression of lite-
rary pursuits. At Constantinople, he says, it is less profit-
able to make verses than to mend shoes :
—
feiTovav (X<" nfT^airrjV, Taxa \pfvSoT^ayyAp^y
ir\fjv fve * Ka\o\povviaTTjs, eve Kal xapoKoiror
vrav yap iSri ttjv aiiy^iv rrepixapaaaofievTjv,
Xeyei as ^paarj rd Kpaaiv kcu ^aXe rd imreptv'
fiiOvi TO ^pdaeiv to Bepfiov \eyei npbs to iraiS'iv tow,
va TO, iraiSiv fiov. dyopaae xop5oKot\a OTapievov,
<pepf Kol BXax^Kou rvplv aWrjv arafxeyapeav,
Kai 56s pie va npoyevaajpiai, Kal Tore va, veT^ovca.
' I have a neighbour, a cobbler,—may be a pretender to boot-making
:
now there is an epicure for you,—a very prodigal ! When he sees
the first streak of dawn, he says: "Let the wine be mulled,—put
in the pepper." No sooner is the warm draught ready than he cries
to his slave :" Look here, boy ! buy me a shilling's worth of sausages ;
and bring a shilling's worth of Wallachian cheese, too,—and let mehave some breakfast, and so to my cobbling."
'
§ 11. This modern and popular form of Greek has been
known as Romaic : i. e. the language of the Romaioi.
' Romans,' as the Greek-speaking subjects of the Eastern
Empire called themselves from the 4th century onwards,
while the name 'Hellenes' was reserved for the ancient Greeks
or for adherents of paganism, and the inhabitants of Greece
Proper were called ' Helladikoi.' Just, then, as ' Romaioi
'
were distinguished from 'Hellenes,' so Eomaic, the language
of the people, was distinguished from Hellenic, the language
of the ancient literature.
§ 12 The linguistic reform begun in 1788 by Adamantios
* tv(, a, form still used in some provinces, = tfj'oi = eari.
294 Appendix.
Koraes (born 1748, died 1833) had a strictly practical aim.
Under Turkish rule tlie si)c)ken Romaic had been much bar-
barised. Except at a few centres, it had become little better
than a patois with local forms. In order to establish a
standard medium of communication, KoraSs proposed that,
so far as it could be done without too violent a departure
from actual usage, persons writing Greek should (i.) resume
the classical inflexions of nouns and verbs, (ii.) discard
imported foreign words, and use Greek words instead. Themovement was not an effort of theoretic purism, but a
working compromise.
§ 13. Since the beginning of this century, and especially
since 1832, the general tendency of literary Greek has been
to eliminate elements characteristic of the lower Romaic, and
to approach in some degree to the type of the older CommonDialect, as written (for instance) by Plutarch. A few writers
of the higher style have aimed at a still purer classicism.
Speaking generally, we may say that the Greek of a well-
written newspaper is now, as a rule, far more classical than
the Hellenistic of the New Testament, but decidedly less
classical than the Greek of Plutarch ; being distinguished
from the latter (i.) by the general characteristics of the higher
or written Romaic;
(ii.) by a modern complexion due to the
literal translation into Greek of modern terms, as when ' a
member of the commisssion ' becomes iitKoi rjyj innporrjis.
The spoken language of the lower class is still the vernacular
Romaic : that of the educated varies in purity according to
circumstances. For the sake of being more intelligible, an
educated Greek will use the literary idiom more largely in
conversing with a foreigner than he would with a Greek.
General statements on this subject are therefore to be avoided,
since there is no really accurate gauge. Education and the
influence of good journalism are gradually tending to lessen
the interval between the written and the spoken language.
§ 14. By ' Modern Greek ' is here understood the average
Classical and Modern Greek. 395
spoken and written idiom of the educated, apart, on the one
hand, from literary ultra-classicism, and, on the other, from
merely local or rustic patois. Thus defining it, I propose to
take in order the principal points in which Modern differs
from classical Attic Greek. It will be found that the dis-
tinctive features of later and Modern Greek can generally
be traced to one of two principal tendencies, or to their
combined action : viz. (i.) the desire of greater expressive-
ness; (ii.) the extension, by false analogy, of a classical
usage.
I. The Definite Article.
§ 15. Position of the Article in the attributive sentence. In
classical Greek, 'the wise man'= (a) 6 ao^os avi)p, or (6)
6 avi]p 6 (ro(p6s, or (c) avr/p 6 <To<f6s. But (c), which really
implies an afterthought,—'a man—I mean, the wise man,'
—
is far the least common in good prose : in the New Testa-
ment it is also rare, except where the attributive is formed
by a clause with preposition or participle : as Acts xxvi.
18, TTioTei Ty els (fit: X. 4I, fidprvffi rots TrpoKf)((ipoTovrip.ivois.
In Modern Greek it is also rare, and usually occurs under
the same condition as in the N. T.
§ 16. The Article with Projyer Names. In classical Greek
this use is less constant than in Motlern. Thus in Xenophon,
Anab. iii. i. 8, KaraXaplSavfi . . np6$(vov Koi Kvpov 18 immediately
followed by npodvpovpevov Se . , ToG lipn^fvov Koi too Kvpov '.
where the art.=' the' Proxenus, 'the' Cyrus, just mentioned.
But the modem Greek translator (Btirdalachos) uses the art.
in both places. Cp. p. 193 above, where iv rpaymbia Tltpaais
(Plutarch) is rendered by tls ttjv rpaycp^iav tovs Uepvas
(Gennadius).
§ 17. The Article prefixed to a whole clause. Modern Greek
can say, to va Xe'-y?; Tis ravra, TTtpUpyov ftvaiy 'the fact of anyone
saying this is strange.' This is essentially classical. Cp.
Herodotus, iv. 127, avTt tow oti dtanorrjs scprjaas fivai ffWSf *ia
2^6 Appendix.
return for your claiming (rrairt rov <^riva[ o-f) to be ray master.'
Plato, Jiepublic p. 327 C, ev n XtwrtTat, to tjv Tttiauifiev vfias, 'one
thing remains, the chance of our persuading you.' So in
N. T. : Luke xxii. 2, f(fiTovv t6 na>s dptXaaiv avTof, 'they were
busy with the question how they might destroy him :' c^l,
ib. i. 62. [Distinguish this usage from that by which the
art. merely introduces a quoted word or phrase, as ro avSpes,
the word avbpes : Galatians v. 14, 6 vofios . . mn'krjpwTai iv t^
' ayaTTijcretff rbv nXrjaiov (Tov.'j
§ 18. A peculiar modern use. In Modern Greek the art. can
be separated from the noun by a relative clause equivalent to
an epithet : as, ra ntp\ i>v \eyofifv irpdyfiara, ' the affairs of
which we speak.' Here the limit of resemblance to old Greek
must be carefully marked. In old Greek the art. can stand
before relative clauses : Plato, Critlas p. 115 b, t6v re ^ijpov
((capTTOJ') . . . Koi rbv oaos ^v\ivos '. Lysias, or. 23. § 8, rov re
'EvBvKpiTov Koi rw os f(f>i] dfanoTrjs tovtov (ivai. Demosthenes,
In Androt. § 64, fiiaflv rovs oloa-nep ovtos, where olovantp is
certainly not right. Platon. JEp. 8. p. 352 e, to)v 8e oaa
yfvoiT av. But probably no example occurs in classical Greek
where such a relative clause, equivalent to an adjective, is
followed hy a substantive agreeing with an article, as if, in
Plato, Critias I. c, we had koi t6v oo-oj ^vXivos Kapnov. See
Xenophon, Ilepl imriKris vii. § 5, ov ttji' uxntep tm rov 8i<ppov
eSpai' (TTUvovpev, dWa ttji' Sycnrep 6p66s hv Sia^e^rjKas fit) rolv
aKeXolv :' we do not recommend that the rider should sit in
the saddle as in a chair, but rather as if he were standing up
with his legs apart.' This sentence accurately illustrates the
classical usage : ebpav, agreeing with rfju, follows the attri-
butive clause Sxnrep <Vt rov dicppov, but does not follow the
relative clause SxTntp 6p66s av dia^f^rjKoos (It] toIv aKt'Kolv. The
reason is evident. The old language felt that in such a
phrase as t6v oa-ot ^vXtfcr the art. rov is really on the border-
land between article and pronoun : hence it refrained from
adding the noun in agreement with the article. Modern
Classical and Modern Greek. 297
Greek adds the noun, thus obtaining a more precise, but a
harsher, construction.
II. Pronouns.
§ 19. Modern Greek uses rov, t^j, ratv, etc., as shorter
forms for the pronouns of the third person ; as rov e/SXfTra, * I
saw him :
' to flnt, ' he said it.' They are enclitic (i.) when
they follow the verb, as iriix^tTi tovs, ' send them,' napere ra,
' take those things '
:
' (ii.) in the Genitive, after a noun,
when tliey represent the possessive pronoun, as 17 ahj^tj/j ttjs,
'her mother:' 01 0iXot rav, 'their friends.'
It may be asked,—Is this a return to the earliest use of
6, f], TO as a pronoun 1
In Homer the pronominal 6 is commonly emphatic, and,
standing at the beginning of the clause, points a contrast
(a) between different persons or things, or (6) between dif-
ferent acts of the same person ; as II. i. 29, ttjv 8' eya ov \va-a>,
' but her I will not loose :' 189, ixepfxfjpi^ev\
ij o yt (pdayavov o^v
fpvaa-afxtvos • . •|Toos fief avaaTrjcrfifP, 6 8' 'ATpfi8r)v evapl^oi,
|rje
^oXov iraicreifv :* whether he for his part [o ye—he to whom
both courses were open] . . should make them rise, while he
slew [=and next slay] Atreides,—or should stay his wrath.'
Cp. Aeschylus, Suppl. 443, fj rolcnu tj toIs noXepov atpeaBai, 'to
levy war against these or those.' In Attic the pronominal use
is commonest [a) in the antithesis of 6 ptv, . . 6 8e, 'the one
—
the other:' (b) in the 6 8e which merely continues a narrative.
But we find also (c) such phrases as in Lysias, or. 19. § 59, kcu
poi KoXfi Tov Ka\ Tov, ' now please to call him [that man there],
and him ; ' Demosth. or. 9. § 68, eSet to koX to jtoi^o-qi koI to pf)
' The enclitic form sometimes follows the verb when the accented
form has preceded : rci (iStTf ra ;' Did you see those things there V By
a similar colloquial pleonasm, the accented form can follow another pro-
noun, when it stands immediately before the verb : toCto tirpewe va to
tl^tvprfs, 'you ought to have known that.'
298 Appendix.
noiTjaai, * we ought to have done this and that, and not have
done the other thing \'
In Modern Greek, besides the Attic uses (a) and (b), (c)
is also common : uTre to koi t6, ' he said so and so.' Here
there can be no doubt that an ancient colloquialism has
survived, and that t6 is the definite article. Apart from this
idiom, however, the Modern rov, etc., for the pronoun of the
third person, is better regarded as a curtailment of avrov, etc.
This view is confirmed by the following considerations
:
(i.) the enclitic rov, Ttjt, etc., can hardly be otherwise ex-
plained: (ii.) later classical prose exhibits no trace of a
return, beyond the Attic limit, to the earlier pronominal
use of 6, fj, TO : (iii.) Modern analogy shows that an oxytone
or perispomenon dissyllable might lose its first syllable, aa
when is TO becomes oto.
§ 20. The Personal Pronoun auT<Ss. In classical Greek thia
pronoun has two uses, (i.) It is the ordinary pronoun of the
third person when used substantival!y in any Case except the
Nominative: Spas avrov, ^yon see him.' (ii.) It is intensive,
expressing the notion ' self,' when used (a) substantivally in
the Nominative: ain-os 6pas, 'you yourself see i^ (6) adjectivally,
in any Case : Spas airov rbv tivbpa, 'you see the man himself.'
In Modern Greek use (i.) remains, but (ii.) is modified, (a)
In the Nominative, aiiros, meaning ' self,' can take after it the
enclitic genitive of the personal pronoun, and is then col-
loquially shortened to aros : thus :—
rlaio.
avTOS, S} ^aihwv, waptyivov So;-
Kparti (Kfivr) r^ Vl^ipf ?T ^i (pap-
paicov (irtev iv Ta) SfapaiTrjpicp, ^
dWov rov ijKovaas ;— ouros, Si
'ExficpaTts.
Modem Greek.
dros <rov, Si ^aiSaiv, inrrjffs tls
rbu 'SajKpaTrjv tKfivriv r^y iipipav
KarcL Tfjv oiroiav (irit to (papfiditt
(Is Tf)v (pvXaKTjV, fj dw^ Kaviva d\-
\ov TO i]Kova(s;—dros |tov, Si 'Ext-
HpaTfs,
' In the N.T. (omittins?, of course, the epic rod ycip ytvos laplv, quoted
from Aratus, in Acts xvii. 28) the pronominal use has much the same
Classical and Modern Greek. 299
Another form is auros 6 iSios : e. g. * they themselves do it,'
a\iro\ ot tStot TO Kafivovu. And where 'self implies 'alone' or
' unaided,' it can be expressed by fiovos fiou, trou, too, etc.
:
' wlio wrote it? I wrote it myself:' ris to eypa^e; novos (jlov
TO typaylra. (6) "When the pronoun is used adjectivally in
other Cases than the Nominative, it is usually no more than
a demonstrative : e. g. Spas alrhv t6v avBpoiTrov, ' you see that
man there:
' while, ' you see the man himself,' would be opus
aVTOV TOP iBiov.
Already in the Greek of N. T. the intensive use of airoi
is fluctuating. The proper force is found (e. g.) in Luke
vi. 42 : TtSts dvvaaai \ty(ii> t<o dS<X<^(» aov . , . auTOS rtjv ev to*
6(p6a\p^ (Tov doKov oi jSXtirav ; On the other hand, see Luke
xix. 2 : Koi I80V, avrjp ovopaTi KfiXovpivos ZnK)^a7os, Koi avTos rjv
dpxtT€\a)VT]s, Koi ovros rjv rrXovaios, Here avros cauiiot be ren-
dered, ' he himself;' it is at most an emphasized 'be,'='that same mnn,'—as in the Greek of to-day.
§ 21. 6 1810s ('the very one'), as the modem equivalent for
6 avTos (' the same ') requires notice here. 1810?, from the
pronoun-stem Ff (= Latin suus, se), means properly 'what
belongs to one's self.' In classical Greek iS«os means (i.)
* private ' as opposed to * public,' e. g. ttXovtos iSios ^ brjpoatos: :
(ii.) ' distinctive,' ' peculiar,' e. g. tx^i IBiav cf^vaw, it has a na-
ture distinct from that of others. From this latter use of
the word to mark individualkt/ the modern Greek use
springs : avros 6 idios, ' he, the very man'i:^' he himself.' ' Is
that the man of whom you spoke ?' tlvat airros 6 avdpconos ntpi
TOV oiroiov fifffTt; 'It is the same,' tlvai 6 ifiioj (= 'the very
man'). The use of liios as an emphatic possessive in the
N. T., which will be noticed presently, illustrates the trans-
ition.
limits as in classical prose : 1. e. it occurs in (a) 6 (xtv . . 6 54, (6) the
narrational 6 5«, (c) as a semi-colloquial demonstrative, e. g. Luke xvii.
24, aarpamovca (k t^j irn oipavov (is t^v iin' oi/pavov, 'flashing from
this to that region.'
300 Appendix.
§ 22. The Bpflexive Pronoun. This is commonly formed ia
Modern Greek by adding the Genitive of the personal pro-
noun, used as a possessive, to (uvtov declined with the
article ; ffkanrH rhv favTov Tou, ' he hurts the self of him'
(= himself), ^Xairrofifv rhv eavrov fias (for even with the plural
fias, aas, rav the singular of eavrov is retained), ' we hurt the
selves of us,' (= ourselves). The origin of this use can be
traced to the classical use of favrov as the reflexive, not only
of the third person, but also of the first and second (a primi-
tive use reasserting itself, as in Sauskrit sva serves for all
three persons) : e.g. (i.) First person. Soph. 0. T. 138, avroi
avTov [=e;:tavroC] tovt aTroa-Kedcb fxvcros '. Plat. Pliaedo p. 78 B,
hfl fj^as dvfpiadai eavTovi^= f]fias ai/Tovs] : (ii.) Second person,
Aeschylus, Agam. mo, d/i0l 6' amas [=<r«auT^f] Bpoeh'.
Demosth. Olynth. I. § 2, tiTrtp a-arriplas avT&v [= ti/i«i/ awrwv]
c})povTi(fT(. In the N. T. these uses are, for the plural, muchmore frequent than in classical Greek : as Acts xxiii. 14,
dufffepaTiaafjifv iavTOvs= fjnai av'^ovs'. Philipp. ii. 12, rfjv iavTutv
^^zvfuav avrav] acorrfpiav Karfpyd^faOf. For the Singular num-
ber the N. T. has no example where the reading is unques-
tioned; see, however, John xviii. 34, Galat. v. 14. In classical
Greek, too, the instances of the singular are usually doubtful
(in prose), e. g. Xen. Mem. i. 4. 9 ; ii. 6. 35 ; where for tavrov
a variant is (jfavTov or a-avrov. This is no accident. In the
singular number it was easy to distinguish the ordinary from
the emphatic reflexive ; e. g. * You hide yourself,' Kpimreis
atavTov :* blame yourself (and not others),' ere alrbv [or avrov
ere] atTtw. But this distinction was less easy with the plural
forms ly/xwv avrwv, vpS>v avrodp. Hence it was convenient, in the
plural number, to use iavroiv for the non-emphatic reflexive
of the first and second persons, reserving ^/xcoji avrav, vpav
avrwv, for the expression of emphasis.
Modern Greek goes one step further. In /3XdjrT« tov iavrov
Tov, ' he hurts the self of him,* we see that the word iavrov
has now come to be used as a noun, expressing the abstract
Classical and Modern Greek, 30
1
idea of 'self,'—the language of daily life thus bearing an
unconscious mark of metaphysical reflection. It is no longer
enough, then, to say, as Plato could say, ipcoranfv eavrovs,
' we ask selves :' it is necessary to be more explicit ; ipcoranev
TOP eavTov fjias, ' we ask tJie selves of us.'
§ 23. Possessive Pronouns. Classical Greek has three forms;
{a) with the genitive of the personal pronoun, where there
is no emphasis, 6 irar^p aov, 'tliy father;' {b) where a slight
emphasis or contrast is implied, 6 a-bs Trarrip, ' thy father' (and
not another's);
(c) for strong emphasis, 6 creavrov (or 6 <t6s
avTov) naTT]p, ' thy oum father,'
The general tendency of later Greek was habitually to
use (a), to drop (6), and to vary (c). In the N. T. «V"?
(most frequently used by St. John) and aos are I'are, except
where there is an emphasis somewhat more distinct than the
classical use necessarily implies ; while ^nertpos, vptrepos,
occur not more than ten times each. The strongly emphatic
possessive (of all three persons) is expressed in the N. T.
by iStos, e.g. I Cor. iv. 12, K07nS)fj.fv, tpya^ofifvoi rais ISlais
[= classical rah rjneTepais avrcov] X^P'^h' with OUT own hands.'
And 1810s, like the adjectival possessive in older Greek, can
be further strengthened by the genitive of the personal
pronoun, 2 Pet. iii. 3, ras I8ias aircbv fTTtdvfiias.
In Modern Greek form (a) is the same, except that instead
of avTov, avTjjv, avrav the enclitics, tov, rrjs, twv, are used ; and
instead of 17/xwi', vp.o>v, the enclitics pm, aai. As regards (6), efios,
aos, fiptrepos, vperepos, a(f)eTepos, have disappeared from all but
the higher literary style. For (c) IdiKos ^ is used, e. g. fj ISikt)
fiov oIkm, ' my own house ;' to IBiku p.ag {a-as, rmv) jStjSX/a, ' our
(your, their) own books.' Like the classical, 6 e/xdj, &c.,
6 IdiKos expresses 'mine,' &c. ; e.g. rivos elvai to /St/SXiW;
* It is hardly necessary to remind the reader that ISik6s (very com-
monly pronounced iSiKos), a form of tlSiKus, ' special' {dSos, species, stem
/^i5), has nothing to do with tSios, 'own' (pronoun-stem fe). The use of
iSiKot Sia=pTO^rius occurs as early as Leo Philosophus (ctVc. 895 A.D.).
3©2 Appendix,
' "Whose is the book V ' It is theirs,' (Ivm to 18ik6v rav. Notethat in later Greek the unemphatic possessive is constantly
added where in classical Greek it is omitted. Thus, 'Layon thy hand' would be sufficiently expressed in classical
Greek by enida rfjv x*'/'"- But in Luke iv. ii we have
eTTi^er r^v x«pa o'ov : and SO in Modern Greek.
§ 24. Relative Pronouns, (i) ooris. In classical Greek,
while the ordinary simple relative is os, oam implies the class
to which the subject belongs. Hence (a) where the antecedent
is indefinite, o(rTjj=' whoever;' (6) where the antecedent is
definite, it has a causal force : ovtos. Sans rovavra (iraBtv, i\iov
iariv li^ios, ' this man deserves pity, seeing that he [lit. ' as
one who'] has suffered so much,' Lat. qui tanta perpessus sit.
In the N. T. oa-ns is rare except in the nominative (though
on, accus. neut., arid etos Stov occur), and never introduces
an indirect question, ris being preferred. And already wesee the tendency to use Sans as the simple relative : no
natural interpretation can make it more in Luke ii. 14, tis
TToKiv Aavfi8, ijris KoXflrai Bij^Xee/x. Modern Greek uses oans
(a) indefinitely: on koi &v 6177.7, 'whatever he may say;'
{b) for OS, chiefly in nom. masc. and fem., but not neut.
:
6 avr]p Sorts, t] yvvr] rJTis, to iraibiov Sntp (not o rt). The dis-
use of Off in common speech is characteristic; so simple a
form ceased to satisfy the desire of em|)hasis.
§ 25. (2) 6 oiroTos. The adoption of this pronoun as an
ordinary relative in Modern Greek evinces a similar loss of
precision. Compare these two forms, (a) tpya a Xeyetr, ' deeds
which you mention,* and [b) tpya onola \eytis, * deeds such as
you mention.' Obviously (b) might serve, in a given case, as
a loose equivalent for (a); e. g. Pausanias, i. xiv. i, to. S« «avTov oiTola Xeytrat ypdi/^w, 7rape\s onoaov (Is Arju'mrjp fx** ^°^'
\6yov, ' I will record such stories as are [actually] told re-
garding him, omitting so much of the story as [=that defi-
nite part which] relates to De'iope.' So far only does old
Gtreek countenance the modern use of owolos. But Neo-Hel-
Classical and Modern Greek, 303
lenic seeks to compensate for laxity by emphasis, and so.
]trcfixiug the article, uses 6 orrolot^.
It is probable that the Modern Greek use of 6 imoio^
as an ordinary relative was encouraged by the analogy of
the Italian il quale. The latter (unlike the French le quel,
when relative) can be used even when no preposition pre-
cedes, merely as a relative of greater precision or emphasis
;
e.g., 'i beni di questa vita, che 1' uomo desidera;' where
i quali {^=Ta onoia) might replace the ambiguous che, if it
was desired to mark that the antecedent is beni and not
vita. Cp. Shakspeare, Richard II. i. i. 90, 'Nobles . . . the
which he hath detained;
' though elsewhere Shakspeare usu-
ally has 'the which' only after a preposition, like le quel.
In 6 onoioi, il quale, le quel, * the which,' the addition of the
article converts an indefinite into a definite relative''.
§ 26. (3.) The popular use of ottou (commonly written
onoii), or even of ttoC, for the relative of both numbers and
all cases, is a curious example of false analogy; e. g. rh xpovia
rrov (iT(pa(T(, ' the years which he has passed;
' tov avbpa ottov
fl8a, ' the man whom I have seen.' The origin of the use
is manifest. Cp. Aristophanes, Aves 1300, j'Soi/ Se . . . ndvTfs
H(\r],I
oiroo xt\i,8(ov ^v ris tfnrtnoiTjfXfvri, * all were singing
songs, wh^e [^=in which^ a swallow was introduced.' Here
OTTOV= eV oh. Beginning from sentences of this type, the
use of OTTOV would be gradually extended in the vernacular.
* Even for this we can find at least the semblance of a parallel in old
Greek: Dem. De Cor. §146, awiffaivt di avr^ rw itoXiii^ Kparovvri
Tovy httoiovaZriiroff vfifLS (^entfjiiTfTt arpaTrjyovs . . . KOKoiraOfiv, ' it was
his misfortune that, while he was conquering all generals, good or bad,
whom you sent out, he was disabled.' If rovi agrees with dvoiovaSrinoTf
here, then the article is used as in Modem Greek. But it may be
explained as the article followed by a relative clause = roi/s owoiotdTjvoTe
(^rj\6ov arpaTTjyoL See above, on the Definite Article, I. § i6.
* In Winter's Tale, iv. 4. 539, we find 'the' with 'whom:' 'your
mistress, from the whom I see there's no disjunction.' Tliis is as strange
as diro T^j ^i would be, and, if not unique, is very rare.
3^4 Appendix.
Suppose, e.g., such a phrase as to. npdynaTa onov (VTvxd, 'the
matters in which he prospers.' Here onov might be con-
ceived as representing an accusative of respect, a : and thus
the way would be prepared for its use as a substitute for
the accusative in other contexts also. In English, ' the menas (=whom) he met,' happens to be a lower vulgarism
than the parallel orrov of Modern Greek ; but it shows howpopular use welcomes an unvarying form which saves the
trouble of declining the relative.*
III. The Noun.
Number.
§ 27. The Xoun, like the Verb, has no longer a DualNumber. The Dual is seen most fully developed in the
older Asiatic (or properly 'Aryan') languages of the Indo-
European family. In classical Greek it is already infrequent,
being seldom employed save where the notion of a pair or
pairs is prominent : thus Ismene to Antigone (Sophocles,
Ant. 58), fjiova 8fi va) XeXfifjififpa, (we two, left quite alone)...
yvvaiKe ...oil fiaxovyiiva '. yet even there the verbs are plural.
The plural is indeed constantly combined with the dual
;
op. Pindar, N. x. 64, (^iKtadav Koi . . . ifiria-avro. In the Hel-
lenistic of the N. T. the dual never occurs, either of nounor verb (except in bvo). In Latin it remains only in duo,
ambo : as the oldest Teutonic dialects also have a dual only
in the pronouns of the ist and 2nd persons.
§ 28. Neuter Plurals with Plural Verb.—This, the regular
Modern construction, occurs in classical Greek chiefly (i)
when the neuter noun denotes (a) living creatures, as Thuc.
i. 58, TO. riKt] vTTfa-xovTo, 'the authorities promised;' or (b)
inanimate objects which are personified, as Herod, ii. 96, ra
irXoia . . . dva tov irorafiov oil dvvavrai TtXteiv, ' the boats cannot
* Cp. Shaks. J, G. i. 2. 33, ' That gentleness as I was wont to have;*
Rich. III. ii. I. 33, ' With hate in those where I expect most love.'
Classical and Modern Greek. 305
make head against the current.' (2) When plurality is em-
phasized, Xen. Anah. i. 7- 17. ^ovfpa ^aav . . . Ixvt) ttoWo. In
Hellenistic the same exceptions hold good ; as (i) Jas. ii. 19,
TO dai/xovia iriaTtvova-t /cat (ppiaaova-i : (2) John xix. 31, iva
Kartayaa-iv ovTuiv to. a-KeXt). On the other hand, the noimal
usage still remains; John xix. 31, tva nfj fxtivr) ra a-afMra.
The influence of Latin must have tended to abolish in later
Greek the peculiarly Hellenic use, which would come to be
felt as ungrammatical ; and thus the exception, never rare,
at last became the rule.
Case.
§ 29. An 'inflectional' (or 'amalgamating') language, like
Greek, expresses different relations of the noun by adding
different endings to an unchanging stem; e.g. stem Trartp,
nomin. irartp-s {narrjp), gen. naHp-os, etc. lu the youth and
prime of a language, these case-endings are still felt to be
so expressive that many special relations can be denoted by
them without further aid. Thus in classical Greek it was
still possible to say, rovrav eyeVfro, 'EXAaSt olKei, meaning, 'he
sprang from these,' ' he lives in Greece.' Even then, how-
ever, it was becoming more usual to say, ex Toirmv iyevtro, iv
'EXAaSt otVei. In post-classical Greek, as the instincts which
first shaped the language lose their freshness, the recourse
to prepositions becomes more frequent.
§ 30. This tendency was most strongly marked in regard
to the Dative, because this case had taken to itself the
lai'gest variety of meanings. The process which finally led
to the almost total disuse of the Dative in Modern Greek
is curious and instructive.
The meanings of the Dative in classical Greek are of
two classes : those which in Sanskrit are expressed by the
Locative or the Instrumental,— cases of which Greek pre-
serves only a few vestiges,—and those which were originally
special to the Dative.
X
3o6 Appendix.
I. The Locative denoted (a) the flace in which, or (h)
the moment when. Greek has the locative suffix in such
a dative as nai8-i, and such an adverb as oIkoi. 2. The
Instrumental denoted (a) that with which a thing is done
—the instrument proper; (6) the thing or person which
accompanies an action. This 'sociative' use may have been
the earlier one, from which the special ' instrumental ' sense
was derived. In Sanskrit the Instrumental has two suffixes,
a (seen in Sfxa, rdx^a), and bhi, (/3i)j-0i, oxfs-(j>i).
The Greek Dative, doing duty for these lost cases, could
express, i. (a) place where; 'EXXa6i, in Greece : {b) point of
time; r^ Trptiri; rjixepa: 2. (a) instrument; Kreivfi Tw ^L(p€i
:
(b) circumstance ; dndaXovTo alro'is ittttois, they perished, with
their very horses,—' horses and all.'
Apart from these locative and instrumental meaBings,
two others were originally special to the Dative.
I. It denoted tfie object to which verbal action passes on/
whether the verb has also an immediate object in the accu-
sative, as 80s TovTo (fio'i, or is ' intransitive,' as jj-eXdfo) noKa,
2. It denoted the person concerned or influenced, as dyadov
(K(iva>, 'good for him:' vikq rois Kpnais, 'he conquers, in the
opinion of the judges.'
§ 31. In the N. T. the Dative is still used for all those
four meanings in which it replaced the Locative and the
Instrumental, i. (a) place ; though this, as in classical Greek,
is very rare : uroixtiv rois ixvfcn, ' in the tracks,' Rom. iv. 12:
(6) time; tj rpLTT] rjntpa, Matth. xx. 19 : 2. (a) instrument;
ifidnTUTfv v8aTi, Acts i. 5 : (6) circumstance; npoaevxpiiivr) ukq-
XirTTTfo Trj Ke({)aXfj, 2 Cor. X. 30.
On the other hand, there is a tendency to use some sub-
stitute for the Dative precisely in those meanings which
were originally peculiar to it. Thus: i. Dative of object
to which the action passes on : for Xeyta Ttvi, Xeyw irpos nva
(frequent); for iroXtpe'iv rivi, noXfuav ptrd nvos, Rev. xii. 7'
2. Dative of person concerned or influenced : iXerjpoavvas
Classical and Modern Greek. 307
jrot^o-a)!/ lis TO (6vos nov, Acts xxiv. 1 7 : ijptaev ivwniov toC
nXridovs, Acts vi. 5 : tvSoKf'iv ftr rn/a, ' to be well pleased in
him/ 2 Pet. i. 17 (cp. tvBoKf'iv rols yiyvofitvois, Polyb. iv. 22).
§ 32. In Modern Greek this tendency is further developed,
until in every relation the classical Dative has been super-
seded. This will be best shown by examples :
—
1. Locative. Classical olKmv (eV) ry 77oX€t=Modern oIko)v us
TTjv iroKiv.
2. Temporal. C rfj TpiTj] ^;iepa= M. t^v rpiTrfv ^ptpav.
3. Instrumental (^proper). C. rvmovrfs toIs Sopao-t^M. ktv-
TTovvTfs Sta TQ>v Sopdrav. Causal. C. e^^dcpdrja-av rfj avapxiq,
'they were injured hy their anarchy '=M. i^\. in. ttjs dvapxias.
4. Circumstantial. C. pia Spfifj, ^ with one impulse '= M.
pera /itas opprjs, Or pe plav opprjv, C eVl npoex^i, * he has the
advantage in one thing '= M. «« iv Trpoe'x".
5. Dative of object to which action passes on. C. iiSapi rl
Ttci^iM. 8i8(t) Tt Trpds Tti/a, or ets rij/a. C. avvfaTadr] Kupo), 'he
was introduced to Cyrus '=M. a-vvfarddr) irpos rov Kvpov, C.
6p6(Tas w'l-v, ' having sworn to us '= M. opoaas els T]pds.
6. Dative of])erson concerned. C. XPW'^H-^^ w'^"^^^ ' XPV'^^'
pov (Is rjpas. C. Koivos 7rafft= M. koivos 81 (or (Is) oXovs. C<Tvp(i)fpei rfi (rTpaTia= ^. avpfpepei 8ia (or fls) ttjv a-Tparidv.
Hence in Modern Greek, as now spoken, the Dative is
rarely heard, except in poi, a-oi, ra, t§, toIs, toIs, and a few
common phrases, such as (vroaovrco ('meanwhile'), e'v Kaipw,
(' in season,') eV 'EXXaSt, etc.
§ 33. The Accusative had already supplanted the Genitive
or Dative after some verbs in Hellenistic Greek : e.g. Korabi-
KdCfu> rivd (for classical nvos), Matth. xii. 7 ' eyeva-aro to vB(op
(for classical tov vSotos), John ii. 9 : TrpotrrdTTfiv nvd (for Tivt),
Act. Apocr. 172. When a fine sense for language is failing,
it is natural to use the direct Accusative to express any
object which verbal action affects, and so to efface the differ-
ence between 'transitive' and 'intransitive' verbs: as in
the English vulgarism, ' he wrote them to expect him,' or
X 2
3o8 Appendix.
the German 'etwas widersprechen.' Thus in Modern Greek
we sometimes find a simple Accusative after im^ovXtvco, uko-
XovdS), npoardcTaci), TiapayyiWo) (rtva va Ka^rj rt). And this ia
very common when t6u, tovs (as pronoun) precedes the verb,
e.g. TOP eirra, - 1 said to him :' orav tovs ho6^ itpoaTayi], ' when-
ever the order is given them.'
§ 34. Modern Greek has retained the classical use of the
Genitive to a far greater extent than that of the Dative;
though in many relations a preposition is now added where
the simple Case formerly sufficed. As regards the ordinary
colloquial use, these points may be noted :
—
1. After Comparative Adjectives ano or irapd is used with
the Accusative: see below § 35, and cp. § 41.
2. A noun of number or material can be followed by the
Nominative :' three myriads of soldiers,' rpth iMvpiaSes arpa-
Tiwrui :' a glass of water,* (v Trorfipi vtpo,
3. The Genitive of price can be represented by the Accusa-
tive :' he sold the horse for 500 francs,' inuiKrja-f to aXoyov
nevTOKoaia (f)pdyKa.
4. Words of fulness, etc., can take the Accusative with or
without fif {(itra) :* he fills the glass with wine,' yf/xi'fet t6
noTTjpiov (/if) Kpaai :' a house-full of people,' oiKta yeparr] (/xf)
dv6pa)7rovs. The simple Accusative is Hellenistic: Phil. i. 11,
TTfTrXrjpapfvoi Kapnov 8i.Kaio(rvv7]s I Rev. ^vii. 3, drjpiop ... yt/xov
ofo/xara (v. 1. ouopdravj.
5. The Genitives rod, a-ov, pov, with their enclitic forms, are
sometimes used for the Dative : tov to elna, ' I told him
so :' du>cre pov ^(i>pl, ' give me bread.'
Comparison of Adjectives.
§ 35. The Comparative can be formed with jt\(ov
and the positive, as jrX«oi' ^(^euossr^e^atoTtpos. This form
(with /ioXXoi') occurs in old Greek, as Eur. Med. 485, irpd-
dvpos paXXov tj aocpaTipa. The proper Comparative can be
Classical and Modern Greek. 309
strengthened by nXfov, as irktov ^(^auWtpos. This, too, is
classical; Plato, Laivs 781 A, XadpmoTfpov fxaWop koi iniKKo-
noirepov: and so in Hellenistic, 2 Cor. vii. 13, i:(pt(T<TOT€pas
paWop,
Constructions, (i.) The Genitive is not ordinarily used
after the Comparative in Modern Greek, except in the case
of the enclitic personal pronouns, as (fipopipoiTepoi pov {a-ov,
Tov, pas, (ras, Ta)«'). (ii.) Instead of it, dno is commonly used
with the Accus., as TrXeoj' KaWirepos dno rovs oXXovf, ' better
than the others.' (iii.) Or napd with Accus. ; this last is
classical, Thuc. i. 23, «'KXei>/^fij nvKvortpai irapa to . . . ppijpovtv-
6p,€Pa (more frequent in comparison with anything recorded)
:
and Hellenistic, Heb. ix. 23, Kpurrocn Bva-ian napa ravras. (iv.)
From this easily arose the Romaic and Modern use of irapd
as= the disjunctive rj, especially with a relative clause; thus
in Rom. xiii. 11, (^iyyvrepop fjpaip f) aarripia) ^ ore (TTiarevaapfP,
could be expressed by napa ore (Tnartvaapfp.
§ 36. For the Superlative, the classical form is now used
only when the sense is absolute, e.g. aoipodTaros, 'very wise;'
when it is relative, the Comparative is used with the definite
article, as 6 ao<pOi>T(pos dno BXovs, ' the wisest of all.* The
germ of this use is already seen in Hellenistic, as Matth. xi. 1 1,
6 Be piKpoTfpoi (P Tji /SacrtXei'a tov oiipavov=he who is less (than
the refct)=' the least.' Cp. Lucian, Bis Accus. 1 1, ovros Kparup
ibo^tp OS &v pfydko(p(ov6T€pos uvtwi* rj Koi 6paavTepos, * who was
most blatant and brazen among them;' Diogenes Laertius,vi,5,
tp(x)Tr]6t\s tI paKapiu>Tfpov tp dvdpanoiSy * what was the Iiappiest
lot,' (where it would be a false refinement to render, ' com-
paratively happy.')
KUMEBALS.
§ 37. The plassical forms of the cardinal numbers from 1
3
to 19 are, Tpia-KaiSfKa, Te(T(rapeaKai8fKa (rfaaapanaiSfica.), nepjfKal-
htKa, fKKaiheKa, firraKaibtKa, oKTWualdfKa, fpvtaKaideKa, The Mo-
dein forms are, SeKarptlr (neut. -Tpia), htKoriaaapes (neut. -a),
3 TO Appendix.
ieKanfirre, tfKai^, BfKafiTTa, SeKaoKToa, bfKatvvla. Tlie N. T. has
8fKaTf(r(rap(s, btKantvTf, btKa kcii okto). These forms, in post-
classical Mss., may often have been due to transcribers
writing out in full the numbers denoted by letters : but
their frequency in the LXX., and in the Tabulae Heracle-
enses, show that, at least in some dialects, they were cun-ent
much before our era *.
§ 38. The Distributive Numeral can be expressed in Mo-
dern Greek by repeating the cardinal, e. g. nr^yaivow hvo hm,
' they go two by two ' (classical ' ava bio). So in Hellenistic,
Mark vi. 7> rjp^aro avTovs drroarTfXkeip bvo bio : though cp. dva
bio, Luke ix. 3; Kara bio, Ephes. V. 33, etc. As in Mark vi.
39, 40, we have avaKXivai trvniroaia a-vfinocria (by messes), dve~
iTftTov irpacrtai rrpaaial {by companies), so in Modern Greek some
popular phrases are modelled on this distributive form; as
ra^ibdovv yioKb yioKo, ' they voyage along the coasts ' (* coast
coast ').
IV. Prepositions.
§ 39. It is probable that Prepositions were originally noun-
cases, which were first used adverbially and afterwards
joined to nouns. Thus napd may have been a locative case,
meaning 'at the side;' and Trapa toTarai, 'he stands at the
side,' was probably an older type of expression than rrapa
TovTw la-Tarai, ' he stands at the side of this man.' Classical
Greek is remarkable for its precision in the use of prepo-
sitions according as they take the Genitive, the Dative,
or the Accusative. This precision was due, not to inhe-
rent virtues of the preposition itself, but to a fine feeling
for the powers of the several case-endings in combination
* Lightfoot on Galat. i. 18.
* In Aesch. Pen. 981, pvpla ftvpia irtpiraffT&v, I would not render,
* counting by tens of thousands,' as if the repetition had a strictly dis-
tributive force (schol. dvcL pvpiovs), but 'counting by myriads, by
myriads,' a passionate iteration. Cp. fA.tir€i, lAtircs just afterwards.
Classical and Modern Greek. 3 1
1
with it. See, e.g., Herodotus, viii. 99, ovk ovrat 8e irepl tuv
yr\uy a^SofxfPoi ravra oi Ylipcrai iiroUvv, a>s TTCpi auTU —cp^'H5«-
fxaivovTfs' Kal ircpi flepaas fttv rjv ravra rov ivavra utra^v xpovov.
Here Trtpi has a different shade of meaning with each of the
three cases : nep\ t^ibv, simply ' about the ships :' nepl avr^
Sfp^r}= ^ close around Xerxes himself (as clothes are put on
TTfpl ra a-oipart), i. 6, (fearing) for the ^^er^^cmaZ safety of
Xerxes : nepl Iltpaas, ' moving around the Persians,' i. e. up
and down their country,= a vague 'in Persia.'
As the Greek language gradually lost a keen sense for the
force of the case-endings it began to lose its old delicacy of
discernment in the uses of the prepositions. Those uses
which in later or Modern Greek diverge from the classical
are mostly instances of extension by false analogy; i.e. the
later use has been suggested by some apparently similar, but
really different, old use.
§ 40. irpo. In ti\6ov npo rpiZv irStv, ' I came three years
ago,' the use of npo is not classical. Herod, vii. 130 has,
indeed, irpo iroWov i(^v\a^avro, ' they were on their guard long
beforehand ;' but no classical writer thus uses Ttpo in nu-
merical statements of time : e.g. the classical equivalent of
npo rpiav iro>v was irporepov rpiaiv erfai. But Latin had ante
centum annos as= centum abhinc annos, '100 years ago;'
ante diem decimum quum rem<= decimo die antequam venit.
Greek writers of the Common Dialect adopted the Latin
construction for irp6: e.g. Plutarch, Mor. i. 475 A, npo bvoiv
rjHtpSiv ^ (rfXfvra : still their Greek instinct comes out in the
addition of a second Genitive, as Plutarch, Mor. ii. 7 1 7 C, npo
pias fiptpas rS)v yfPtffXiwv^pia fjpepa npo rS>v y. : and ?0 in
Hellenistic, John xii. 1, npb 1^ fipfpeHv rov ndaxa^e^ rjpepais
npo rov nd(T)(a.
§ 41. Compare a Latinizing use of dir<5 in later (and modem)Greek ; Plutarch, Philopoemen 4, dnb arablatv tlKoai. T^y nokeuis,
'at a distance of 20 stades from the city:' John xi. 18, iyyvs
Tuv 'lepoaoXvfKov ws dno aradiav bfKanevre '. as Livy, xxiv. 46,
312 Appendix.
cum a quingentis fere passibus castra 2)osuisset : the nearest
classical analogue is perhaps a use of «, Xen. Anab. in. 3. 15,
dtuKwi' fK To^ov pv/iaros, * pursuing at the distance of a bow-
shot' (behind).
In Modern Greek ano often stands for xmo of the agent;
this is also Hellenistic, James v. 4, fiia-Oos ... 6 airtarfprjuevos
d(f)* vixa>v, 'kept back 6y you;' or for V7r6 of the motive, as
Matth. xiv. 26, dno tov (f>6^ov (Kpa^av, 'from fear.' Again, cmo
sometimes supplants -napa, as to eXa^a ano rovrmv: this, too,
is Hellenistic, Mark xv. 45, yvovs dnb tov KfVTvpiavos. In
classical Greek, an6 would here= ' on the part of (more
than 'from') : cp. Sophocles, Track. 471, dno ifxov KTrjaet xa/""-
The vulgar Modern use of otto with Accus. was at least as
old as Theoplianes (750-800 A.D.) ; and when (for example)
vuipofiai drto to <f>6pefia expresses Xa/i/Sdi'O/iat tov (popfjixaTOi, ' I
take hold of the coat,' we see the same tendency as in the
N. T. to ufee dno in a periphrasis for the simple Genitive.
§ 42. 8td in Modern Greek supplies curious instances of
false analogy. With the Genitive, in classical Greek, it
denoted the agency/, as Xeyti 8ia npea^evTov, ' he says by (the
mouth of) an envoy.' In Modern, it also stands for the
instrumental Dativ6 ; see p. 205, where to'is bopaai rCnTovrfs
(Plutarch) becomes Krvncovrfs 8ia t<ov dopdrav (Rangabe) : and
so Ttj TTj^twcp nfpi^aXav (Plut. Caes. S)= nfpiKaXv'^as 8ia r^r
Tti^fpvov (Rangab6). In such a phrase as Sophocles, Oed. Col.
470, fit* oarlav x^^P^" Biyav, hid is properly 'between:' but
Hellenistic gives nearer analogies, as 3 John 13, Sta piXavos
Koi KoXap-ov ypdcfieiv.
With Accusative, hid now='for,' replacing the classical
dativus commodi vel incomm/)di, koKov bC r]pds (^= fipiv), 'good
for us.* This came easily from the classical use, as inpdxBr)
Si ^pds, ' it was done on our account.' More strangely,
hid with Accus. of space or place no longer means ' thi-ough,'
but (in another sense) 'for;' e.g. dv€xa>pria-f hia ttjv TaXXlav
means, not ' he started (travelling) through France,' but ' he
Classical and Modern Greek. 3 1
3
started for France.' The former sense would require the
Genitive.
§ 43. //fTa, in its shortened form jie, with Accus., has ac-
quired one new sense ; Koi fxf o\t]v rmv rrjv dvvafiiv, ' notwith-
standing all their power :' /loXoi/oVt (= ^e oXov on), ' although :
'
cp. the English, 'for all that they commanded him, he went
not.' In classical Greek irapa with Accus. ('in comparison
with ') most nearly approached this sense.
Note that /le takes the Accusative only, and always means
(in some sense) ' with! The full form (lerd means ' vnth
'
when it governs the Genitive, and ^ after' when it governs
the Accusative, as in classical Greek.
§44. UTTO with Accus. now means 'under:* (a) locally,
even where 'motion' or 'extension' is not implied, the old
use with Dative having ceased: cp. John i. 49, ovra xmh ttjv
<TVK^v. (6) Figuratively: cp. Matth. viii. 9, exo)!/ vtt* ifxavrov
(TTpariiiTas. The figurative use is classical : Xen. Gyr. viii.
8. 5> OTToloi Tivfv yap av ol npoaTarai Sxri, TOioiiroi kuI ol wr'
avTovs . . . yiyvovrai. But it became regular first in later
Greek : cp. Ttrayfjifvos ino toi' ^acrikea UToXtfiaiov in inscrip-
tions of third and second century b. c. ^
§ 45. The use of Kaxd with Genitive slightly exceeds the
Attic limit, (a) We have Kara x^opos ofip-ara TT^^at, ' on the
earth,' etc., in Homer ; but in Attic Kara x^o^os Kpxmrfiv is
'to hide under ground' (Soph. Ant. 24), and ol kuto. yris are
'the buried' (Xen. Gyr. iv. 6. 5). For ir'nnu> Kara yrjs, 'on
the ground,' a classical writer would have said rather tVl
y^v (Plato, Phaedr. 248 c), or els yfjv, id. Folit. 272 E, Plut.
ii. 187 c: we find also eVi (and irpoi) yrj. (b) In the hostile
sense, 'against,' Kara in good Attic writers is figurative, nut
literal : e. g. X/ym, 8iKd^a> Kara Tivos '. but noXtpoi Tiv'i, ini (or
TTpos) Tiva. Modern idiom would, however, tolerate ndXtpat
Kara, ripoi : as in Clemens Alexandrinus, 871, KaranoXepdv
governs a Genitive instead of the classical Accusative.
* Cp. Journal of Hellenic Studies, i. 29.
3^4 Appendix.
§ 46. trapd in later Greek came to be used with Genitive,
for VIVO, after passive verbs (as a-no also was),—its proper
force, ' from the side of/ ' on the part jof,' being extenuated;
e.g. fypdcf)!] Trap' avrov. In the N. T. there is no strong
example : but cp. Acts xxii. 30, n KaTrj-yopdrm napa rav
""lovhalav, where 'on the part of nearly='hy.' Even on
the title-page of a Greek book (date, i860) we may see
(instead of the ordinary vivo) napa 'laavpov.
§ 47. The use cis with Accus., for classical iv with Dat.,
was first allowed only where motion was clearly implied,
as Xen. Cyr. i. 2. 4, fls rag eavrtov x<^pos Trdpaa-iv. Then,
with the growing tendency to find substitutes for the Dative,
it was extended to instances in which the idea of motion
was at least rather remote. See Mark xiii. 16 \ 6 fh tov
aypov &v, compared with Matth. xxiv. 18, 6 tv ra dyp^:
John i, 18, 6 i>u fls tov koKitov tov irarpos : Acts viii. 40, tvpedrj
fIf "A^Qjroi' : xix. 2 2, (ireaxf XP°*"^^ **'* i^" 'Ao-tW (where surely
we cannot reader \for Asia ') : xxv. 4, rripua-dai t6v UavXov
fls Kai(rdptiav. Arrian (circ. 140 A.D.), Anab. ii. 22. 5, oaoi
aTTOfjuxxoi TJa-av es rrjv 'AXe^dvbpfiav. Already Diodorus Siculus
(40 B.C.) could say (v. 84), Siarpl^av els rds v^(rovs. Cp. the
German ' er ist ins Haus,' the Scottish intill or into, and the
provincial English to=' &t.'
V. The Verb,
Middle Voice.
§ 48. The Aorist was the only tense for which Greek had
a form peculiar to the Middle Voice (as fXva-dfirjv) : in all
other tenses the 'Middle' forms could also be used with a
Passive sense. The Hellenistic Greek of the N. T. retains
* In Mark x. 10, (Is ri^v oliciav is a well-supported v.l. for kv rrj oiKia
imjpuTrjaav,
Classical and Modern Greek. 315
the distinctively Middle form of the Aorist where it was well
established by familiar use ; as fKOfuffafirjv, jjrrjadfirjv, e<3!)vXa-
^dfirjv. But already in the N. T. there is a marked tendency
to use the Passive form of the ' first ' (or ' weak ') Aorist in a
Middle sense ; as anfKplQr), ' he answered ' (though airiKpivuixriv
also occurs) : diaKpidrjvai, 'to doubt, Matt, xxi, 21 : TanfivaOijvaty
' to humble oneself,' i Pet. v. 6. In Modern Greek this usage
has become fixed, the Passive form of the Aorist being almost
invariably used instead of the Middle : e. g. e(TKf(f)6T], ' he con-
sidered : ' iaroxatrBrj (which now means ' he perceived,' not
'conjectured'): hvkiOj], 'he washed:* tvi^dt}, 'he washed his
hands:' iKpfpaaOr) (not only 'he was hanged' but also) 'he
hanged himself.'
§ 49. As to those forms which the classical Middle Voice
had in common with the Passive, the Middle use has not dis-
appeared, but it has been restricted.
In classical Greek the Middle Voice has three main uses,
(i) The subject acts on himself: as Xoverai, 'he washes him-
self.' This rare use was practically confined to a few verbs
expressing common daily acts. As a rule, the aid of the
reflexive pronoun was needed: e. g. 'he kills himself ' was not
cmoKTfivfTai, but dnoKrdpd eavrov (Plato, Phaed. 6 1 e). Cp.
Xenophon, Cl/r02). iii. I. 25, o* ^e" piirrovPTfs eavrovs, ot 8' dnay-
xdpevoi, oi 8' dnoaipaTTopfvoi, ' some throwing themselves from
heights, some hanging themselves, some cutting their own
throats:' where eavrovs, joined to the Active Participle, also
supplements the force of the Middle Participles. Herodotus,
iii. 119, Tw ^aaiKfi deiKvvaa-i icovTovs, Plato, Rejmhlic 393 c,
(I prjSapov favrov dnoKpimToiTo 6 TioiT]TT]s. In the Hellenistic Greek
of the N. T. a few Middle forms have, as in classical Greek, the
direct reflexive force : so Xovta-dai, KpvirTfdBat, ditdyxfoBai, ' to
wash, hide, hang oneself.' But there is a distinct tendency to
substitute the Active Voice with the reflexive pronoun even in
cases where the Middle Voice could have been used without
a pronoun. It may be allowed that the periphrasis is oftea
3i6 Appendix.
emphatic: thus in John xxi. i8, fftowues (rtavrov is contrasted
with ftXXos o-e fcirret ^ No such emphasis, however, is present
(e. g.) in John xiii. 4, iyeipfrat (K Tov Sfinvov, Koi TiGrfo-i ra ifiaTia'
Koi Xa^wv 'KiVTiov bu^aaev iavrSv. Cp. xi. 33, fPf^pifXTjaaTo tm
irPfCfiari Koi erapa^ev iavTOV.
Modern Greek often makes a similar use of the Active
Voice with the reflexive pronoun. On the other hand, like
Hellenistic, it retains the direct reflexive force in several
Middle forms, as 'Kovopai, vitrrofiai, Krevi^ofiai (' to comb the
hair'), x'f^vmovpai (^=KTvirovp.ai=TiiiTTopai), as not only 'lambeaten,' but also:=/crL'7rci) ipavrov, 'I beat myself:' innos Xverai
Koi ipfvyti, 'the horse looses himself (=Xvet tavrov) and runs
away.'
§ 50. (2) A second principal use of the Middle Voice in
classical Gi'eek is where the subject acts, no longer directly
on himself, but in soine way /or himself: as aiVftrat tovto,
' he asks this for himself:' ridtrai. vopovs, 'he makes laws for
himself (as well as for others)^ in distinction from rldria-i
vofiovs, 'he makes laws' (simply). (3) Thirdly, the classical
Middle Voice expresses that the subject acts on a person or
thing belonging to him: as Xixrai cfiiKovs, 'he ransoms his
friends.' Uses (2) and (3) are, of course, very closely akin,
being merely two slightly different phases of the indirect
reflexive force.
Here there are symptoms in later Greek of a tendency to
use the Active Voice instead of, or convertibly with, the
Middle : e. g. James iv. 2, alrdrf koi ov Xan^dverf, SioTi KaKo>i
alrdadf : Luke XV. 6, (TvyKaXfl ras (f>tXovi, as compared with
ver. 9, avyKoKflrai ras (piXasK In Modem Greek we still
* So in Fhilipp. ii. 8, tTairuvwafv eavrov is doubtless more than the
simple Middle Voice (which occurs in the same Epistle, iv. 12, olda Si
rawdvovaOai) : for in v. 9 follows—61^ Kal u @tds avrov vnfpvi//coae. In
Tim. iv. 7, yv/jtva^f Si atavToy irpos (icifiaav, a classical writer could
have used the Middle,'' The weakened feeling for the Middle verb appears in such a phrase
Classical and Modern Greek. 317
have such forms as avrmoio\)\iai, 'to claim for oneself,' n-fpt-
TTotov/LUM, * to acquire,' iSton-oioii/xat, ' to appropriate,' etc.
But INIodern Greek does not, as a rule, preserve those finer
shades of Middle force which appear in such classical phrases
as Tidfrai voftovs, Xwrat <f>i\ovSf etc. Here the Modern ten-
dency is to use the Active Voice, with a pronoun added
where the sense requires it : e.g. * he saves his kinsmen
'
would be expressed, not by o-w^frai roiis a-vyyevtls, but by
0"<ifft Tovs fTvyyfvtls tov,
§ 51. The causal (or 'dynamic') force which occasionally
belongs to the classical Middle—as in Trotetrat d<Tiri8as, 'he
7ia8 shields made'—is recognised by some in certain expres-
sions which occur in the N. T., as mroypd^aaOat, * to have
oneself enrolled ' (Luke ii. 5, where, however, it might be an
ordinary Middle, 'to enrol oneself), dSiKtiaBai, diroaTefne'iaBai
(i Cor. vi. 7), 'to suffer oneself to be wronged, robbed,'—if
these are not rather Passives. This use—always rare, but
so much neater than a periphrasis with euro, have, faire, fare,
lassen, etc.—is lost to Modern Greek. Thus Lucian, Somn.
§ I, 6 5e narfip ((tkottuto yttra Ttov ^iKav o rt koi SiSd^aiTO fie
(' should ?iave me taught '), would now be rendered, 6 de Trarrip
fiov (TvvftTKfTrTfTO fKTa T(i>v <f>t\<i)P tL vd fit ^ciXt] vd, (tdOw (' set
me to learn ').
§ 52. Verbs which in classical Greek had only the Middle
form retain that form in Modern Greek, as ^ouXo/zai, ylyvofiai,
de)(onai, bvvafjiai, fpxofMai, and many others in common use.
The same remark applies to verbs, used also in the Active
Voice, of which the Middle has a peculiar derivative sense
;
as, from dnra, 'I fasten,' dnrofiai, 'I take hold of;' from ^awtfo),
'1 lend,' bavelCopMi, *I borrow;' from opeyw, 'I extendj*
dpeyopai, ' I desire.'
In a few instances, where the Middle Voice denoted the
action of the subject upon himself, colloquial language began
as SitftepiffavTo iavrois (John xix. 24), while Matth. xxvi. 35 haa Ste/xt/Jt-
ffavTo simply.
3^8 Appendix.
at an early period to tolerate the Active without a reflexive
pronoun: e.g. Mark vi. 6, vrept^ye (for nfpirjytTo) ras Ktafias, 'he
went round the villages:' Acts xxvii. 43, d;To/jpi\/^ai/Tff, 'having
thrown (themselves) off:' imarpi^a, avaarpiy^o), 'I will return.'
So in Modern Greek nava)=:iT(wofiai, * I cease.' Aristoph. has
nave, 'stop (that)!' as n early =7r«vov,—showing that a ten-
dency to dispense with the Middle Voice in such cases was
not strange to common speech in the best age of the lan-
guage. On the whole it may be said that, in so far as
Modern Greek has ceased to use the Middle Voice, it has
thereby lost only certain finer tones of meaning, which, as
Hellenistic Greek shows, had already begun to be obscuied
two thousand years ago.
Moods.
§ 53. Disuse of the Ojytative. Here also Modern Greek
exhibits the completion of a long process in the history
of the language. The Iliad is the oldest explicit witness
to the use of the Greek Optative. There, in principal
clauses, it expresses wish, or at least willingness, concession
:
in subordinate clauses it expresses that the event is one
which the speaker's agency can in no way affect; thus it
denotes a mere supposition. In classical prose the Optative
retains these general powers; while in subordinate clauses
it has two special functions :
—
(i) As an optional substitute for the Indicative in depen-
dence on a secondary tense : e. g. fprnro) rls tanv, ' I ask whohe is
:
' rjpaTav rls tariv or fir], ' I asked who he was.'
(2) As an optional substitute for the /Subjunctive in depen-
dence on a secondary tense : e. g. ^e'vet iva "Siyrj, *he stays that
he may speak:
' tfievev tva X/yj;, ' he remained that he mai/ speak'
(a vivid way of stating his motive), or, ffievfv Hva Xtyoi, ' he re-
mained that he might speak' (the more regular and matter-of-
fact statement).
Classical and Modern Greek. 319
§ 54. In sentences of type (i), the Hellenistic of the N.T.
seldom employs the Optative, St. Luke has ris fir] (oblique
tU (<TTi), xxii. 23, and in Acts xvii. 11 ft €x<" is the oblique
of (I e;(ft : but such examples are rare. The Indicative is
more commonly retained, as in Mark xv. 44, eVjjpwTijo-ej*. . ft
. . aitfQavtv. There is, indeed, less scope for this use, since
(partly owing to Hebraic influence) there is far more direct
than indirect quotation in the N. T.
As regards type (2), the N. T. has not one certain ^ ex-
ample of the Optative following Iva or ottois after a secondary
tense. The Subjunctive (the classical ' vivid ' form) is already
established as the regular mood: e.g. Mark viii. 6, ibibov .,
Iva irapa8S)<ri. Acts XXV. 1 6, irpiv ^ ?;(ot (oblique of irpiv 7 exjj,
in a negative sentence) is the only example of the Optative
after a particle of time.
A mere supposition is still expressed by ft with Optative :
as el Tv^ot, I Cor. xv. 37 : et ^eXot, i Pet. iii. 17. This was
probably the purpose for which the Optative continued
longest in use : here nothing could precisely replace it.
In later writers the Optative form of oratio obliqua becomes
rarer and rarer. If the absence of that mood in Latin helped
to supersede it in Greek, the analogy was fallacious. TheLatin Subjunctive was of larger compass than the Greek
Subjunctive. The Imperfect of the Latin Subjunctive had
no Greek equivalent in subordinate clauses except the Present
(or, in reference to a monieutary act, the Aorist) of the
Optative,
§ 55. The Modem Greek Subjunctive with vd (Iva) has
become a universal substitute for the classical Infinitive.
A classical writer could expi'ess, * I exhort you to remain,'
by TrapaiceXfvofjial. aroi (l) fieveiv, or (2) ottcos fievfU (fut. indic), Or
(3) ojTwf (av) yxvrfs '. the last means strictly, ' in order that you
* For in Mark ir. 30 ; xiv, 10, yvoi, napaSoi, are probably subjuno
tives formed as if from verbs in -ou (e,g. Sov\oi=Sov\uy).
320 Appendix.
may remain.' The substitution of Iva for ortu>% in (3) was
the origin of the modern usage.
An early example is Odyssey iii. 327, XeVo-fo-^at Sif fxiv
avTos, tva vT]fx(pT(s fvioTTj], where the clause, strictly final, is
almost an object clause. But the development was gradual.
A deposition by witnesses quoted in the speech of Demo-sthenes against Meidias (§ 34) contains the phrase, oi8a/xfi/ dc
Ka\ Mfidiav . . d^iovvra Apiarapx^ov onus av biaWd^rj avrat ^rjfxo-
o-6tvr]v :' we know, too, that Meidias . . requested A. to reconcile
Demosthenes to him.' Though, however, classical prose might
sometimes use ontos or is (with or without w) with Subjunc-
tive, as a substitute for the Infinitive after a verb of asking,
etc., it certainly would not have so used iva. The example
sometimes quoted as from Demosthenes really occurs in a
Soyfia *An({)tKTv6vcov insei'ted in his speech on the Crown, p. 279.
8, eSo^f . . t6v (TTparrjyov . . Trpea^fvaai rrpos ^iXinirov . . Koi d^ioiiv
iva ^orjBfia-j) tw re AnoXXcovi koi toIs 'Afi(jiiKTvo(nv. It is gener-
ally allowed that the public documents quoted in theDe Corona
are from a later hand ; and this particular decree bears a
further mark of spuriousness in the fact that it misnames
the archon of the year.
But tva probably came in soon after the end of the classical
age. An example of Iva with Subjunctive after imBvufiv occurs
in a fragment of the philosopher Teles (circ. 250 B.C.?) quoted
by Stobaeus 524. 40. And already Dionysius Halic.(2 5 B.C.),
i. 215, can say, bfrjfrfaBat efxeWov iva dydyot, '1 was going to
ask her to bring me..
;* just as Chariton (400 a.d. 1), gives
(iii. i) TrapfKoXft .. Iva npoa-tXdrj, 'invited him to a])2)roach.'
In these, as in most of the similar examples from the later
literary prose, the principal verb expresses the idea of de-
siring, requesting, commanding, etc. Hence there is still
a link with the classical use of iva as= 'in order that:' for
purpose is still expressed.
§ 56. But in the spoken Hellenistic which the N. T. repre-
sents we find a much larger development. "We have not
Classical and Modern Greek. 321
merely ira^txaKicra iva anoa-Trj (2 Cor. xii. 8)—a case like those
I'ust cited—or 6i\a Iva fioi 8ms (Mark vi. 25), 'I wish thee
to give me/ which, though similar, is stronger—but also
such uses as the following. Luke i. 43, rroBeu /xot tovto,
iva fKdr} f] /irjTrjp . . ;' whence is this to me, that the mother
. . should come V=:t6 fXdelv t^v liTfTtpa : Matth. x. 25, dpKfTov t6»
fiadrjrf] Iva ytvTjrai as 6 8i8d<TKa\os avrov, ' enough for the dieciple
that he should become as iiis master,' =t6 ytveaOai. Arrian
(140 A.D.) has something like this, E2nc'et. i. 10. 8, irparov
fiTTiv iva e'ycl) KOifj.rjdo)-=zTu fpe Koiprjdrivai : John xi. 37, noirjcrai
iva Ka\ ovTos pfj (iTToddpr], * to effect that he should not die,'=wore toZtov pfj dnodavelv. It will be seen that in each of these
cases the fact expressed by tva with the Subjunctive may be
regarded as the fulfilment of an asjnration. Even here, then,
a connection with the classical use of tva can be traced beneath
the unclassical form : and we perceive the analogy with such
a phrase as that in Sophocles [Trach. 1254), rr^v xapiv . . n-poV-
Ofs, cos . . (s TTvpdv pt 6i]s, * add the favour of placing me on the
pyre :' where as 6fis=:T6 6ti>ai.
The practical identity of this Subjunctive with the clas-
sical Infinitive appears from Murk xiv. 12, eToipdawptv ha
(f>uyTjs, compared with Matth. xxvi. 17, iroipda-copfu (jyaydvi
John i. 27, n^ios tva \vcra>, and Acts xiii. 25, a$ios Xvaai. It
need scarcely be added that the several writers of the N". T.
differ considerably in the freedom with which they use iva:
thus, while it occurs but sixteen times in the Acts, andtwenty in the Epistle to the Hebrews, it is found in the
Fourth Gospel more than a hundred and forty times.
§ 57. The Modern Subjunctive with vd has often a quasi-
tmj)erative or a deliberative force : as vd t6 Kdfxrjre, ' mindthat you do it
:' vd to ttna ;
' am I to say it 1' This construc-
tion comes from the elliptical Hellenistic use of tva : as
Mark v. 23, tva fX6a)v tnidrjs rds \flpas ai/rrj, '(I pray thee)
to come,' etc.
§ 58. The Modern construction with Ttplv.—The classical
Y
323 Appendix.
construction is as follows: i. '//« will conquer before he
falls^ viKrjad TTpiv TTfceiv : 2. 'He will NOT conquer before
he falls' ov viKrjaet npiv (&v) ntaj] : 3. 'lie conqvsred (or did
not conquer) before he fell,' {oik) eVi/cijo-e irplv enfo-e. In
(2) and (3) Treo-ftK would also be correct. Now in all three
Modern Greek uses the Subjunctive with Trpiv. This (at
first sight) strange usage is, I think, unquestionably re-
lated to the habitual use of the Subjunctive with vd for
the Infinitive; in (i) and (3) the Modern npiv Ttearj is really
felt to be equivalent to the classical vp\p irtadp. The use
of Trpiv in the N. T. observes the classical rule.
§ 59. Impekative Mood.— i. as(=a^«s, 'permit') is pre-
fixed to the ist and 3rd persons : as Xv.7, 3? Xvwo-t (as 'Kiiovu) :
&s ^var,, as Xvaaai {as \vaow) : p. 72. Similar phrases occur
in classical Greek: Eur. frag. 310 (Nauck, p. 358), irdf?Es\ 2>
OKiepa <f)vXKds, oircpPw Kpj)vai.a vdnt], Cp. ^ov\(t . . . Oaipfv ' (Plat.
Gorg. 454 c), 6fk(is p.(ivwp.(v (Soph. El. 80), instead of the
simple deliberative Subjunctive.
In Hellenistic Greek ucjifs is already common : Matth. xii. 4
(and Luke vi. 42), acpes eV^aXw : xxvii. 49, acjies tSco/xf i' : also
the plur., Mark xv. 36, a(pfTf iBtopev. Latin influence may
have helped : die veniat, fae cogites, cave facias.
2. Prohibitions. In the N. T. there is no breach* of the
classical rule against using /xij (prohibitive) with the 2ud or
3rd person of the Present Subjunctive. Thus prjKtTi dpapravf,
John V. 14 (general precept) : fir] vopiarjre, Matth. x. 34 (of a
particular act). For the 3rd person, however, the Imperative
mood, not the Subjunctive, is always used in the N. T.
(present, pfj d^tfVcD, i Cor. vii. 1 2 : aorist, prj •yi'WTw, Matth. vi. 3).
In classical Greek the Aorist Subjunctive was here the rule,
and the Aorist Imperative (as Plat. Apol. 17 c, prjMs . . . irpocr-
• d<pir)pu, fco — 'to permit,' takes an Infin. in classical Greek: rots
&a(pa\is ^ovfxivots . . d<pii]fit \fyuv. Plat. Laics ii. 672 B.
^ fif) (TKkrjpvvrjTf in Heb. iii. j 5 being the aorist.
Classical and Modern Greek. 323
ioK^vari^ the exception : the Modern hi yH] XCa-r] is thus moi e
classical than the Hellenistic fif] XuadTco.
Tenses.
§ 60. The Periphrastic Future. In Modern Greek the
Future is formed no longer by a mere inflexion of the verbal
stem, but by a periphrasis : thus the Future of Xvw is not
XiVw, but diXio Xt€t or 6fXa> Xvo-et, 6a \vo) or da \va(t)^. At first
sight such a change might seem to argue a complete loss of
instinct for the native powers of the language. But if we go
back to the early history of the Future form in Greek, it will
appear that there is some justification for this expedient.
Indeed there are few instances in which the later desire for
expressiveness at the cost of terseness has manifefcted itself
with better reason.
§ 61. The Future tense of Greek was originally a Present.
A people of lively temperament readily use the Present for
the Future, 'je vais' in the sense of 'j'irai.' By degrees the
Indo-European Present, when thus used, came to be marked,
in most instances, by some slight difference of form, and this
had happened long before the Greek language had a mature
separate existence. Some Greek Presents, however, con-
tinued to be used as Futures without any such distinction
of form : and these, it may be noticed, are words which
would have been in frequent use. Such are the Homeric
^fiofiai {^eo/xnt, ^lufiai), 'I live,' used as= 'I will live;' S/jco,
as= 'I will find/ /cet'o) (k/w) as= 'I will go to rest;' from
Homer onwards, dfii as= 'I will go;' eSofxai as='I will eat;'
Trloiiat as='I will drink;' the Attic x«*> and ;^eo/ifu as= 'I
will pour/ the post-classical (pdyofiai aE= 'I will eat;' and
dvadpafxofxai (once), as= ' I will run up.'
§ 62. The Greek discrimination of Present from Future
forms was thus neither strong nor constant. Can we, then,
* Popular speech prefers the forms with 6a both in the Future and ia
the Conditional {0a tKvov).
Y 2
324 Appendix.
observe in the classical language any tendency to express the
Future by periphrases similar to those which Modem Greek
has finally adopted ?
The answer must be, I think, that, unless sometimes in
poetry, we find no tendency to use periphrasis for the
ordinary Future ; but that periphrasis occurs under certain
conditions of emphasis, as if it were felt that here the simple
Future failed in strength or precision. We cannot properly
reckon here such a form as tarai noiav, which is not strictly
a mere periphrasis for iroifjo-d (any more tlian is iroitia-wv earl),
but rather a mode, natural to many languages, of expressing
continued action in future time : though, of course, it may be
used in a merely rhetorical way, just as in Ireland one heara
'he will be doing it' as a more impressive 'he will do if
(with the corresponding future-perfect, 'he will be after
doing it'). The truest classical periphrases are those with
fif\\(o and (deXu> : but their use has rather narrow limits.
§ 63. With fjfWa. Plato, Bepublic 567 B, xme^aipfiv
hf) TovTovs ndvTat 8el rov Tvpnvvov, €i p,cXX€i ap^eiv :' the
tyrant must, then, put all these persons out of the way, if
he is to rule /' and then presently, ms toiKc yap, airr<5, f<\>T},
avdyKT], ciTTcp ap^ei :* Yes, it seems that he must,
—
if he
is to rule.' So, again, in the Republic 459 e, ft /le'XXet
flvai is followed by et earai as its equivalent. In both places
fiiWei means, not ' intends,' but ' is destined ;' and this sense
defines those cases in which /xeXXw with the Infinitive is most
nearly a true periphrasis for the Future.
§ 64. As to fWXw the case is less simple. Here we must
distinguish two phases of usage :
—
(i) Where the subject is a thing, and ideka denotes that
which is to happen in accordance with some natural law.
Aristotle, HepX ala-ffrja-tus 5 (p. 445 a 21, ed. Berl.), en 8' ovSe
TO vbcop eOeXci airo (lovov ap-iKTov ov rpi^^w, ' again, water will
not nourish of itself, without any admixture.' Plato, Rep.
370 B, ov yap . . lO^Xei to irpaTrofxtvov Trjv rov npaTTOVTOs (r)(<i\^v
Classical and Modern Greek. 325
Trepifi^i/cif, ' the action will not await the leisure of the agent.'
Herodotus, i. 74i ««'fv yap dvayKairjs l(rxvpfjs avfi^datts ovk idi-
Xooai (ruftfiiviiv, ' without powerful constraint, compacts vnll
not be maintained.' Thucydides, ii. 89, rjcraripivuiv 8e dp8pS)i>
OVK cOeXouai^ at yvotpm npbs tovs avroiis Kivdvvovs o/xoiui etkai
:
' risks beiug equal, the minds of the vanquished loill be
less readj' to face them \'
(2) Where the subject is a person. Herod, ix. 89, yvov^ on
«l lOe'Xoi a(pi ndcrav rfjv akrfdritrjv . , eliriiv, Kiv8vvevcrei nnoXtadai :
'(he was silent), aware that if he should tell them the
whole truth, he would be in danger of death.' Here, as
the context shows, tl (dikoi une'iv is not so much *if he
should consent to tell,' as ' if he should take the course of
telling;' i.e. it is little more than a forcible periphrasis for
fi Xf^oi. Aristophanes, Wasps 533, opa^ yhp as o-oi peyns
iarrXv &yi>v . . (imp, t pfj ytvoid', ovtos a cOe'Xei Kparriaai :
' You see how grave the crisis is for you, if (which mayHeaven forbid !) this fellow is to worst you.' Here tdeXd
KpaTTJa-ai cannot mean, ' is ready (i. e. willing) to worst you,'
but seems to be nearly =:|xfXXet Kpar^am,—tOiXd expressing
that which the nature of the man ordains, and thus approxi-
mating to the first use. I would add here two examples
from Herodotus which seem to me intermediate between
the first and the second use, since the subject is a thln'j,
but is in some measure personified : ii. 11, d u>v hi] eOcXi^aei
€KTpcij/ai TO pefdpov 6 NfiXos is tovtov top 'Apa^iov koKtiov, ri piv
KoAid . . iKx<x>(T6rivai ] 'if, then, the Nile should turn aside
his stream into this Arabian Gulf, what is there to hinder
it from being silted up ]' el edfXrjaei €K.Tpfy\rai is practically little
more than a vivid d (Kxpfxlrerai : i. 109, et Se eOcXtjaei, tovtov
T(XfVTTj(TaPTos, is Ttjv Gvynripa TavTrjp dpa^qvai tj Tvpappis : ' if, OU
' This use of iOtXai with reference to natural capability might be
illustrated by the use of PovXc/xai with reference to natural tendency ;
as Aristotle, De Aniin. Gen. iv. ad fin., ^ovKtrai /itv ovv ^ <pvais {ttnde)
. . OVK uKpi^oi df, ' but does not attain a perfect result.'
^26 Appendix.
his demise, tlie royal power should revert to liis daughter.'
Here, again, d e'deXrjad dva^rjvai seems to differ fi-om d ava^rj-
(Ttrai only by suggesting more strongly the idea of destiny.
§ 65. The frequency of this quasi-auxiliary (de\(ji in Horo-
dotus looks as if it was a colloquial idiom in the language
of his day ; and, considering the example just quoted from
Aristophanes, we might conjecture that it was not confined
to the Ionic dialect. But at any rate there is a wide in-
terval between any instance which can be produced from
classical Greek and the ordinary Modern Future (espe-
cially the Passive Future) with 6t\(ja, as to tpyov 6(Xti
npax^rj, ' the deed will be done.' Nor is there anything
in the Hellenistic Greek of the New Testament which dis-
tinctly passes the classical limit of this usage. The habit
of forming the ordinary Future with deXa had doubtless
established itself in the vulgar speech long before it was
admitted in the literary style ; and can hardly have arisen
before the vernacular had begun to diverge very decitledly from
the classical type, i.e. not earlier than about 300 A.D., pos&ibly
much later. In low Latin such forms as cantare habeo for
cantabo became common from the sixth century onwards \
§ 66. The Periphrastic Perfect and Pluperfect.—The Perfect tense of Greek, as of the kindred languages,
grew out of a reduplicated Present. Reduplication sym-
bolises the repetition of the verbal stem, and is intensive
;
thus from verbal stem th/- the simple form is rflva, ' I
stretch ;' the reduplicated form is riTaiva (in which « sym-
bolizes the repetition of rei')= 'I stretch stretch,' expressing
' Brachet, Historical French Grammar, ii. 2. p. 1 20. Habco becoming
ai in Frencli, ho in Italian, he in Spanish, hey in Portuguese, the futures
equivalent to cantare haheo are respectively chanter-ai, canter-(5, canter-^,
canter-ey. Seeing that habco scribere in classical Latin meant the same
thing as tx'" ypaifxtv in classical Greek, it is curious that, while in low
Latin habeo scribere = 'l have to write,' in Modern Greek (xeu fpdif/ti=M
• I have written.'
Classical and Modern Greek. 327
the same notion with more emphasis. So SiSco/xt (stem 80-)
is literally *I give give :' and so rldrj^i, etc. In many Greek
verbs (especially those which denote an act and not a state)
the Perfect form is still an intensive Present, as KfKpayt, ' he
is crying aloud,' dehopKf, ' he beholds/ Tre^pi/cf, ' he shudder's,*
y(yr)6(, ' he rejoices.'
This intensive Perfect-present became a Perfect-proper, de-
noting & finished act, by some such steps as these :—(i) The
same verb often had both an ordinary Present and an intensive
Perfect-present ; e.g. oXXv/xat *I perish,' oXooXa, 'I perish utterly.'
(2) The ordinary Present then acquired, by contrast, the idea
of incipient or attempted action, while the Perfect-present
came to denote finished action : oWvfiai, ' I am in the wayto perish,' oXo^Xo, ' I have perished.' The Perfect-proper is
not rare in the Homeric poems, and they offer at least one
form, ixffi^XuiKu, which in the Iliad (iv. 11) is a Perfect-
pre-ent, and in the Odyssey (xvii. 190) a Perfect-proper.
A third phaFe followed in many of the cognate languages.
Through the idea of finished action the Perfect tense came
to be associated with past time. Hence the 'historical'
Perfect in Latin, fecit, can mean not only ' he has done it,'
but also simply ' he did it.' The Sanskrit ami the Teutonic
Peifect acquired the same use. But the classical Greek
Perfect did not acquire it, because the Greek Aorist already
served that purpose.
§ 67. In Modern Greek the Perfect of ypd(})a> is no longer
yeypac^o, yeypajXfiai, but ex** W'V''*'^) ^X<" ypa^^rj. This raises
an interesting question. Did the Greek Perfect, like that
of kindred tongues, at length pass into the third phase
just indicated ; and was the new form devised to satisfy
the need for an unmistakable distinction between / vyrote
and / have written 1
In classical Greek the Perfect of finished action is some-
* Or ex** (7«)7paA<>*«'»'oy. Now, M of old, the Aorist often represents
our Perfect.
3^8 Appendix.
times joined with tlie Aorifct : e. g. [Dem.] or. vii. n^pt
'aXowijctov § 29 (by a contemporary of Demosthenes, 342B.C.), Tiji/ x'^pav ^v -oi "EWrjves Koi ^aaikfvs 6 Uf/jtrcoj/ ei|«'r]4>iaatrro
Koi. bmo\oyr\Ka(Tiv vfifripav dvai, ' decreed, and have acknow-
ledged.' So Lucian, Dial. Beor. 19. I, d(pcj)Tr\ia-as alrov koI
vevUrjKas, ' jou disarmed and have conquered him.' In such
instances it is the Aorist that approximates to the Perfect,
not vice versa. The frequent association of the tenses was
likely, however, to become a source of confusion in the
decadence of the language.
And in fact later Greek shows some clear traces of
a tendency to use the Perfect as an Aorist. See, e.g., Reve-
lation V. 7> Koi T)X0e, Koi ciXr](|>£ to ^i^Xiov . . . koi ore eXa^e to
/3t/3A('oi', TCI T€crcrapa ^u>a /cat ot (iKoenTtaaapfs TrpeffjSiVepoi tTreaoy :
vli. 13, Koi dircKpiOr] ds . . . koX cipT)Ka avTw . . . Ka\ citt^ fioi ;
Vlli. 4, Koi dke'^T) o KOTTPOS . . . koi 6iXt)<{)€I' 6 ayycXos , . . koi
iyefiicrev . . . koi t^akev. Thucydides, iii. 68, has in historical
narrative tt/v 8e yijv SrjpoaiaiaavTfs dTT(pia6a)(Tav, ' they con-
fiscated the land, and let it out at rent.' Here the Greek
scholiast explains the Aorist anenladwaav by the Perfect : (ir\
pia-da SeSuKao-ic. And more than once this scholiast uses
the Peifect, instead of the Aorist, in his historical notes
on the text: thus on Thuc. i. 20 he writes, iXifiu^c jtotc fj
Attikt], Ka\ Xvcrii Tjv tSjv dtivwv, nai^av acpayi]. Aews ovv ris ras
iavTov Kopas ciTiSeSojKC Koi dTri]XXa^£ tov Atpioi) Trjv noXiv. Again
on Thuc. ii. 95, wj 8e oidiv diroSeSuKC npos alrov 6 UepSiKKas
anep vnfCTXf'o, eaTpdrcuCTC kot avTov.
§ 68. Here, then, we have proof that in later Greek the
Perfect was used, at least sometimes, convertibly with the
Aorist. The examples just cited are all from vei'bs ex-
pressing very common acts,—fiXrj^a, fiprjKa, deSuKa and its
compounds. There can be little doubt, I think, that we mayhere recognise the direct influence of the Latin historical
Perfect on 'the Greek vernacular of daily life in the earlier
centuries of the Empire. The old line, strongly-marked as
Classical and Modern Greek. 329
it once had been, between the Greek Aorist and the Greek
Perfect was thus insensibly obscured. Thus there may have
arisen by degrees a sense oi practical need for such a form as
e^o) ypuyf^ei. But we must allow also for rhetorical motive
—
i. e. for the desire of au em2>Jtatic as distinguished from an
ordinary Perfect.
§ 69. Classical Greek shows this in the periphrasis with
€x<» and the Aorist participle. In prose, as a rule, tx.^ is
then more than a mere auxiliary : e. g. Dem. Phllljyp. iii.
§ 12, <I>epay . . . €;^ft /<aTaXa0coi/=not merely, 'he has seized
Pherae,' but, ' he has seized Pherae, and keeps it :' op. Iliad
i. 356, eXd)v yap txfi yfpas avTos dnovpas'. and SO Her. iii. 65,
SdXo) €xov(Ti aiiTrjv (tijv fjy(fiovir]v) KTrjaafitvoi, On the Other hand,
e^w is sometimes a true auxiliary : Herod, vi. 1 2, dvbpl . . .
aXn^ovi . . . {TiiTpi\l^avTfs fjpius avTovs (xojjLtv. Plato, Phaedr.
257 C, Tov \6yov 8e aov iraKai davpaaas fp^co (a stronger Tfdav-
paKo). On the border-line are Herod, i. 27, twv . . . 'EX\f)va>v . .
.
rav (by attraction for toxis) <jv bovkaxrai fX"^* *^' 28, rovs aX-
\ovs . . . v^ tojvrw (ix^ KaTaaTpfyJAdpfvos. The frequency of
this periphrasis in the Greek dramatists is due to its me-
trical convenience for the iambic trimeter : e. g. Soph. 0. T.
731, rji^dro yap tovt, oiibe na> Xfj^avT fX'h * nor have they yet
ceased' (to be said) : Eur. Med. 33, o? at^e vvu drtpxiaas f^*'*-
It is remarkable that the Modern periphrasis joins exw
with the Aorist Infinitive and not with the Aorist Participle.
This is the more curious since the corresponding low Latin
form of perhaps nearly contemporary origin, habeo scribere,
was the periphrasis for the Future. I can only suggest one
explanation. There can be little doubt that the Greek peri-
j>hrastic Future arose before the periphrastic Perfect. The
need for a clear Future form would be constantly felt ; whereas
the reduplication would long serve as a strong mark of dis-
* The idea of this periphrasis is as old as the form of the Perfect
Active Participle ; \(\vKwi, stem \e\vK-0T (where the suffix -or is tlie
San.slvrit vat)=' possessing loosing,' i. e. ' having loosed.'
^^o Appendix.
tinctiou between tlie old Perfect and the historical tenses.
Thus, when people had once become thoroughly accustomed
to say 6tK(i) \vrjii, habit would make it seem more natural to
say ?^a) Xuo-fi than rj^m Xi^trar.
§ 70. The Histoeical Tenses op the Indicative in
THE CoNDiTiONAi; SENTENCE. The differences between clas-
sical and modern syntax here concern chiefly those forms of
the conditional sentence which imply that a condition is not,
or was not, fulfilled.
The classical foims are these:— i. d enpn^ev, eypny^tv av:
' if he had acted [at some definite past moment], he would
[then] have written-.' 2. ft trrparrfv, fypa(f)fv nv. this form
can mean either of two things, viz. (a) Referring to the
2)ast : ' If he had [then] been acting, he would [then] have
been writing.' (b) Referring to the present : ' If he had
[now] been acting, he would [now] have been writing;'
where it is implied that, as a matter of fact, he is not acting,
and consequently is not writing. The context in each par-
ticular case must decide whether (a) or (b) is intended : (6)
is, however, more frequent than (a).
The double significance of this classical formula, ei (nparTtv,
fypa(f)(v av, is the key to the corresponding formula in Modern
Greek.
In either of the two senses, (a) or (6), Modern Greek can
say, ehv t-npa-rre, da Zypacfx (or ^^eXe ypacjxi), using the * First
Conditional' (p. 84).
For the classical form with the Aorist, d tnpa^ev, eypayj/fv
av, the most precise Modern equivalent v?ould be fav fl^e
npa^ei, 6a fixe ypd\l^ei (Pluperfects). In the ajwdosis, the
'Second Conditional' with Aorist Infin. (p. 84) is, however,
more usual, as ijQ(\i ypa\j/ei. In tl-.e protasis, the Pluperfect is
sometimes used to exclude ambiguity, but is often replaced by
the Imperfect iav firparre ^
* The Aorist Indie, after tl or (av, in Modern Greek, usually concedes
a. fact (like the classical «i or tintp) : e.g. tav ^ Ma^tSovta f\vTp<uOr] icou
Classical and Modern Greek. '^'^ i
But the First Conditional is often used in Modem Greek
where classical Greek would have preferred the Aorists. E. g.,
' If you had come a little sooner, you would have seen him :
'
classical, ft oXiyw nportpov fj\6(Te, dbfTt &v avToi/ : liere Modern
Greek could say, tav ^px«t6( oXlyov npoTTjTepa, 6a Tov f/3Xf7rfTe.
That is : AVhere it is implied that in past time a condition
was not fulfilled, Modern Greek sometimes neglects the
classical distinction between a single and a repeated (or
continued) act.
§ 71. Classical Greek used the Optative mood in abstract
suppositions : «t npatraoi, ypd(f)oi av (or rrpa^fif—ypayjfeie, if
a single occasion is meant) :* Supposing that he were acting,
he would write.' The Hellenistic of the N. T.,—where, as
seen above, the Optative is already rare in oratio obliqua,—retains this use of it, in which, indeed, nothing could
exactly replace it : i Pet. iii. 14, dXX' d Ka\ Traaxoire dm
StKaioa-vmjv, fiaKapioi (a mere supposition) ; cp. Luke vii. 39,
€1 rfv irpo(prjTi]s, tyivcoaKev av (implying that he is not, does not
know).
Modern Greek, having lost the Optative, cannot dis-
tinguish this form from d enpaTTev, typa<piv av, used in
sense (a). Our form, ' If he could, he would,' can similarly
stand for either ; i. e. it may imply that he can not, or
it may imply nothing whatever as to his power. Thus a
modern translator of Xenophon renders oiSfJs av \ii<^6fLr] by
Kavfii 8ev ^6f\f ptivfi (^Anab. iii. I, § 2) : a-adelrj av by ^6fXe
(TUiBri (§ 6): el bwaipfOa (§ 1 7) by fciv Tj8vvdp(da. Sometimes
the Optative with av in apodosis can be rendered by the
Modern Future, or by a periphrasis: as el opmrjv, t\doipi av=.
(av iSo), BiKoi i\dfi (ib. 3, § 2): yivoiro av ^ dpn opti va y(lv>]
can be done, {ib. i, § 38).
Sitfpuyf rrjv oKtOpiav Tvxqv, tovto 6(j>fi\fTat (h t^v iviaiav , , ifivvav
(from the N€o\o7oy, Feb. A^, 1880) :' If Macedonia has been delivered,
and has escaped . . this is due to the united defence.'
3^i Appendix.
§ 72. A few examples are subjoined :
—
Classical.
Aorist Indicative.
1. Ei TovTO (fidOfTt, ovK av fa(pd-
XrjTe. ' If you had perceived this,
you would not have tripped.'
2. OvK hv (TToirja'tv, tl rrpofiSe to
diropTjaofitvov. ' He would not have
done it, if he had foreseen the re-
sult.'
Imperfect Indicative.
3. El d\ts eTxe XPV/^'^'*"'> fWf'TO
av. ' If he had money enough [as
he has not], he would buy it.'
4. T(KoTov av T^v, d /ifj t)V fiiapov.
• It would be comic, if it were not
odious.'
Optative.
5. El (Kuae iropfvOftTjv, iSoifit &v
avTov. ' Were I to go there, I
should see him.'
6. El KaKais trapaaxoi tois iv
T(Ku, irpa^fiav tiv tcL avpcpipovra.
' Were the government to have an
opportunity, thej' would take the
proper measurea.*
Modem.
1. 'Eai' ei'x*'''* yvcupifffi [or Iciv
(yvojpi^fTf'^ TOVTO, Sfi' ii6eKfT( a<pa-
\u [or 5iv 6cL (iXfTt cTipaXet'].
2. AtV ^0(\f TO KafMfl [or StP TO
(txf Ka/xei, or even 5iv Oa to (Ka/x-
V(v^, iav irpoiPKfTre t6 diroTiKfa/xa.
3. 'Eav (Txfy apKiTo. x/'WOto,
Cd TO riyopa^f.
4. 0^ ^To 76X01*01', lav [or 6i] St)/
[or /i^] ?jTO fitapov.
5. 'Eiv enriyaivov eKei, 60L tov
f0K(nov.
6. 'Eav napdxfTO ivKaipia th T-qv
Kvl3(pvT)(7iv, i]0(\ov Kafifi to. icaTaK-
\t]Ka fi(Tpa,
Pakticiplk.
§ 73. The abundant and varied use of the Participle in
classical Greek was developed with the growth of a periodic
style (X«|tf KaTfo-Tpafifievr]) in literary prose: see e.g. Isocrates,
or. V. ij^hilipj^us) § 91, aX\* ofKos Tr)\iKavTr]s crifxipopai CTUfiiTC-
orouoTfjs ovT(o cr(f>68pa KaTf<pp6vr](rev 6 jSacriAfvs Trjs iTfpi avTov bvvd-
fifa>s, SiVTi irpoKaXcadp.ci'OS KX/api^ov Koi tovs oKKovs rjyepovas fit
Xoyoj/ {XOelv, Ka\ tovtois piv UTn<Tyyovfi.€vos peyaKas Soopeas Scocreii',
7"ois 8 aXXotf (TrpaTiwTais €vt(\^ tov piaBov dnodovs dnonep^eiv,
Toiavrais fKniaiv OTrayaYOfAecos, kqi Tn'oreis Sous toiv tufi vopi^o-
lx(vo>v ras p-eyioTas, auXXaPwf avrovs dneKTfive. The natural
Classical and Modern Greek. 333
tendency of colloquial or popular language, on the contrary,
is rather to use the \i^ii dpo\iivr\, simply tacking clause to
clause; e.g. Matth. vii. 27, »cal Kark^t] 17 ^po\ri Kai r\K^w ol
noTUfjiin Kal iitveucrav oi nvtuoi Kai irpoacKOVj/aK rfj oIkio fKfivu, Kai
CTTCCTCi', Kal riv T} TTTOKTis avTTjs fifyaXf].
The bent of Hebraic (and generally of Oriental) expres-
sion has doubtless, in portions of the N". T., strengthened
the inclination to use finite verbs rather than participial
clauses. But, apart from this, the later tendency of colloquial
Greek itself can be plainly seen (e. g.) in John i. 47, epx"" 'f"'
i8f : vii. 4, ov8f\s (V Kpirrrra ti ttokI koi f'jTei avTos iv Trapprjcnq
(Ivai : Ephes. iv. 26, 6pyi((a6f Koi prj apLapravfre '. and Luke
(whose style is so often comparatively Hellenic) xviii. 33, koi
aiTToi ovbtv Tovrav (rvinJKav, Koi r}v rb pfjfia tovto K(Kpvp,pfvov an
avrav, Kai ovK iylvuxTKOv to. \ey6peva. On the other hand, for a
series of participles thoroughly in the manner of the classical
periodic style, see Acts xii. 25, xxiii. 27.
§ 74. The more analytic character of modern expression has
helped to restrict the old pregnant uses of the Participle;
and it is natural that Modern Greek should use it much more
freely in the literary style than in conversation. The following
points should be noticed:
—
1. Where, in narrative, the classical Participle expresses
a distinct act, and not merely some attendant circumstance
of another act, the Modern tendency is to use the finite verb
and conjunction: see, e.g., above, p. 205, 'ApT€p.ia-ia yvapiaatra
. . . dvrjvtyKev, ' she perceived the body, and brought it up
'
(Plutarch) : dvtyvcopiaev rj 'Aprfpia-ia Kal to ftptptv indva (Ran-
gabe).
2. Where the classical Participle expresses a supposition,
condition, concession, etc., the Modern language prefers
to define this: e.g. above p. 196, -npos . . . tw 'ladfjim o-ofi-
paXXwi' ev TreXayet . . . vavpaxr](Tti.s '.' If yOU give battle at
the Isthmus, you will fight in open waters' (Herod, viii. 60):
ih.v cXOtjs eif x*'P"^ napa tov 'laBpiov, els dyoLKTou TriXayos 6a
334 Appendix.
vuvnax^a-rjs (Gennadius) : p. 198, oiVoVa . . . PouX«uo|i£Voiai
avOpanouTi ft)? TO in'mav iOiXa ylyv(a6ai, }it) Se oIkotu ^ouXcuo-
fieVoiai oiiK t'diXd, k. t. X. (Herod. 1. c.) : ' When men formrational plans, success, as a rule, attends them ; but w/ten their
plans are not such, it does not.' orav fxtv ol avd^jtonoi aKe'irrwi'Tai
Kara ra mSavarfpa, ravra as «rt to irXelarov Ttivovv va nfiaypaTonoi-
ovvrai (tend to be realised)' otoi' 8« /*/) ra mOava Sia^ouXcuui/Tai,
b(v OfXei, K. r. X, (Gennadius).
3. AVhere the classical Participle forms a complementary
clause, the Modern idiom commonly resolves it into a clause
with a finite verb. Thus oi8a avrov Xe'yoi/ra, ' I know that he
Bays = fl^evpoD on Xtyti ^: aladavopai ifiaprdvuv, ' I perceive
that I err ^ KaTavoS> on ap-apn'tva).
4. After verbs of beginning, continuing, ceasing, being
ashamed, etc., the classical Participle is often rei)laced by vd
with Subjunctive : e. g. biariKei noiwv, ' he continues doing,'
=.8iaTf\€i va Kapvp '. rjp^aTO \eya)v= rjpxKJ'e vaXfyrj,
5. The Genitive Absolute, though used in the higher lite-
rary style, is more commonly paraphrased. Hellenistic Greek
had already lost precision in this usage ; thus in the N. T. we
read, Matth. i. 18, fivrjarfvddaTjs Ttjs ynjTpos avrov . . . fiipidrj iv
ya(TTp\ fxoia-a (Gen. Abs. referring to subject of principal verb):
Matth. ix. 1 8, ravra auToC XaXovvros . . . (Is . . . 7rpo<T(Kvv(i auT(i>
(Gen. Abs. referring to object of principal verb). See above
p. 196, 'OXvpiricov Tcov e'<^€|^v ayopivatv, 'When the next Olympian
games were being held' (Plutarch) i — orav ireXeadrjo-av rd npHtra
fierd TaiJTU 'oXi'firrta (Rangabe).
§ 75. Disuse of ilie Future Participle.—In classical Greek
the Future Participle (when not preceded by the definite Art-
icle, or by as) is usually (a) the subject of a verb of going, aa
tpxofuu bpdauv, or (&) the object of a ^erb of sending, preparing,
' In the N. T. yivwaicoj is usually construed with ot«, tliough also
with a Participle (Luke viii. 46, etc.) : oiSa never with a Part., but
always with on or Infinitive. A Participle is construed with (patyo/xat
(JIatth. vi. 16), and okovw (Acts viL la).
Classical and Modern Greek. 335
etc., as nffjLTTa tpdaovra. It is not used as the Latin Future
Participle is used (e.g.) by Pliny, E]). iii. 21, ' dcdit mihi quan-
tum potuit, daturus amplius, si potuisset,' t.e.= ' while ready
to have given.' Even such an example as Aesch. Agam. 66,
^Arpfui TratSaj Ztvs iriynTfi, naKaliryiaTa . . . Gi^awc, is very rare.
In the N. T. the Future Participle is seldom found : where it
occurs, it generally has the Definite Article, as John vi. 64,
6 rrapabojcrav. In Heb. xiii. 1 7 we have dypvirvovaiv a»9 \6yov
dnoSoiaoi'Tfs, ' in the expectation of giving an account.' But
as the simple equivalent for a final clause it occurs only in
the Acts, e.g. xxiv. 11, dve^r]v irpoa-Kwrja-iov. Modern Greek
supplies it by a periphrasis: as ^\6ov 6\lfnpivos avTouj^vnrjya
VI. Particles.
§ 76. I. icai as a substitute/or oxf, when. This colloquial use
occurs in such phrases as t6v (i8a Koi rjpxero, 'I saw him coming;
'
TJKOvtra Ka\ tXeyt, ' I heard him say ; ' poKis f(f)6a(re Koi fint,
' scarcely had he arrived when he said,' etc. This is essentially
a return to the primitive mode of expressing temporal relation,
which is still common in the best classical Greek, as Plato,
Symp. 220 C, rjbri Tjv pear]p^pia koi avdpoinoi ijaOuvovro. It is also
frequent in Hellenistic, as Mark xv. 25. But here, as else-
where, the popular Modern use oversteps the classical limit.
Hence :
—
2. Koi with Indicative, as an equivalent for the Infinitive
:
TTWf flpnopd Koi Tpa)yfi= va Tpoiyj], 'hoW is he able to e&tV rjpxiof
Kcn €K\ai(= ^pxi<re va K\air,, 'he began to cry.' ri fKopf koi uvai
ToiovTos ufdpanos; 'what has he done to be [_=8ia va ^mij such
a man 1' Cp. ' "We will try and do it.'
3. Kai emphatic,= ' even' or 'also,' is regularly prefixed in
Modern Greek to na\iv, avdis, ertpos, aXXos, and similar words :
e. g. ' It will give me much pleasure to see you again,' pfyiarTjv
6a alaOavdS) repyj/iv va eras TSw Kttl Tiakiv. * I am in hopeS of
33^ Appendix.
receiving another letter,' fx<" ^'' e^»ri5oj ou ^a Xa3<a Kal eT/pai/-
tTriaroXriv. A redundant use of /cm' is not rare in classical
Greek ; e.g. Antiphon, de Caed. Herod. § 23, €^»;mro oiStV Tt
/ioXXoi/ 11776 rwv nXXwi/ ^ Kal iw' </ioO. It suits the love of
emphasis natural to popular speech, and is well marked in
the Hellenistic of the N. T. : as Rom. i. 13, Iva nva Kapnov
(rx& Kal fv vfiiv Ka6a>s Kal «V roij Xonro'n fdvf<riv.
§ 77. idv with the Indicative. While « with the Subjunc-
tive (used by the classical poets, and supported by the MSS,
in Thuc. vi, 21) is common in Hellenistic and Byzantine
writers, the converse solecism also gained ground : in the
N. T. some examples have good authority, as Luke vi. 34,
tap SdffI'^ere : I John V. 1 3 [o'ldafiev] : Rom. xiv. 8 {ano6vj](TKOfi(v).
Modern Greek uses iav (contracted av) with Subj. Pies, and
Aor., Ind. Impei'f. and sometimes Aor. : tav epxria-ai {fpxn)—(K6rji—fjpxtao (fipxov)—^\6es : €i is little used except in the
§ 78. ora»' is similarly used with Indicative Present, Markxi. 25 (o-rijKfre): Imperfect, iii. 11 (iOeapfi) : Aorist, Rev. viii. i
(^foj^ev). In Modern Greek orav is colloquially used with
the Indicative, as otoi/ tpxerat (^ijpxfTo, r)k6e) : but in correct
writing the classical rule is still observed, ore being used with
the Indicative and orav with the Subjunctive ^.
§ 79. vd with Indicative. The classical Iva, as a final particle,
could be used not only with Subjunctive and Optative, but
also with the past tenses of the Indicative. It then implied
that the end had not been attained, because some condition
had not been fulfilled : e. g. (f)ev, <f)fv, to htj to irpayiiar dvOpoinoit
* This later use of orav as = orf, (av (el dv) as = tl, with Indicative,
may be compared with those instances in the old language where dv is
irregularly retained after a relative word before the Optative: e.g.
Herod, viii. 13, (iroUfTS re irav . . okojs Slv i^iawOdr), k.t.\. (and so i. 75,
99) ; Xen. Anab. iii. 3. § la, tv(dptvoi, . . oiroaovs fi.v KaraKavoitv . .
,
Toaavrai x'A'O'pfly KaraOvanv. The principle is the same ; viz. that dv
has come to be regarded as forming one word with oVcus, etc.
Classical and Modern Greek. 337
?;^*ii»I
<f)eavfip, Iv rjfrav fiJ}biv oi Stivol Xoyot (Eur. frag. 442,
Nauck) :' alas, that facts have not a voice for men, so tluit
subtle words might be as nothing !' Here Iv ^aav differs from
iv ojat by expressing that (since facts have no voice) subtle
words are something.
It has been seen how Modern Greek extends the use of vd
with Subjunctive : it extends in an analogous manner the
u^e with Indicative.
(i) vd with Aorist Indicative= classical Infinitive where
the reference is to that which must have or ought to have
occurred : nptnft va fTeXdwaav = XPl" (^^tovs TeXeiaxrat, * they
ought to have finished :' 8fv ylvfrai va /^^ t6 dxav Kdixfi,^ovK
((TTiv avTovs y.T] irtTTOLrjKevai (ovK tariv ottus ovk (noirjaav^j ' they
must have done it.' (f)ai(Tai va tnaSe jToXXd, ' it seems that
he must have suffered much.'
(2) vd with the Pluperf., Aorist, or Imperfect Indicative=classical uxrirfp d with the same tenses : a>s va dx^v ipvdpidan
8m ToiovTov flei-y/xa piKpoyf/vx^as, (Trpoxa)pr]crt 6appa\€a>s '. * as if he
had blushed for such a sign of pusillanimity, he advanced,' &c.
as va prj flxa Kiipd, 'as if I had not done it.' With the Im-
perfect it can thus express a wish : va ^[ir]v vov\l, * oh, that I
were a bird !'=(16' tjv opvis.
§ 80. Certain Adverbs exemplify the later tendency to sub-
etitute more emphatic words for those used in classical Greek.
(i) Instead of dei, Modern Greek commonly employs
irdv'TOTe, an un-Attic word used by writers of the CommonDialect, as by Dionysius of Halicarnassus (25 B.C.), Plutarch
(90 A. D.), etc., and often in the Hellenistic of the N. T.
Indeed, the N. T. has dd only in eight places, one of which
(Heb. iii. 10) is a quotation from the LXX, and another (Tit.
i. 1 2) from Epimenides.
(2) Instead of €Tt, 'yet,' 'still,' Modern Greek uses okojitj
(^=dKpT]v). For the classical use see Xen. Anab. iii. 3. 26,
6 o^Xos aKpTjv Su^aive, ' was just crossing.' But already in
Theocritus (270 b. c.) a question asked with «rt (is be still
z
^$S Appendix.
. . .X) is answered by aKiiAv ye, ' yes, slill ' (iv. 60). So in
Hellenistic: Matth. XV. 16, aK)xr]v kcu. vfult aavvtroi (are, 'are
ye, too, still without understanding 1
'
(3) Instead of yap, Modern Greek uses Siori (or cireiSi]).
In the N. T. Stdn seems to be never merely= ' for,' but='because:' such passages as i Thess. ii. 8, Galat. ii. 16, serve,
however, to illustrate the ease of the colloquial transition.
(4) Instead of ovt>, Modern Greek uses XonrcJc {ceterum, du
reste). Already in Plato an almost illative use of to Xomov
may be seen : Gorg. 458 D, alcrxpov 8t) t6 Xomov yiyverai . , . (fie
y€ fifj fdeXeip^. For the Hellenistic use, which often differs
little from the Modern, see Acts xxvii. 20, prjTe 8f fjXlov, prire
aoTpcov (TrKpaiiiovToov, k. t. X., . . . Xonrou (' then,' ' accordingly,')
ntpir^pfiTo naaa (Kiris. Cp. 2 Cor. xiii. II. In I Thess. iv. I
it is combined with ow.
(5) Instead of vvv, colloquial Modern Greek uses rwpa
(sometimes written rt)pn),= Tg topa, ' at the hour' (which nowis). Here, as in the case of del, it might seem strange that a
comparatively cumbrous substitute should have displaced
a word so thoroughly established in familiar use; yet it is
not more strange than that nunc should have been supplanted
by maintenant. Cp. Ital. ora, Fr. tout a Vheure.
(6) Instead of ivBabe or ivravda, ' here,' Modern Greek uses
cSw. The derivation from Ibov ('behold !
') is supported by
the cc^xistence of the forms (biKoi and tSi/co? (see § 23). It is,
I think, further recommended by the analogy of the French
id from ecee hie.
§ 81. a&v, contracted for wj uv, 'as,' 'like:* e<o/uf ahv npo86-
TT]s Trjs irarpidos, ' he has acted like a traitor to his country.*
Colloquially, adv is often followed by the Accusative, loh&n
the noun lias tJie article (but not otherwise) : e. g. depvovrai ahv
Toiig irereivovs, 'they maul each other like fighting-cocks.'
* In Prptag. 321 C, \oivdv Sfj dieoaprjTov (ti avrw ^v , . rh tuiv dvOpii-
TTjui' ytvos, I should not take it (with Ast) as = iam, but simply as -»
velicimm erat.
Classical and Modern Greek. 339
111 classical prose, d was almost always added to iy av : e. g.
Plato, Gorgias 479 A, (po^ovfifiot u<nrcp &v el ttois, ' timorous
as a cliild,' i.e. ^ojiovjxfvo^ Sxnztp hv [^o/SoTto tisJ, 6i n-mr [*'»?]•
Isocrates, Panegyricus § 148, hitnoptvdriaav uairep iiv [Stfjroptii-
^»;(rai/] ci Trpontpiroufvoi ^8ifnopfv6T](Tav\, * they traversed the
country as safely as if the enemy had been their escort:' ib.
§ 69, opLoias Sif(j)6apr]<Tav ucTTTcp Af €i np6s ajravras dvdpuirovs
t7To\fpr](Tavy ' they were crushed as utterly as if they had been
warring against all mankind.' (Here the verb belonging to
tl is not understood, as usual, but expressed.)
The form used in Modern Greek, which omits d, is also very
old : Polybins (145 B.C.), i. 46, (rvp^aivd 8e tov AiXv^aiov TOVTOV
an(\(t.v TOV Tonov ws 0.V (kutov koI UKoat arabia, * it IS found that
this place is distant from Lilybaeum about 120 stadia.' And.
so in Hellenistic, 2 Cor. x. 9, wa pfj 86^<a &s &v fK(f)o^fiv vpas,
'that I may not appear as it were to terrify you,' is
fchort for Iva prj fid^w rrotaira TrotcifJ its au \p6^aip4, TTOitlv, d8d|at/xt] (K^o^eiv vpas. The inherited instinct of the language
is curiously shown by the fact that now, just as in classical
Greek, as av or crav is most frequently used where the com-
parison implied is unfavourable or scornful.
§ 82. The Negative Particles %iv and ^r\.—%iv (short for
ovbiv), the Modern equivalent for ov, is regularly used in the
protasis of a conditional sentence, alike with the Indicative
and with the Subjunctive Mood : e.g. (hv hiv dxov bwapeis avta-
Tfpas, rj6f\ov viKTjdrjj ' If they had not had superior forces, they
would have been conquered.' av biv poi doiarj Xoyov dnoxpS)VTa,
dev 6a fixapiaTri6S>, ' If he does not give me an adequate ac-
count, I shall not be satisfied.*
The progress of this use can be traced. Where in classical
Greek ov (and not the normal n^} follows «t or idv, it affects
a 2)articular word, and not, as pt} does, the whole protasis
:
Plat. Apol. 25 B, (dv T€ ov-(})r]Te fdv re <^^Te, ' wheiher you deny or
admit it:' Lysias, Agor. § 62, tl ov-ttoXXoI (zroXiyoi) ^aav.
But in later Greek the admission of ov is less restricted,
z 2
340 Appendix.
In the Hellenistic of the N. T. ov reguhirly follows d with
the Indicative, where this expresses fact : e.g. John v. 47,
ft 8« . . . ov Tri(TTti(re : Luke xi. 8, (I Koi ov daxrei, ' though (it
is the fact that) he will not give;
' Heb. xii. 25, « yap fKfhoi
ovK ftpvyov, ' If (as we know) they did not escape.' Where,
however, tl with a past tense of tlie Indicative expresses
hypothesis, the negative is always, in the N. T., /H17 : as John
Xviii. 30, ft fir) ^v ovTos KaKOTTOios, OVK av <toi napfdooKciixfV avrov. In
the N. T. iav always takes pr], never ov.
The Modern use of Mv in protasis marks, then, a later stage
than the Hellenistic, with a less true tact for the forms of the
conditional sentence, and with a less fine instinct for the
moods : d p.f] rjv is no longer discriminated from d ovk ^v :
and one can say even iav Sew ?/.
§ 83. \i.-f\, never SeV, is the negative prefixed to the Participle
in Modern Greek. Here the classical distinction was plain, ov
stated a negative /aci ;/X17, a negative conception. Hence (i)
OVK fiScbf, ov (pqcriv dde'vai, ' not knowing, [a simple statement of
the fact,] he says that he does not know :*(2) pf] etStoy, ov (prjatv
ftSeVat, 'if {or when) he does not know, he says that he does not
know :* where /X17 d8ois-=:d (or ort) ixf) ol8f, ' if (or when) he does
not know.' So with the Infinitive : (Prjaiv olx ovras ex**") ' ^^^
Bays that it is not so :' 8d pfj KKenrfiv, 'it is right not to steal.*
In later Greek, fifj tended to usurp the place of ov
:
(l) being used more freely with the relative, as tyi) 6s fxf)
dfit, ' qui non sim,^ instead of ovk dpi, ' non sum
:
'(2) in
oTt (if), as Lucian (160 A. D.), Nigrinus § 24, ayavaKTUi on ^r\
. . . pLtTaKafi^avoviTi, ' I am vexed that they do not adopt (the
dress) : ' (3) in causal clauses, Lucian, Hermotimus § 20,
(nfn\r]^t . . . SioVt fir) . . . eiroufofv, ' reproved him because lie
had not made :' (4) especially with Infinitive and Participle.
Infinitive, as Lucian, Peregrinus § 44, e0>? • • . f^T) dovvai, ' said
that he had not given.' Participle: id. Philojiseudes § 12,
fXdrrfTO ds bpaKwv, TraXator, vno y^p(os, oipai, (^(pnvaui p,Y)
tvvap.(voi ; i&. § 1 9, 6 6e irapfp^fTM, [iTjSew (vo)(Kr](Tas tovs IduvTOi,
Classical and Modern Greek. 34
1
And so often in the Hellenistic of the N. T. : IJark v. 26,
iroXXfi nadoixra . . . koi \iii]ikv w(f)f\r]df~iaa dWa fiaWov ds to x^^po"
iKdovcra . . . rjylraro : Acts ix. 7, fiar^Ktia-av iveo'i, aKovovres fiiv rrjf
<i>wviis, iir\hiva 6e dfcapovirres. Here classical Greek would require
oil, ovbfv, ovBtva.
§ 84. Two principal causes contributed to this extension
in the use of /ixij.
(i) Classical Greek furnishes many examples of ov with the
Participle where fir/ is admissible, and might even seem more
natural: as Herod, viii. 129, ol [lev 817 vteiv avrmv ouk iwurrd-
fxevoi 8i€(pBetpovTo :' Those, then, of them who did not know
how to swim were drowned,' =5'Mt natare nonpoterant (certain
definite persons): where oJ fit) eVtoTd^efot would have meant,
*8uch as did not know,'= 5'wi natare r^on x>ossent. First came
the habit of preferring /x»; to ow whei-e the choice was thus
open : the next step was to use /ii7 where ov alone was correct.
(2) lit} with Infinitive is classical after some verbs of be-
lieving, 2>Totesting, &c., where, as the stress is on a fact, ov
would have been natural; as Dem. In Ifid. § 221, irfniarTfvKe
. . . fiTjSeVa fXIfti/, ' he is confident that no one will drag
him.' [Dem.] or. 40 Adv. Boeotum de dote [probably by a con-
temporary of Demosthenes], § 47, aiiros eavrov KaTafJUipTvpel fiT]
f^ fKfivov yfyeyrjaOaiy * he testifies against himself, that he is
not that man's son.* Here pr) has a force similar to that of a
command or an oath :' let no one suppose that,' ' may I not
prosper if it is otherwise:' just as it is used in a statement
of negative fact with the Infinitive when the principal verb
is Imjierative: Aeschylus, Fers. 435, (v vvv toS" ictGi, p,T]S€ir<i>
ptaovv KOKov. The sense that pfj, in such contexts, was more
forcible than oi helped to recommend it in other contexts also;
thus illustrating by another example that straining after em-
phasis which attends on the decay of a fine instinct for the
powers of language.
R. C. JEBB.
PRINTED IN ENGLANDAT THE OXFOKU UNIVERSITY PKESS
6ir
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
PA D'Abernon, Edgar Vincent1058 1st viscountD25 A handbook to modern1919 Greek 2d ed., rev. and
enl.
(9